w i * LINIVERSIVY OF CALIFORNIA UNIVERS A GRAMMAR OF THE TELOOGOOLANGUAGE, COMMONLY TEEMED THE GENTOO, PECULIAR TO THE HINDOOS INHABITING THE NORTH EASTERN PROVINCES OF THE INDIAN PENINSULA. BY A. ^CAMPBELL, OF THE HONORABLE EAST INDIA COMPANY'S CIVIL SERVICE ON THE MADRAS ESTABLISHMENT, MEMBER OF THE BOARD OF SUPERINTENDENCE FOR THE COLLEGE OF FORT ST. GEORGE. THIRD EDITION. / ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ MADE AS: PRINTED AT THE HINDU PRESS. 1849. c \ ~f AD VER TTSEMENT. Since the establishment of the College of Fort William by Marquis Wellesley, the labors of many distinguished indivi- duals have added much valuable information to the knowledge before possessed of oriental literature, and afforded many faci- lities to the attainment of an improved acquaintance with the several dialects peculiar to the provinces immediately subject to the Supreme Government. A similar Institution (on a modified and less extensive scale) has more recently been esta- blished at Fort St. George, and may be expected, in course of time, to produce the same favorable results as regards the*lan- guages of the South of India ; respecting which very little has as yet appeared before the public through the medium of the press, though the languages themselves had, even before the establishment of the College, been cultivated with considerable success by many individuals. , For the establishment of the College of Fort St. George, and for the encouragement afforded in many other respects to the advancement of the literature of Southern India, the Public are in a great degree indebted to "Sir George Barlow; and the following is one of several works which" owe their rise to this source. C05 The Author, having been nominated to a seat at the Board of Superintendence for the College, had frequent opportunities of observing the disadvantage under which the Teloogoo Stu- dents laboured, from the want of a work on the elements of that language. An attempt to remove this impediment was a duty which the author's situation in some degree imposed ; and -actuated by this motive, as well as by a desire to rescue the Teloogoo from' the undeserved neglect in which its great diffi- culty had involved it, and to extend among his countrymen the^ knowledge of a language spoken by a large portion of the native subjects of the British Government in the South of India, he proceeded to arrange the notes, on the native grammars of the language, which he had taken to assist his own studies, in the form which they have assumed in the following pages. i The manuscript, tbus prepared, was submitted to the Go- vernment of Fort St. George, whose approbation it having been so fortunate as to obtain, the copy right was piirchased on the public account, and the Right Honorable the Governor in Council was pleased to direct that the work should be print- ed at the College Press, whence it now issues to the Public. Every first attempt to illustrate the principles of a foreign language is attended by peculiar difficulties; but to do justice to a language so highly cultivated as the Teloogoo required advantages to which the author makes no pretension : never- theless he hopes that in essential respects, the work will not be found deficient- He does not expect that it will remove ail the difficulties which have hitherto opposed the acquisition of the Teloogoo : if, by enabling the European Student to overcome the chief obstacles in his way, it lightens his labour, and facilitates his access to that eminence which all should endeavour to attain who seek distinction in the public service, the author's utmost wishes will be accomplished : at some future period, perhaps, the track which he has opened may be followed by others possessing more ability and leisure than himself, who, correcting those errors into which he- has fallen, may give to the world improved works, on one of the most useful and polished languages of India. TO HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONORABLE FRANCIS RAWDON HASTINGS, EARL OF MOIRA, K. G. GOVERNOR GENERAL AND COMMANDER IN CHIEF IN INDIA. $c. $c. Sfc. MY LORD, In dedicating to your Lordship the following elementary work, in elucidation of the principles of one of the most ancient, useful, and elegant languages of India, permit me, most respectfully, to express my grateful acknowledgements for the honor which it derives, from < being permitted to appear under the sanction of so illustrious a name. Public utility, the chief object of this work, constitutes also ' its. chief claim to the patronage of a Statesman whose liberal and en- lightened mind deems nothing beneath its notice which may be cal~ dilated, however remotely, to promote the interests of the Great Empire intrusted to his care. If) by diffusing among the civil and military servants on the Coast a more extended knowledge of the language of Telingana^ and an improved acquaintance with the character, customs, and manners, of the fine race of men who inhabit that country, the work here presented to your Lordship should contribute in any degree to the convenience of individuals, to the service of the Government, or to the security and happiness of its subjects, I shall have the satisfaction to reflect that, however imperfect its execution, it will not have proved altogether unworthy of the distinguished patronage with which jt has been honored. I have the honor to be, My Lord, * with the greatest respect, your Lordship's obliged and * *"' very obedient h umble servant A. D. CAMPBELL. INTRODUCTION. The language of which a Grammar is now offered to the Public is commonly, but improperly, termed by Europeans the Gentoo. It is the Andhra of Sanscrit authors, and, in the country where it is spoken, is known by the name of the Trilinga, Telinga, Teloogoo, or Tenapgoo. This language is the vernacular dialect of the Hindoos, inhabiting that part of (he Indian Peninsula, which, extending from the Dutch settlement of Pulicat on the Coast of Coromandel, inland to the vicinity of Bangalore, stretches northwards, along the coast as far as Chicacole, and in the interior to the sources of the Tapti ; bounded on the east by the Bay of Bengal, and on the west by an irregular line, passing through the western districts belonging to the Soubahdar of the Deccan, and cutting off the most eastern provinces of the new state of Mysore : -a tract in- cluding the five Northern Circars of Ganjam, Vizagapatam, Rajahmundry, Mastili-* patam, and Guntoor ; the greater portion of the Nizam's extensive territories; the districts of Cuddapah and Beliari ceded by him to the British ; the eastern provinces of Mysore; and the northern portion of the Carnatick : nor is this language unknown in the more Southern parts of India, for the descendants of those Teloogoo families which were deputed by the Kings of Vidianagara to con- troul their southern conquests, or which occasionally emigrated from Teljngana to avoid famine or oppression, are scattered all over the Dravida and Oarnataca pro- vinces ; and ever retaining- the language of their forefathers, have diffused a knowledge of it throughout the Peninsula' f t Among numerous authorities which may be quoted in support of the concluding part of this statement, 1 subjoin the following passages from the 'Travels of* Dr. Francis Buchanan, 4 work containing much statistical information, regarding the provinces in the interior of the Peninsula " Every where in K&rnata the palanquin-bearers are of Telinga descent, and in their oWn families " speak the language of then- original country" The Woddas or Woddaru are a tribe of Te- " Jinga origin, and in their families retain that language; although they are aeRttd all ov6r 11 INTRODUCTION. A tradition current in Telingana, and noticed by many of it's best native * Authors, states the original name of this language, aa well as that of the country in which it is spoken, to have been Tri-lingum, or in pure Teloogoo Modaga- lingum ; t namely the language or country of the three lingums : a name derived from the three lingums, or mystic symbols of the divinity, in the form, of which Shiva, the destructive and re-producing power in the Indian Trinity, is reported to have descended upon the mountains of Shri Shuelum or Purvatum, Caleswarum, and Bheemeswarnm or Dracharamum, where he is supposed still to hold his awful abode, and is worshipped under the respective names of Mullecarjoona, Calanadha, and Bheemeswara. These three lingums are said to have marked the chief boundaries of the country known in modern times by the name of Telingana. The first, that of Shri Shuelum, " the countries where the Tamil and Karnataca tongues are prevalent" Speaking of a cast known by the name of Baydaru, he observes " Those in the North-eastern parts of the Mysore Rajah's " dominions are of Telinga descent, and retain tbac language They seem to be the true Sudra " cultivators and military of Telingana, and to have been introduced in great numbers into the " southern countries of the Peninsula, when these became subject to Andray or Telingana princes.'* * See the Preface of Maumidi Vencayab, a learned native inhabitant of Masulipatam, to bia Teloogoo Dictionary, the copy right of which has been purchased by the Madras Government ; and the original authorities therein referred to. Among others, the Adhurvana Vyacurnum. a given in the Andhra Cowmudi, from which the following is a quotation. i$ i~?O ^psScfS"" v$f *&s)&fl^ I He (alluding to Andhra Vishtnoo the son of Soochundra hereafter mentioned) having built an immense wall, connecting Shri Shuelum, Bheemeswaram, and Caleswaram, with the Mahendra hills, formed in it three gates, in which the three eyed Ishwara, bearing the trident in his hand, and attended by a host of divinities, resided in the form of three lingums. Andhra- Vishtnoo, assisted by angels, having fought with the great giant Nishumboo, for thirteen yoogs, killed him in battle, and took up his residence with tHe sages on 'the banks of the Goddvery, since which time, this country has been named Trilingum. Then follows the passage given in the last Teloogoo quota- tion in the notes to this introduction.' t Tri in Sanscrit, and Moodoo in the inferior, or Modo or Modooja in the superior dialect of the pure Teloogoo, all mean three. INTRODUCTION. 1H still celebrated in the Deccan, is particularly described in the extract from Captain Colin Mc'Kenzie's journal inserted in the 5th volume of the Asiatic Researches, of which a part is subjoined in a note below. * It is ro- mantically situated in an unfrequented spot, surrounded by an almost impene- trable forest, among the wild mountains through which the impetuous current of the Kistna forces it's passage from the high table land to the plains, and forms the termination of that chain of hills, which, from the vicinity of the great temple at Tripetty, winds to the north in irregular and separate ranges. In Arrowsmith's Map of 1804, it is placed near the Nalmul hill* in Canoul (Kurnool) under the name of Parrawottum, upon the Kistna, just before that river takes a sudden but short direction to the north. It is the second of the twelve Jyotee lingums men- tioned as peculiarly holy, in the 38th Ac^iyaye of the Sheev Pooran ; and, in the Brahmanda Pooran, it is also mentioned as the eighth of the second class of mountains. In tfye year 1677, we find Sevajee, the celebrated founder of the Mah- ratta Empire, performing penance at this shrine f ; and, on the annual recurrence of the Shivaratree, or the night sacred to Shiva, immense crowds of peoplg still flock thither from all parts of Hindoostan. J * " On entering the south gate," says Captain Mc'Kenzie, we descended by steps through a " small door to the inner court, where the temple are. In the center was the Pagoda of Mallecarjee, ' the principal deity worshipped here. It is ?quar subsequently known to the Mahommedan conquerors of the Deccan under the modified name of Telingana ; for the _ f " I might now" says Captain Blunt " be said to have entered upon those parts of India known " by the^na^ne of Telingana The inhabitants of which are called Telingahs and speak a language " peculiar to themselves This dialect appears to bear a strong resemblance to what in the Circars " is called Gentoos After the heat of the day, and length of the march, our situation close to the " river had a very refreshing and pleasing effect I was highly delighted with the romantic view " which the confluence of the Godavery and Baun Gunga rivers now presented I could see quite " wp to the fort Suruncha, and an opening beyond it likewise shewed the junction of the Inderwotty " river with the latter The blue mountains and distant forests which terminated the prospect render- " ed the whole a very sublime and interesting scene There is a small Pagoda sacred to the Hindoo " Goddess Cali, situated on the north east ba*nk of the river, at the confluence, which imparts it's " name to this passage over the Gunga Godavery, called Calesair t haut, and annually draws a " great concourse of pilgrims, who fr,om ideas of purification come to wash in the waters of the " confluent streams." * " Dr. Buchanan's travels Vol. Ill Chapter XVI Page 134 "'At Sheraly is a river called She- " raly-tari-which comes from a temple on the Ghauts that is termed Bhimesara" N. B. Sheraly *f is placed by Arrowsmith to the South of Onore on the Coast of Canara, under the name of '*' Serowly" in the latitude of which the boundaries of the three countries abovem^utioncd meet. INTRODUCTION, . V northern and southern limits of Telingana proper, as exhibited in our best maps, will be found to coincide very nearly with the sites of these two temples. In further confirmation of this tradition, it may be noticed that Ptolemy men- tions " Triglyphon vel Trilingum regia " f but places it beyond the Ganges ; and that Pliny, alluding to the same region, under it's purer name of Modogalingum makes it an island in the Ganges " Insula in gange estmagncs amplititdmis, gentem continens unam, Modogalingum nomine" Inaccuracies respecting situation are not uncommon in the writings of the ancients relative to Indian geography, and those which have just been mentioned, with some other similar inconsistencies, may perhaps be reconciled, by supposing that under the name of the Ganges, either the Ganges proper, or the Godaverv, may occasionally be understood. In The Peninsula, each of these rivers is known by the name of the Gunga, and they are looked upon as sister streams. ** The Godavery is here considered the elder of the two, perhaps from it's being the first known to the inhabitants of these regions ; and the Ganges proper is deemed the more holy, apparently from the present religion of India, having originated, or been more early established, on its banks. The ancient books* of the Hindoos, indeed, bear testimony that, even in the most remote times, these two* rivers have occasionally been considered as one ; for, in more than ,one place t He adds, in hoc galli gallinacei barbati esse dicuntur, et corvi etpsiltaci albi- . the Sicacollum of Arrowsmith, which stands in the Masulipataoa district, a little above the "mouth of the Krishna, ia the Sanscrit name for a peculiar red or whitish crow. It has been already stated that Tri and Modoga are synonimous terms. So intimate is the connexion between these two rivers, that those who carry the sacred water of the Ganges to the south of India, when they arrive on the banks of the Godaverv, inva- riably replace the water of the Ganges, evaporated on the journey, by water taken from it's sister stream the Godavery. The whole is notwithstanding considered to be the pure water of the Ganges, and this ceremony is never omitted. If it were, it is believed, and perhaps with reason, that the water would disappear before it could reach Rameswarum. * In the Vayu Puran the course of the Ganges is ihus described '* The Ganges flows through " the Gand.harvas, Cinnaras, Yacshas, Racshagas, Vidyad.haras. (Uragas or large snakes; these " fire tribes of demons god and bad in the hill.) Calapagratnacas, Paradas, Sviganas, Svasas, Ceratas, " Pulindas, Curavas, in Guru about Tanehsar, Sam-Bharatas, Pnnchalas, C'asi or Benares, Matayas, " Magadhas (or south Hehar) Brahmottaras, Angas, Panga?, Caliiigas," &c, Asiatic researches Vol. Sth. Essay on the sacred isles in the west. VI INTRODUCTION. in the Poorans, the Ganges proper is described as passing through Calinga, a country which we know to be the region watered by the Godavery*. So far, there- fore, as regards the course of the Ganges through Calinga, described in these ancient books, it must be the Godavery to which they allude. From the adjective Trilinga, by a general grammatical rule \ is derived Tilinga,^ or as it is more generally written Telinga From Tilinga also, by corruption, the Native Grammarians derive the words Tenoogoo and Teloogoo which is the name now generally given to the language in the country where it is spoken. The little resemblance between Tenoogo or Teloogoo, and Telinga, may induce an Eng- lish reader to question this derivation : but, as I have remarked in a subsequent part of this work, great deference is due by a foreigner to the testimony of Native Authors; and when it is considered that many words have passed into Teloogoo through the medium of the Pracrit, or other corrupted dialects of the Sanscrit, and ' have been naturalized in it for ages, the little connexion now to be traced between some original words, and their corruptions, ought not alone to invalidate the established etymologies of successive Grammarians. It may not be irrelevant, however, to observe, that Teloogoo may possibly be derived from i the adjective Tellu. ** fair, white, an appellation which might with much propriety be applied to the people of Telihgana, compared with the neighbouring nations ; In the Brahmanda Pcoran, also, the course of the Ganges is thus described. " The southern branch ' goes' to Gadhamandana from hill to hill, from stone to stone ; it encircles the forest of Gadhaman- " dana or Deva-nandana, whence it is called Alacananda, it goes to the'Northern lake, called Manasa, " thence to,the king of mountains with three summits, thence to the Mountains of Calinga," Asiatic " Researches Vol. 8th. Essay on the sacred isles in the west- * Asiatic Researches Vol. Ill article 3d. The reader is requested to refer to the conclusion of the second Chapter of the grammar. t Tilinga is mentioned in the Brahmanda Puran as an inland Country, situated betweea CasicosaJa or Benares, and Magadha. Vol. 8tji. of the Asiatic Researches. Essay on the sacred isles in the west. ** The participle 9^0 (the same as 9OX>?5^ ma y be added to each of these words, used ad- jectively, which thus became ~l?e>&> Tellugoo and QcS/fo Tenugoo respectively. These deri- vations, however, are not free from objection, for they are not in strict conformity to the gramma- tical rules for Sund.hi. INTRODUCTION. Vll and that Tenoogoo may be translated sweet, from Tene, honey, a denomination by no means inapplicable to a language that has often been termed the Italian of the East> The Country known by the name of Modogalingum or Trilihgum appears to have been subdivided, at a very early period, into the Calinga and Andhra provinces. Calinga* stretched northwards along the coast, from the Godavery towards the Ganges ; including those regions which are situated in the vicinity of the second lingum at Caleswarum, from which it probably took it's name Calingum** The nation is mentioned by Pliny as " Calingce prozimimari" and ' Gentes gangari dum Calinffaruni" and the people and language of Telingana are still known to the inha- bitants of the Eastern islands by no other name than Caling or Keling4 Andhra, whence the first ancient dynasty of Hffictoo Emperors appear to have derived their name,*** seems to have been an inland subdivision to the south of the Godavery, greater in extent than Calinga. Pliny, after specifying the names of several Indian nations, alludes to the Andhrae as a superior people " Validior deinde gens Andhrte " plurimis vicis XXX oppidis, guce muris turribusque muniuntur regi prcebet peditum " C. M. equitum M. M. ekphantos -M" and Andhra, which is the name given to the Teloogoo by all Sanscrit Grammarians who have written respecting it, continues to be the current appellation of the language in many parts of the Country. The most ancient Teloogoo Grammarian of whom mention is made in the native books is the sage Kunva, who is said to have been the first that composed a treatise * It has been already noticed that Telinga is mentioned in the Brahmunda Pooran, as situated between Casi-cosala and Magadha, that is between Benares and Bahar proper-Calinga is mentioned in the same Pooran, as situated between Cosala and Banga ; in other words, between Benares and Bengal proper-Sth Vol : of the Asiatic Researches Essay on the sacred isles of the west This proves the two to have been at least contiguous, but the one is'generally understood to have been a subdivision of the other. * ** Caleswarum is one of the names of the God Shiva, Calingum is the same name for the same deity, only uader a different form, namely the form of the mystic lingum. If. Marsdens Malay Grammar. *** See article VII Vol : 2d of the Asiatic Researches. INTRODUCTION. on the principles of the language. It f is stated that he executed this work by com- mand of a king of Andhra, named Andhra royoodoo, son J of Soochundra who reigned at Siccacollum on the banks of the Krishna. On the death of Soochundra, Andhraroyoodoo quitted the capital of Siccacollum, and established his residence on the banks of the Godavery possibly at Rajahmundry, which we afterwards find mentioned as the capital of the Kings of the Chalookia race. Many fabulous accounts of the feats of this prince are current in, Telingana, and such has been the veneration of the people for his virtues, that they have deified him as an incarnation of the God Vishtnoo, in which character he is still worshipped at the ancient capital of Siccacollum near Masulipatam. The works of Kunva, of Audharvan Achary, and of several other ancient Gram- marians, are not now to be found. All the treatises on Teloogoo grammar, at present i extant, consist of Sanscrit commentaries, (5n*a series of concise apothegms written in Sanscrit by a Bramin named Nannapa, or Nunniah Bhutt. The text of Nunniah Bhutt, as explained by his best commentators, has been my principal guide in the work which I now offer to the Public ; but as the illustrations, compari- sons/ and arrangement of these Authors are borrowed exclusively from , the language in which they compose, and from a system of grammar *the most artificial perhaps ever invented by human ingenuity., I have adhered t Kunva said " He who speaks irreverently of my Grammar, composed by the command of And hra Vishtnoo, shall be considered as guilty of irreverence to his Priest." And.hra Cowmudi. I Hari The King of Andhra, the great Vishtnoo, the destroyer of the giant Nishumbhoo, formerly, in the Caliyoog of the grand period called Swayumbhoova, was born as the son of the chief of kings Soochundra, ruling at Cacolum. Andhra Cowmudi. Then follows the passage quoted in the first note. In Teloogoo, the name of this place, and of Chicacole in the Ganjam District, are the same ; hut the two must not be confounded. INTRODUCTION. ix to them in these respects, so far only as they are calculated to assist an English Student. I have often been obliged to deviate from them, and, in imitation of my guides, to accommodate my illustrations &c. &c. to the grammar of the language in which I write. Nunniah Bhutt, the author of the apothegms above mentioned, undertook also the herculean labor of translating the voluminous Mahabarut from Sanscrit into Teloogoo verse ; and although he did not live to finish this work, which was subse- quently completed by Tickuna Somiazooloo, he succeeded in immortalizing his memory in this part of India, by rendering this book the great standard of Teloo-' goo poetry. We learn from the introduction to * the Teloogoo Mahabharut that The following is an extract from the passage here alluded to cO~ |J ^23S5b<>T^55boS^O, So . "* v-x X INTBODUCTION. Nunniah Bhutt was cotemporary with the King Vishtnoo Vurdhana, ** of the Shiva sect and Chalookia race, who reigned at Rajahmundry on the banks of the Godavery. Colonel Wilkes, in his Historical Sketches of the South of India, makes the Chalookia race more ancient than the Cadurnba kings of Bunawassi, whose dynasty is stated to have been subverted in the second century of the Christian aera. If this be admitted, the works of Nunnia Bhutt may boast of great antiquity. Affectionately protecting the inhabitants of his Empire receiving, with satisfaction, the tribute of foreign Sovereigns, whose kingdoms had been subdued by him, and humbling the pride of those prin- ces who haughtily withheld payment illuminating the corners of the world with his commands protecting the whole race of Brumins shielding the timid wh<> solicited shelter compassionately bestowing the most excellent and extensive Agraharams on the first born men (BraminsJ enlighten- ing vast wealth by celestial enjoyment and thus following the precepts of Menu, lived Vishtnoo Vurdhana, the increaser of his race. He, the ornament of the Chalookia family, constantly enjoying *the glory of his vast empire residing, with excessive delight, and with the splendour of the great Indra, in his capital of Rajahmahendra, which is the chief gem of the Vegu Empire, the great orna- ment of the goddess of the Earth, (encompassed by the waters of all the oceans] attended, in his suptrb palace, which is the sent of glory of the whole world, by Ministers, Priests, Generals, Cham- bf-rlains. Counsellors, 'Magistrates, neighbouring princes, and beautiful damsels and surrounded by Grammarians, skilled in the boundless doctrines of articulate sounds, Historians, acquainted with the Bharata, Rdmayanum, and all the Poorans, Great Poets, celebrated jor clothing the most pleasing and gentle images in the sweetest verse, famous Philosophers, skilled in all the sublime sciences, and diving into the ocean of abstruse reasoning, and many other learned men amusing himself with study deeply interested in agreeable history, and experienced in the rules of justice sitting, with de- light, thus affectionately addressed the venerable and virtuous Nannapa, the Brahmin and affectionate adherent of his family, incessantly devoted to sacrifice and meditation, auther of a copious gram- mar, skilled in the Sumhetas, fully versed in various Poorans, such as the Bramhanda tyc. a meritori- ous man, the follower of the aphorisms of Apastamba, born in the gotram of Mudgola, commended by virtuous men, pure in his actions, experienced in worldly affairs, in wisdom like Broohusputee, celebrated for composing poetry in both languages, famed for genius, a speaker of truth which is everlasting. The king then proceeds to request that ha will translate the Mahabharut. ** Thi8 prince must not be confounded with another Vishtnoo Vurdhana, who reigned in the eleventh century of our era, but who was neither of the Chalookia race, nor of the Shiva sect ; he was a Tilinga king of the Belial dy nasty, and was converted from the jain religion to the sect of Visbtnoo, by the famous Rama Anuj Achary, the head of the Shri Vaishnavas or Ayengars, one of the three great sects into which the Hindoos of the Peninsula are now divided. Page 12 of Vol 1st. INTRODUCTION. XI Although the Teloogoo would thus appear to have been a cultivated lan- guage at a very early period, it is hardly to be expected, among the different political and religious convulsions which have so often violently agitated the Deccan, that many of the productions of so remote an age should have reached these times. Accordingly, with the exception of the abovementioned works of Nunniah Bhutt, and some books composed towards the close of the twelfth cen- tury, during the reign of Pertaub Roodroo, one of the last kings of the Belial dynasty, which succeeded that of Cadumba, we find that nearly all the Teloogoo works now current in the country were written after the dissolution of the ancient government of Telingana, and the establishment of the more modern empire of Vidianagara. On the capture of Warunkul, t Tftecapital of the Belial Kings of Telingana, by the Pattans, A. D. 1323, certain officers of these ancient princes are stated to have emigrated to the southern provinces, where they founded the celebrated city of Vidianagara or Vizianagara, the Bijanagur of Arrowsmith, and established a new dynasty of twenty princes* known by the name of Raya or Rdtjaloo, who gradually extended their sway all over the South of India, and reigned from the commencement of the fourteenth to the close of the sixteenth century. Of these kings, the most celebrated was Krishna Royaloo, a prince who reigned -during the earlier part of the sixteenth century. He is highly renowned* in Telingana for his piety in repairing the numerous temples in the Carnatick, t This word is pure Teloogoo 2o5b*f ex), and signifies a single stone, a solid rock, or perhaps 2o&?feX) a touch stone. *"** * I am indebted to the friendship of that able and distinguished officer Colonel McKanzie C. B. of the Madras Engineers, now Surveyor General of India, for the following translation of an ex- tract from the Gutpurtee Manuscript in his valuable and extensive collection, containing, in the form of a prophecy, a chronological account of these kings. Numerous inscriptions, and grants of land, in the possesion of Colonel McKenzie confirm the correctness of this account. A,S. AD. Y. M. D. 1258 1336 1 In the Saleevahan Sakum 1258, in the year Jjaatoo, on the 2d of Vysakum month, on the new moon, "Hurryhur Raya will commence 14 1272 1350 2 After him, his brother Booka Royaloo will succeed in that kingdom and will reign 29 8 M INTRODUCTION. * and for the great personal bravery he displayed in the course of his extensive conquests in the Peninsula, but Chiefly for his munificent encouragement of Teloogoo literature. A. S A.D Y 22 17 16 20 *< 21 4 6 1 2 5 13 21 12 22 5 14 28 <{ 15 15 M. M II II <( 9 10 <( << (i << ti ii t> 11 8 4 5 n D o II (I .1 II (1 M (I ( (1 II (I 15 i. < it 1301 1323 1340 1356 13/f 1376 1378 1399 1403 1409 1410 1412 1417 1426 1430 1452 1464 1486 1451 1451 1494 5507 1536 1552 my 1401 1418 1434 1454 1455 '1456 147? 1481 1487 1488 1490 1495 1504 1509 1530 1542 1564 1569 1569 1572 1585 16\4 1630 15 After him Naraxa Royaloo will rule (including 5 years in the name 16 of) His son Veer a, Narsimha Royaloo from the Cycle year Rak- tachee A S 1426 17 The second son of Narasa Royaloo, named Krishna Royaloo will rule. 18 From the Cycle year Veecrooty Achoota Dava Royaloo will reign !9 From thence Satica Timma Raaze From the beginning of the Cycle year Soobacroot in the Jasta month, Rama Royaloo will rule 22 years 20 Sadasevoo Royaloo and keeping him in his possession. The Kingdom 21 In the Cycle year Pramodoota Teroomal Royaloo will establish himself 22 His son Sree Rnnga Royaloo will then reign from the Cycle year An- 23 After which, from the Cycle Paardeva of the 10th of Maugura of the -^:-->->- After him, of the Kings of the Chundra race none will remain ; and fo- reign kings will rule the land, deriving, their authority from no legal right 25 After him Rama Rauze changing his true name, to that of Ramadava After this, the Country will be in great disorder for some time, and pro- digies and portentous omens will appear between the year Bahoodanya (Elere the Account terminates in a prophetical annunciation of a Deliverer of the Hindoo Race.) From circumstances, observes Colonel Mc'Kenzie, we may infer that this account was written A. D. 1630. * By an inscription on the great* tower erected over the grand entrance into the famous Shiva temple at Conjeveram, which is supposed to be the highest building of the kind in India, we find that it blasts of this jtriru-e as it's founder. IXNBODUCTION. A great number of books, composed during the reigu of Krishna Royaloo, are still to be found in the libraries of the present Polygars, of whom many in the Northern Districts, as far as Nellore, and several in the South, are descended from the former officers of the Vidianagara government : but the intolerant zeal of the Mahommedans, whose irruptions into the South of India terminated in the over- throw of the Vidianagara Empire, has left of the more ancient Teloogoo works little else remaining than the name. The works still extant, however, are sufficiently numerous and various to evince the great degree of refinement to which the Teloogoo has attained. Few languages will be found more copious, more nervous, or more regular in construction, and it may boast, in a peculiar manner, of great elegance of expression, and melody of sound. Under the fostering auspices of fhe British Government, it is confidently hoped that the Teloogoo may recover that place which it once held among the languages of the East, and that the liberal policy of the Legislature f may bo successful in renewing, among the Natives of Telingana, that spirit of literature and science, which formerly so happily prevailed among them, and still so much endears to their remembrance the days of the most enlightened of their, Hindoo Rulers* Nearly the whole body of Teloogoo literature consists of Poetry, written iu what may be termed the superior dialect of the language ; but so different is this from the inferior or colloquial dialect, in common use among all classes of the Having heard that a number of poems, engraved on some thousand sheets of copper, had been preserved by the pious care of a family of Bramins in the temple on the sacred hill at Tnpetty, 1 deputed a Native for the purpose of examining them ; but, with the exception of a treatise oa Grammar, of which a copy was taken, the whole collection was found to contain nothing but voluminous hymns in praise of the deity. t The following is an extract from the act of the British Parliament to which I allude. " And ' be it further enacted, that it shall be lawful for the Governor General in Council to direct, ' that out of any surplus which may remain of the rents revenues and profits, arising from the ' sid Territorial acquisitions, after defraying the" expenses of the Military, Civil, and Com- " raercial Establishments, and paying the Interest of the Debt, in manner heroin-after provided, ' a sum of not lees than one Lack of Rupees in each year shall be set apart arid applied to the 'revival and improvement of literature, and the encouragement of the learned Natives of India, ' and for the introduction and promotion of a kuowledgw of the science unu>ny the InhabitatUs of the British Territories in India. XIV ' INTRODUCTION. people, that even to the learned, the use of commentaries is indispensable for the correct understanding of many of their best works. This peculiarity of two dialects is common to the Teloogoo, with the Tamil and the Karnataca. In the course of this work, I propose to give all the rules for the superior dialect, as being that from which the other is derived, but 1 shall carefully notice the peculiarities of the common dialect. The reader will bear in mind that in conversation and official business, the inferior is used to the entire exclusion of the superior dialect, and that in all books or studied compositions, a contrary rule obtains. Such as have acquired a knowledge of the Teloogoo language merely with a view to colloquial intercourse with the people, or to the transaction of official business, and have confined their studies exclusively to the inferior dialect, may accuse me of entering on an unprofitable and unnecessary task, in treating of the other, which, in their estimation, may be deemed altogether foreign to the Teloogoo. An attentive examination of the two may possibly lead to a very different con- clusion: at all events, as this work is intended as much to enable the student to < understand the rules which regulate the classical compositions of the Natives, as to teach him to speak or write the common Teioogoo, I have deemed it my duty to follow the Native Grammarians by tracing the language to it's original source in the superior dialect at the same time, I have not neglected it's more useful branches in the inferior dialect, which, as being vulgar, Native authors have considered beneath the notice of the learned. The Teloogoo is spoken with the greatest purity in the Northern Circars, i and with much of it's native simplicity by the Ratsawars, Velmawars, and other superior classes in those districts. More conversant with arms, however, than with books, the Ratsawars * and Velmawars are in general ignorant of the princi- i * The affecting tale of the Zemindar of Boobily, related by Orme, is one of many that might be quoted, in elucidation of the nice sense of honor, and romantic bravery, inherent in this fine race of men. Our want of sufficient attention to their habits and customs, rather than any callous disregard for their prejudices, has occasionally driven others of this tribe to similar acts of self destruction, which are much to be deprecated, and which, indelibly imprinted on the minds of the people, materially affect the popularity of our Government. INTRODUCTION. XV pies of their own tongue- Indeed the three inferior classes of Telingana, unlike their neighbours of the Tamil Nation, seem to have abandoned the culture of their language, with every other branch of literature and science, to the sacred tribe* The Vussoochuritru is the only Teloogoo work of note not composed by a Bramin. But, with the manners and habits of their ancestors, the Velmawars, Comtees, and Soodra casts, descended from the aborigines of the country, retain a great deal of the original language of Telingana, and are more sparing in the use of Sanscrit words than the Bramins. It has been very generally asserted, and indeed believed, that the Teloogoo has it's origin in the language of the Vedums, and many of the most eminent oriental scholars have given their authority in support of this opinion. It is not *' * ... without much deference, therefore, that I venture publicly to state my inquiries to have led me to contrary conclusion ; but I do so with the less hesitation, as I find myself supported by the concurrent evidence of all Native Authors who have ever written on the subject of the Teloogoo language. On this, and on several other material points connected with the structure of the Teloogoo, I regret that my sentiments should be entirely at variance with, those of so celebrated an orientalist as Dr. Carey, one of the learned Professors in the College of Fort William, to whom the Public are indebted for a very copious Grammar of the Sanscrit language, and for a series of works on the elements of the spoken dialects of India. In the preface to a Telinga Grammar, which issued from the press after the present work had been completed and submitted to Government, Dr. Carey writes as follows, " The languages of the South of India " I. e. the Telinga, Karnata, Tamil, Malayala, and Cingalese, while they have " the same origin with those of the North" (viz. the Sanscrit) differ greatly from " them in other respects : and especially in Having a large proportion of words the "origin of which is unascertained ; or, as he afterwards terms them, words current " in the country, "^^^, of which the derivation is uncertain-" XVI INTRODUCTION. While I coincide in opinion with Dr. Carey, that, '-among these five languages, " the Telinga appears to be the most polished, and though confessedly a very " difficult language, it must be numbered with those which are the most worthy " of cultivation, it's variety of inflection being such as to give it a capacity of " expressing ideas with a high degree of facility, justness, and elegance"; with deference, I submit that he has given an erroneous view of the structure and deri- vation of the Teloogoo. In common with every other tongue now spoken in India, modern Teloogoo abounds with Sanscrit words, perhaps it has a greater proportion of them than any of the other southern dialects; nevertheless there is reason to believe that the origin of the two languages is altogether distinct. With the exception of a few letters peculiar to Sanscrit words, and evidently taken from the Nagree alphabet, the round and flowing characters of the Teloogoo bear no resemblance to the square Devanagree : and even if the Teloogoo alphabet were found to be derived from the Nagree, it would only prove that the people of Telingana had borrowed the invention of a more civilized nation. The origin of their language might still be as different from that of their alphabet, as the origin of our present Roman characters, from that of our Saxon words. . It has already been mentioned that all the Native Teloogoo Grammars arc written by Bramins, in the Sanscrit tongue; and that th'eir arrangement of the alphabet, their illustrations, and their comparisons, are necessarily borrowed from the language in which they write. This circumstance might justify the sup- position that the Bramins were the first who cultivated the Teloogoo, and brought it under fixed rules : but it cannot be urged in proof of any radical connexion between the Teloogoo and the Sanscrit. It has also been noticed that, in speaking the Teloogoo, the Soodras use very fevJ Sanscrit words: among the superior classes of Vysyus, and pretenders to the Rajah cast, Sanscrit terms ar? used only in proportion to their greater intimacy with the Bramins, and their books; and, when we find even such Sanscrit words as these classes do adopt, pronounced by them in so improper and rude a manner as to be a common jest to the Bramins, who, at the same time, never question their INTRODUCTION. XVH pronunciation of pure Teloogoo words, I think we may fairly infer it to he probable at least that these Sanscrit terms were originally foreign to the language spoken by the great body of the people. Some Native Grammarians * maintain that, before the King Andhraroyadoo f established his residence on the banks of the Godavery, the only Teloogoo words \ were those peculiar to what is emphatically termed the pure Teloogoo, now generally named the language of the land, which they consider coeval with the people, or as they express it " created by the God Brimha." The followers of this prince, say they, for the first time began to adopt Sanscrit terms with Teloogoo terminations, and by degrees corruptions from the Sanscrit crept into the language, from the ignorance of the people respecting the proper pronunciation of the original words. This would imply that the nation still retain some faint remem- brance of those times, in which their 'language existed independent of the San- scrit ; and it is certain that every Teloogoo Grammarian, from the days of Nunnia Bhutt to the present period, considers the two languages as derived from sources entirely distinct ; for each commences his work by classing the words of the language under four separate heads, which they distinguish by the respective names of ~&&$&x> language of the land, e#)3&55bo Sanscrit derivatives, 8&\x> Sanscrit corruptions, and \^A^ / SfcCS&> provincial terms. To these, latter authors have * See the Adhurvana Vyacurnum, as given in the Audhra Cowmudi. e i Cf i ^ "C 7an> fr*~%'e-&r>% \ T^tfjSbsSn^cStfC o&&) S&Q & e . iS**T tf 3rraoS_tf2\ S5"o^8Ss# ae-tfC ^rC o-tf-^-S5^^-J|S)%l#2 | #25\ iW ,6* IS'Sie "^"sr^TS'g ^T^S S ^ TT>0 "^ ^SbSJ- ^"^? I Job^) \ TS^eSb ^C55b^>v 15^2 || The adherents of And, hra Vishtnoo (before mentioHed) who then resided on the banks of the Qodavery spoke Tulsama words, (Sanscrit derivatives). In the coarse of time, these words, not being properly articulated by the unlearned, by tJie changt or obliteration of letters, or by being contracted, a fourth, or a half, became Tudb havas, ('Sanscrit corruptions.) Those words consisting of nouns, verbals, and verbs, created by the God Brimha, before the time of Hari, the Lord of Andjira, are called Uch,ha, (pure.) ' f This is the prince who is now worshipped as a divinity at Siccacolluro on the river Krishna, ami who was the patron of Kunva, the first Teloogoo Grammarian. INTRODUCTION. added &tf$~>$ &x>foreign words or those from other lands. As this arrangement is essential to a proper illustration of the structure of the Teloogoo language, it will be adhered to in the following work. Of the different classes of words specified above, the tree first only are mentioned in the Telinga Grammar by Dr. Carey; the first is there stated to comprize " words current in the country of which the derivaton is uncertain", a " large proportion" of which are allowed to be included in the language ; the second is stated to contain " pure Sungskrita words ;" and the third " words derived from the Sungskrita, " but written and pronounced differently." The words included in the first class, which I have denominated the language of the land, are not only a " large proportion" of words, but the most numerous in the language, and the model by which' those included in the other classes are modified and altered, from the diffrent languages to which they originally belong. Why the origin of this class of terms is supposed to be unascertained has not been stated ; nor can I conceive how so erroneous a conclusion could have been adopt- ed; for the name given to them by all Sanscrit Grammarians, by the whole body of the people, and by Dr. Carey himself, at once points out their derivation. This name is "^^5^, a noun used either as a substantive or an adjective, in the former sense denoting a country or land, in the latter, in which it is here used, implying that which belongs to the country or land ; it marks the words in question, not as merely " current in the country," but as the growth and produce of the land ; it would be difficult to define more precisely the origin of any words, and to this class must we look for the pure Teloogoo for the true language of the land. The second class of words I have termed Sanscrit derivatives, and I prefer this denomination* to that; of "pure Sungskrita words" given to it by Dr. Carey; for although the words included in it contain the crude forms of pure Sanscrit words, they cannot appear in Teloogoo in their INTRODUCTION. XIX original shape, but invariably assume terminations or undergo changes peculiar to the pure Teloogoo, or language of the land. The third class of words which is generally mentioned by Dr. Carey as " derived from the Sungskrita," I have named Sanscrit Corruptions ; it consists of words which have passed into Teloogoo, either directly from the Sanscrit, or through the medium of some of it's corrupted dialects, such as the Pracrit, and which, in order to be assimilated to the language of the land, have undergone radical alterations, by the elision, insertion, addition, or subtraction of letters, these changes have been sometimes carried so far, that it is difficult to trace any connexion between the adulterated word and it's original in Sanscrit. In the course of this work, it will be obvious to the Sanscrit scholar that the declension of the noun, by particles or words added to it the use of a plural pronoun (&>$x>) applicable to the, first and second persons conjointly the conjugation of the affirmative verb the existence of a negative aorist, a nega- tive imperative and other negative forms in the verb the union of the neuter and feminine genders in the singular, and of the masculine and feminine genders in the plural, of the pronouns and verbs and the whole body of the syntax, are entirely unconnected with the Sanscrit; while the Tamil and Karnataca scholar will at once recognize their radical connexion with each of ' these languages. The reader will find all words denoting the different parts of the human frame, the various sorts of food or utensils in common use among the Natives, the several parts of their dress, the compartments of .their dwellings, the degrees of affinity and consanguinity peculiar to them, in short all terms , expressive of primitive ideas or of things necessarily named in the earlier stages of society, to belong to the pure Teloogoo or language of the land*. It is true, (so mixed have the two languages now become) ttyit Sanscrit derivatives or corruptions may, without impropriety, be occasionally used to denote some of these. This, however, is not common, the great body of Sanscrit words admitted info the language consists of abstract terms, and of words connected with science, religion, or law ' * The reader* U requested to refer to the irregular o^ C5&D nouns. xx INTRODUCTION. I as is the case, in a great degree, with the Greek and Latin words incorporated with our own tongue : but even such Sanscrit words as are thus introduced into Telogoo are not allowed to retain their original forms, they undergo changes, and assume terminations and inflections unknown to the Sanscrit, and, except as foreign quotations, are never admitted into Teloogoo until they appear in the dress peculiar to the language of the land. This brief notice of the structure of the Teloogoo seemed necessary, in order to explain the principles on which the following chapters are founded : the further consideration of the subject I leave to others, as the prolonged dis- cussion of it is foreign to a work of this nature. I am inclined, however, to believe that the Teloogoo will be found to have it's origin in a source different from the Sanscrit, a source common perhaps to the Teloogoo, with the superior dialects of the Tamil and Karnatca. But the introduction of Sanscrit words into this language must have taken place at so remote a period, as to be now almost beyond the reach of inquiry. With the religion of the Bramins, the people of Tilingana could not fail to adopt much of the language of that extraordinary tribe ; their constant intercourse with each other for a long series of years has necessarily confirmed this intermixture of language, and it must be admitted that the Teloogoo has been as much improved by adopting an indefinite number of words from the Sanscrit, as our own tongue has been ameliorated by borrow- ing from the more refined languages of Greece and Rome. Having concluded the few introductory remarks which I had to offer to the reader in explanation of 'the plan of my work, I avail myself of this occasion to make my public acknowledgments for the assistance with which I have been favoured in the course of it's progress. To my friend Mr. Stokes af the civil service on this establishment, who did me the favour to peruse the manuscript before it was submitted to the Govern- ment, I owe many valuable suggestions ; and I am under particular obligations to my colleagues in the Board of Superintendence for a most laborious and ITNRODUCT1ON. XXI critical examination of the whole work. Mr. Ellis and Archdeacon Mousley are in a special manner entitled to my thanks ; for their criticisms enabled me to correct many imperfections that had otherwise escaped my notice. In examining the principles inculcated by the best native grammarians, I was assisted by my Teloogoo instructor Woodiagherry Vencatanarrain Ayah, a young bramin of superior intelligence and remarkable acquirements, who, by his own merits alone, subsequently rose to the situation of Head English master at the College of Fort St. George, and lately to the more honorable office of Interpreter to the Supreme Court of judicature at the Presidency. He generally sat by me while I wrote the notes from which this Grammar has been compiled, and I may therefore be said to have availed myself of his aid and advice throughout the work. . I have only further to add that on all intricate points of grammar I have inva- riably consulted the learned Pundit Putabhi Rama Sastry Head Sanscrit and Teloogoo master at the College, and where I found the native grammarians at variance, have been regulated chiefly by his opinions, in attempting to reconcile their difl'crences, or in selecting that authority to which the preference has been given. i JVOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION, In support of what I have ventured to advance, in the preceding introduction, on the subject of the structure and derivation of the Teloogoo language, it is peculiarly gratifying to me to be allowed to quote the high authority of my friend Mr. Francis W. Ellis, at the Jiead of the Board of Superintendence for the College of Fort Sf. George, as contained in the following observation* with ivhich he has favoured me. The hnoicledge which this Gentleman possesses of the various spoken dialects of the Peninsula, added to his acquirements as a Sanscrit scholar, peculiarly qualify him to pronounce a judgment on this subject. The real affiliation of the Telugu language appears not to have been kqpwn to any writer, by whom the subject has been noticed. Dr. Carey in the preface to his Sanscrit Grammar says " The Hindoostanee and the Tamil, with the languages of Gujarat and Malayala, are evidently derived from the Sanscrit, but the two former are greatly mixed with foreign words- The Bengalee, Orissa, Maratta, Kurnata, and Telinga languages are almost wholly composed of Sanscrit words" In the preface to a Grammar of the Telugu lately published by him he, also, says " The languages of India are principally derived from the San- scrit" : &c. " The structure of most of the languages in the middle and north of India, is generally the same, the chief difference in them lies in the termination of the nouns and verbs, and in those deviations from Sanscrit orthography which 2 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. custom has gradually established in the countries where they are spoken. The languages of the s'-uth of India, i. e. The Telinga, Karnatic, Tamil, Malayala, and Cingalese, while they have the same origin with those of the north, differ greatly from them in other respects : and especially in having a large proportion of words, the origin of which is unascertained." To this testimony Dr. Wilkins adds the weight of his authority, when he says in the preface to his Grammar of the Sanscrit " the Tamil, the Telugu, the Carnatic, the Malabar, together with that" (the idiom) " of the Marratta states and of Gujarat so abound with Sanscrit, that scarcely a sentence can be expressed in either of them without it's assistance" Mr. Colebrooke, also, in his dissertation on the Sanscrit and Pracrit languages in the 7th Volume of the Asiatick Researches, though he has not given so decided an opinion, yet, by including these under the general term Pracrit, appropriate only to dialects of Sanscrit derivation and construction, and by the tendency of his remarks, appears to favor the received notion of their origin ; he states indeed in express terms that the Tamil (which word he writes Tamla, deducing it from Tamraparna the Sanscrit name of the river of Tirunelveli) is written in a character which is greatly corrupted from the present Devanagari, and that both the t " Carnata" and " Telingana" characters are from the same source. In arrange- ment the two latter, which are nearly the same, certainly follow the Nagari, but in the form of the le'tters, mode of combination, and other particulars, there is no resemblance ; and the Tamil is totally different, rejecting all aspirates, and having many sounds which cannot be expressed by any alphabet in which the Sanscrit js written. It is the intent of the following observations to shew that the statements con- tained in the preceding quotations are not correct ; that neither the Tamil, the t Telugu, nor any of their cognate dialects are derivations from the Sanscrit ; that the latter, however it may contribute to their polish, is not necessary for their existence ; and that they form, a distinct family of languages, with which the Sanscrit has, in latter times especially, intermixed, but with which it has no radical connexion. NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. O The members, constituting the family of languages, which may be appropriately called the dialects of Southern India, are the high and low Tamil; the Telugu, ' ' ' grammatical, and vulgar ; Carnataca or Cannadi, ancient and modern ; Malayalma or Malayalam, which, after Paulinus a St. Bartholomaeo may be divided into Sanscrit (Grandonico-Malabarica) and common Malayalam, though the former differs from the latter only in introducing Sanscrit terms and forms in unre- strained profusion ; and the Tuluva, the native speech of that part of the country to which in our maps the name of Canara is confined. Besides these, there are a few other local dialects of the same derivation, such as the Codugu, a variation of the Tuluva spoken in the district of that name called by us Coorg; the Cingalese, Maharastra and the Oddiya, also, though not of the same stock, borrow many of their words and idioms from these tongues- A certain intercommunication of language may indeed, always be expected from neighbouring nations, however dissimilar in origin, but it is extraordinary that the uncivilized races of the north of India should in this respect bear any resemb- lance to the Hindus of the south ; it is, nevertheless, the fact, that, if not of the same radical derivation, the language of the mountaineers of Rajmahal abounds in , terms common to the Tamil and Telugu. * The Telugu, to which attention is here more specially directed, is formed from it's own roots, which, in general, have no connexion with the Sanscrit, nor with those of any other language, the cognate dialects of Southern India, the Tamil, / Cannadi &c. excepted, with which, allowing for the occasional variation of con- similar sounds, they generally agree ; the actual difference in the three dialects here mentioned is in fact to be found only in the affixes used in the formation of words from the roots ; the roots themselves are not similar merely, but the sanif*. The roots of the Telugu Language, like, those of the Sanscrit, are mostly the themes of verbs, but they may often be used in the crude form, or with a single affix, as nouns or adjectives, and many of them are used only in the latter acceptation ; thus ^2&, as a noun, signifies a blow with the fist and is the root 4 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. of the verb ^68S3s&o to strike with the fist ; thus also, $&> nadu, with the affix CO ?f ca, <3"< " Nadaca, signifies, as a noun, a sfc?/?, progress, conduct, manner, and is the root of the verb #3>'c5Soo na davadamu to walk. In this use of the roots, all the dialects differ ; the root that is used as a noun only in Tamil and Telugu may serve as the theme of a verb in Cannadi, and vice versa : thus in Tamil the term ^\s,&es>p, accarei is used as a north in such impersonals sentences as a yenac* accareiyillei, it is not a want to me I do not require it; in Cannadi accariy is the root of the verb & _ eScfcooSlb accariyudu to be desired to be endear- ed to* It frequently happens, also, that a term occurs which cannot be referred to any root of the tongue to which it belongs, though it is readily traced to a radical in one of the cognate dialects; thus in the compound 9Xs5c3*;&o agupadadamu, (which signifies in Telugu to take in the sense in which it is used in such sentences as C5a^Ts5b55co A^(0^o45XS5(Soa adi djmmamuga ndcu agapadindi, I take it to be smote- "35 T '^i^<^e-s5aD7Jr o 'Xs5c^ && ddnikin artfiamu ndc* agapada ledu, I do not take, or comprehend, the sense t>fit, but in Tamil to take in general, seize, obtain, lls ^s&eresr&ssuuiLi-^i curivt yenac' agapattadu, I have caught the bird) the first member &X aga or &&> agu has no separate meaning in Telugu, in Tamil JH*& agam signifies the interior and, in both languages, the root u(D padu to suffer. To shew that no radical connexion exists between, the Sanscrit and Telugu, ten roots in alphabetic order, under the letters A, C, P, and F, have been taken from the common d.hatu-mala or list of roots, and with them have been compared ten Telugu roots, under .the same letters taken from a Telugu d.hatu-mala compiled by Patab,hi-rama Sastri, the Head Sanscrit and Telugu Master at the College; these will be found in J,he following lists, the mere inspection of which will shew, that, among the forty Telugu roots, not one agrees with any Sanscrit root. To facilitate a comparison of the several languages treated on, each of which has a distinct alphabet, the Roman character is used throughout: NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. the orthography is generally that of Sir Win. Jones, as explained in the 1st Volume of the Asiatic Researches, but the grave accent is used instead of the acute, to mark a naturally long syllable when final or formed by Sandfii, and K, is occasionally substituted for C, before z and e in words belonging to the southern dialects only : other variations of trifling importance will be observed. ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER SANSCRIT. Ac to mark-move-move tortuously. Ag to move-move tortuously. Anca'l or > to mark. Anga) Ag.h to move - despise - begin - move quickly. Ag,ha to sin. Ach to honour - serve. Anch to move - speak unintelligibly - speak intelligibly. A. TEMJGU. / Accalu to contract the abdominal muscles. Agalu to separate - break. > Aggu to worship. Aggalu to be insuperable - b e exces- sive. Ats to give by compulsion - incur debt.- , Antu to touch or stick - adhere - anoint the head. , Adangu to be destroyed - submit - be subdued, or suppressed. Adaru to shine - shoot at. Adalu to weep bitteily. Adu to slap. Aj to throw - move - shine. X / At or At, h to move. Ad to occupy - undertake. HOOTS UNDER THE LETTER. C. Cac to hint desire - go. Caccu to vomit. Caec to laugh. Cats to play dice> chess Cac h to laugh- Crats to wrarrt. Ca'cc,h to laugh. Gag to move. /v Cattu to tie - build - become pregnant. Cadugu, to wash. 6 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. SANSCRIT. Cach to tie - shine. Caj to hiccup. j Cat to move - skreen - rain. i Cat.h to fear recollect anxiously. Cad to eat - rejoice - divide - preserve. TELUGU. Cadangu "i or , >to swell, boil. Canangu ) / Catacu ~\ or \to lick as a dog. j I Cadagu J Cadaru to call aloud - exclaim. Cadalu to move or shake. Cadi to approach - obtain. Pach to cook-explain-stretch. Pad to shine move. to break - make forked. Pangalu } Panchu to devide into shares -. send away - appoint - divide by figures. Pattu to seize - touch - begin - knead the limbs - understand - con- tain - unite intimately? as co- lour with that which is co- loured) Sfc. Padu to suffer -fall. Pandu to reprove - produce - lie down. Padayu to obtain. Pantangu to vow. Padaru to act precipitately - speak nonsense - threaten. Pannu to join steers to a plough - prepare. Panatsu to send - employ. NOTE TO TE INTRODUCTION. ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER SANSCRIT. Vak to be crooked - move> Vag to be lame. Vach to speak - order- Vaj to move - reneiv or repair- Vat to surround - share - speak, Vata to surround - share. Vanta to share- Vat,h to go alone - be able. Vad to shine - surround. TELUGU. V. " a ( to grieve - pretend grief - TT i consult- Vagu J Vagir to speak deceitfully - bark as a dog. Vangu to stoop. Vats to come. Vantsu to bind- pour water from a vessel- Vrats to divide. Vatu to become lean. Vattru to shine. i Van to sound. Vaddu to serve food. To shew that an intimate radical connection exists between the Telugu and other dialects of Southern India, fifteen roots have been taken in alphabetical order from the Dhatu-mala above mentioned, under the first vowel ancl first consonant, with which the correspondent roots of the Tamil and Cannadi are compared : the Tamil roots are from a list compiled by the Head Tami? Master at the College, compared with the Sadur Agaradi and other dictionaries and the Cannadi roots are from an old list explained in Sanscrit. * TELUGU. Accalu to contract the abdominal mus- cles. This root is never used without the formative syllable intsu in Telugu, MM in Can. which gives an active sense to primitive roots, and a causal sense to the derivative themes of verl)s. Aggalu to separate. CANNADI. Accarey to feel affection for, love. This root, in Telugu accara and in Tamil accarei, is used as i noun, only in these languages. / Accalu as in Telugu. Agalu as in Telvgu~a\$o, to become extended- to extend - lament. TAMIL. Agal as in Telugu - also, to keep at a dis- tance - pass beyond* Agavu. to calf, play. 8 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. TELUGU. Aggalu to become insuf- ferable - be excessive. Aggu to roorship. Ats to give by compul- sion-incur debt- Antu to touch - stick or adhere - anoint the head. Adkngu } to be destroy- A. ' f ed - submit - be , i subdued or Aanugu j suppressed. Adaru to shine - shoot at. In the second sense it takes the formative intsu. Ajdalu to weep bitterly. / Adu to slap. CANNADI. y Agalu to dig. Agey to be afraid - be pleased- Atchu as in The consonant in this root, which agrees with the first of the second series of consonants, iir the Sanscrit alphabet, is pronounced tsa and cha in Telugu ; cfia in Can. and ta, tha, cha, and ja in Tarn. according, as it is final or medial, single or double. Anju to be alarmed - fear - frighten. Antu to join - stick together* j Adagu to be contain' \ed- enclosed - , i subdued or dangu J suppressed - submit-recede. Adaru to ascend - climb ride. Adu to cook. , This root with a final e ode, means the same as in Telugu, and, also it to obtain-move. TAMIL. ' > Agazh as in Cannadi in which language the Tamil zh is usually converted x into / Agei to beat - cut - break in two. Ahgu to decrease. AD gar to gape. Anju as in Can. Antu to join - adjoin - approach - befit. This root, spelt with the same letters in the three dialects, is in Tamil pronounced Andu. y Adangu a* in Can. Adaru to throng - press together - be con- nected. Adu to join - be near - be connected - to kill- fight - cook. With a final ei this root means, as in Can. to obtain and, also, to tie- unite . NOTE. This root i the primitive of all those in the three languages commencing with the letters ad, in which the leading idea of nearnet -junction, variously modified, is very apparent : the several modes of forming the secon- NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. dary root by inserting a nasal before the final syllable, as in Andu, or Antu, or by adding the syllables ei or e, ar, al, gu, angu, Sic. as here exemplified, is common to them all. This formation of a number of secondary roots from a primi- tive by the adjuncts mentioned, is constantly observable uuder every letter of the alphabet : the primitive is found some, times in Tarn, sometimes in Can. and sometimes in Tel. sometimes it exists in all three, sometimes in none of them. TELUGU. / ; Adugu to ask - beg alms. / / Addagu to 'interrupt - prevent. Caccu to vomit. Cats to play dice, chess // Cattu to tie - build - be- come pregnant, said of cattle only. Cadugu to wash off, as dust from the hands wash out, as stains from a cloth. Cadangu -> or Canangu J . to swell - boil * or bubble. CANNADN / f Addagu as in Tel. Caccu as in Tel. Cangedu to become lean. Cargu to become black, by fire Sfc. Cachini to join together two things of the same kind -pair. Carchu to bite-wash rice. Cattu to tie - build. TAMIL. Caccu as in Tel. Carugu as in Can. / m Cadangu as in Tel. In both languages this verb is nri. marily used of water, and seconda. rily of the affections of the mind, in ex presions similar to the sea twells, Ms anger boil>, his vtealtk- overflow*. or Casa to be modest, diffident. C asangu to be bruised by the hand - squeezed. Casi to be moist or damp- to weep - entreat. . Cada to pass beyond. Cadavu to pay - fulfil- give attention - reflect- nail up. Cattu as in Can. This root in Tamil is pronounced i i Cazhavu ; da in Tel. an la in Can. are constantly substituted for the Tamil ZJi Lp and roots of which the final is gu in the former end in the ratter in vu ; thus the root meaning to stroke gently - caress is in Tarn. j i Tazhuvu in Tel. Tadugu &c. This root is not in Tarn, but it is evidently the same in meaning and derivation with the two following, the last of which, Cadu, is the pri- mitive of all those commencing with i Cad in the three languages. 10 :NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. TELUGU. Cadaru - to call aloud from any affection of the mind - to exclaim. Catialu ) . (to move , (shake. alu J or Cadul or Cadiy to approach - ob- tain. Cadu to draw gold or silver- Cadumu to push away. CANNADI. i Cadi to cut - bite. Cadekey to hurry - has- ten' Cade to churn. Canmalei to think - con- ceive in the mind. This is evidently a c compound of i the simple root can, but the second member, malei, has no separate meaning. Cattu to kill. t Cadadii to dissolve in liquids- Cadarti to call or weep aloud - bellow as a beast. Cadalu as in Tel. Cadi to steal- Cadrucu 1 or Cadruncu to peck as a bird. TAMIL. Cadi to cut - Bite - guard- swell or be angry. Cadu to cut - plough - snatch or seize suddenly - steal - be angry, i Cadagu as in can- Cadei to stir up with a stick fyc. - to turn by a lath- , -} Can as in Can* also to or yconsider - mark - i determine. Cani J Cattu to call aloud - roar or bellow - croak. Cadaru a* in Can. Cadalu as in Tel. Cadi to svund - make a noise - be haughty. Caduvu to be confused or perplexed, NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 11 TLUGU. Candu to fade or decay as flowers and fruit by heat- Canalu to become angry - fade. Canu to see - to bring forth a child. CANN.ADI. TAMIL. Candu as in Tel Candu as in Tel 8f Can. It has this meaning in Tam. when, the last syllable is writen ru but pronounced du when written with the game final consonant as in Tel- and Can. it signifies to be spqiled - / T -j to perish generally. Canam to become rancid- to acquire a bad taste or smell by smoke or keeping. This root is used as a noun in Te- luguin the same sense. Canalu to kindle as fire - c an al to become angry. an( j Candal 3 Used as a noun, Canal means fire. In the first sense, to tee, this root in the present and future of the Can. and Tam. is written with a long a and with the nasal of the third series of conso- nants Con and Canw; in the past it is short Canden.Candenu, as in Tel : the second sense is peculiar to the latter language ; but Candu a calf in Tamil is evidently derived: from it. This root is not used in Tam. ei. ther in it's Tel. or Can. sense, but it is evident that from it in the latter acceptation is derived the Tamil terms, Capparu a hollow bason car- lied by beggars, and Cappel a ship. v become an- Cappu to dig a pit - ex- cavate - hollow out. But though radical connection may be proved to exist between languages, their actual connection, as regards terms used for the expression of ideas, may not be intimate and it becomes necessary, therefore, to establish this point, to enter further into detail and compare the words of the three cognate dialects, as well as the roots whence they are derived. Mamidi Vencaya, the author of the > And ,hra Dipaca, an excellent Dictionary of the Telugu, .has, in the preface to tins work, introduced a concise analysis of the language, the substance of which*, as affording the means, of making this comparison, is translated in the following paragraph. "The modes of derivation in the And,hra language are four; they are i Tatsaman, Tad,bhavan, Desyam and Gramyam, 12 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. OF PURE SANSCRIT TERMS RECEIVED IN TELUGV." te Tatsamam consists of Sanscrit terms, pure as spoken in heaven, the Telugu terminations being substituted for those of the original language, of which the following are examples. SANSCRIT. TATSAMAM. SANSCRIT. TATSAMAM. llamah Vanam Ramandu Vanamu a proper name- a forest. B, hub, hrut B, hub, hruttu f Hanuma, ha- 1 a king. Ganga Ganga the river. Hanuman 7 numantudu i j } a proper Harih Hari a proper name- and j name. B, hagavati B, hagavati a goddess. ^hanumanudu J 'Srih 'Sri prosperity. f Sampadu ) Sambuh r Sambuvu or \.a proper name. Sampad Cshut and (_ Sampattu .) > wealth- ^ Sambundi ,) and >Cshuttu appetite. Vad, huh Vad,hu woman. Cshud ) Gauh Govu a cow. Apah Appu waters. Glau Glau the moon. Dyau Divamu the heavens. Vac Vaccu a word. Payah Payasu milk. Bishag Bisbacu a physician- Anadwan Anadwahamu an ox. " OF TERMS DERIVED FROM THE SANSCRIT. " Tadb,havam consists of terms formed, either from the Sanscrit direct, or through one of the six Pracrits, varied by the interposition of syllables, and by the substitution, increment, and decrement of letters, as explained in the Vai- cruta-chundrica : the several modes of derivation, here indicated, are exemplified in the following lists. " l'ADB,HAVAM TERMS DERIVED IMMEDIATELY FROM SANSCRT. SANSCRIT. TADBHAVAM. SANSCRIT. TADBHAVAM. Samudrah * Sandaramu the sea. Yatra Dzatara pilgrimage. Chandrah Tsandurundu the moon. i Aturam / Atramu hurry. Cananam Cana a forest. Pangtih Banti a line or row. / ) . Cudyam Goda a wall. C, hurali Garidi f a fencing \ school. NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 13 " TADBtfAVAM TERMS DERIVED FR*OM SANSCRIT THROUGH THE PRACRUTjM SPOKEN IN. THE COUNTRY OF MAHARASTRA. SANSCRIT. PRACRIT. , TELUGL a species of Boater fowl' a preceptor. Brahma. an island. bell metal. fame. TADB,HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH SAURASENI, THE LANGUAGE OF THE COUNTRY OF SURASENA. Chacravacah Upad.hyayah Brahma Chaccavayo Ojjhao Bamha Dzaccavu Oddza Bomma Dwipah Camsyam Divo Camso Divi Cantsu Yasah Jaso Asamu SANSCRIT. SAURASENI. TELUGU. Yejnopavitam Dzaunovidam Dzannidamu the Brahminical thread. Pratijnyatam Padinnadam Pannidamu a vow. Ilintalah Hindal'o 'Indu a date. Haritalah IThatu i j Haridalo Dad u Aridalamu Dzadu orpiment. colour. TADB t HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH THE MAGAD,H1, SFOKEN IN THE COUNTRY OF MAGAD,HA. SANSCRIT. MAGAD HI. TELUGU. Nedisht,ham 'Nedistam Nestanui friendship. Gehast,hah G chaste Gesta a householder. Cash tarn Castam Casti difficulty. Rama Lama Lema a ivoman- " TADB.HAVAM TERMS DERfVED THROUGH THE PAISACHI, SPOKEN 7.V. THE COUNTRIES OF P ANDY A AND CECAYA. SANSCRIT- PA1SACHI. TELUGU. Alactah Alatto Latuca lac-dye, prepared for painting the feet. 'Sashculi Sack, hull Tsackilamu a contorted cake. Urn a Unna Unni icool. rTelungu ^ . * Trilingah Tilingo -< Telugu V the Telugu Language. (_Tenugu ) . Swernam Sannam Sonna gold. Kisreni Nisena - Nittsena a ladder. 14 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. TADB ( HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH THE CHVLICA OR CHULICA-PA1- SACHI, SPOKEN IN THE COUNTRIES OF GANDARA, NEPALA AND CUNTALA. SANSCRIT. CHULICA. TELUGU- Briindah Puncio Pindu an assemblage. < / Bud, hah intelligent Puddo Pedda great; peddavandu a ivise man fyc. Swernam Panao Ponnu gold. Mriigah Mico Mecamu a beast. Brad.hnah Paddo Produ & Poddu sun rise. " TADB.HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH THE APAB HRAMSA SPOKEN IN THE COUNTRY OFAB,HIRA AND THE COAST OF THE WESTERN OCEAN. SANSCRIT. APABHRAMSA. TELUGU. i i Brahmanah Bamb.hadu Bapadu a Brahman. Abad,ham Abadd,hu Baddu an Untruth. Stanam Tanu Tsannu the bosom. 'Srutam heard Sudu Tsaduvu reading or learning." NOTE. Apabramsa means, literally, corrupted language; but the author says the won} is not to be taken in this sense, but as the proper name of the dialect, and to this purpose quotes a verse from Appacavi, one of the commentators on the Nannayab.hattiyam, who states the same, and adds it was the speech of the goddess Saraswati in her youth, and that it's terms, therefore, are without exception, pure. Words which have passed through this dialect to the.Telugu are, however, more frequently used by the 'Sudra tribes than by the Brahmans. The proportion of corrupt, or, more appropriately, permuted terms in Telugu of the several derivations above noticed, may be stated as follows ; Sanscrit Tadb.havam one half; Pracrit, one quarter; Sauraseni one tenth; Magad,hi one twentieth ; the Paisachi, Chulica, Apabramsa together one tenth. Mr. Colebrooke, in his dissertation on the Sanscrit and Pracrit languages, admits but af three distinctions ; these two and the Magad.hi, or Apabramsa, which he considers the same. The six Pracrits here enumerated, however, are six distinct dialects, each formed, as to terms, according to it's own rules of permutation, but all following the idiom, collocation and, with special exceptions, the general grammar of the Sanscrit : in the Shadbasha-chandrica by Lacshmid,hara, a joint grammar of the six Pracrits, after general rules applying to all, the Pracrit NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 15 mahardstr' dd^kavam) is deduced immediately from the Sanscrit, the Sauraseni from the Pracrit and Sanscrit and so on ; the Magadhi, Paisachi, Clmclica - Paisachi, and Apabramsa, each declining a degree in purity and the last varying more than any of the rest from the parent stock ; this, however, the author does not allow to be, as Mr. Colebrooke considers it, f( a jargon destitute of regular Grammar," for he snys-ApabJiramsas ta bjidshd sydd ab.hirddi girdnchayah - cavi praijog'anerhetwan n'dpasabdas sa lu cwachit, j ' Apabramsa is the language spoken in Ab,hira and other countries, and, as it is used by the poets, it is not in any respect corrupted and he proceeds, accordingly, to detail it's grammatical rules. The work here noticed is confined to these dialects, as they now exist in the Natacas, and treats, therefore, only t of Tatsamam and Tadb,havam terms of Sanscrit origin ; it is expressly stated, however, that each possessed its proper Desyam, or native, terms, and it is probable, as many of these dialects prevailed in countries far distant from each other, that each was connected with Desyam words of various derivations, in conjunction with which they produced spoken languages differing considerably from each other ; this in fact is declared to he the case with respect to Paisachi in the following passage - Pisdcha dha niyatam Paisachi dwitayam viduh - Pisdcha desdstu vruddJiair uctdh-Pdndya Cecaya Chdhlica Sahya Nepdla Cuntalah Sudjicsha B,hota Gdndhdra Haiva Canojanas tat,ha- Ete paisdcha desas syus tad desyas tad guno bjiavati. The two Paisachi dialects are said to prevail in all the countries here mentioned,* / commencing with Paudyam at the southern extremity of India, and extending to Canoj (Canojdna) in the north, and Siam (Sayha] to the east, and it is added. These are the Paisachi countries, and the Desyam terms of each have their own particular quality \ " Desyam, in other words 'And.hra, or Telugn, is of* two kinds ; the language which originated in the country of Telingana and Anya-desyam, or the language f foreign countries intermixed with it. " OF TERMS WHICH ORIGINATED Iff TRILINGAM. " Previously to shewing what part of the language originated in Trilingani, 16 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. the Following stanzas from the Ad,haravana Vyacaranam are here inserted, to describe the country to which this name applies." A quotation from the Adharavana Vyacaranam is omitted : the author explains that part which relates to tie boundaries of Trilingam as follows : " As it is here said, in the country between Srisailurn, the station of Bhimes- / wara at Dracharamam, the greater Caleiwaram and, as the fourth, the mountain of Mahendra, in these holy places were three Lingams, and the language which / originated in the country known by the name of thp Trilinga Desam, is that now under consideration ; this is the Atsu or pure Telugu, and is thus described in the Appacaviyam. VERSE. " All those words which are in use among the several races who are aborigines of the Country of A.nd.hra, which are perfectly clear and free from all obscurity, these shine forth to the world as the pufe native speech of A^nd^hra (Sudd,ha And,hra Palu Perugu ' Rolu Eoncali Ut't'i Pud ami "Padatuca > f > Pasidi-paindi gold. Bangaru gold. Coducu " OF THESE THE FOLLOWING ARE EXAMPLES. milk. curdled milk, clarified butter, a mortar, a pestle. a long net for holding pots fyC' the earth- a woman. a son. Codalu Tala a daughter in-law. the head. ' Nela the moon., a month. and sultry weather. Gudi a temple. Madi afield. Puli a tyger. Tsali cold. Madugu a natural pool or lake. U'ru a village. , j Magavandu a man. 'Andadi a woman. t Aluca vexation- displea su re. "OF TERMS INTRODUCED INTO TELUGU FROM FOREIGN COUNTRIES, " The following verse is from the Appacaviyam. " O Cesava, the natives of And\hra having resided in various coztntries, by NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 17 ; using Telugu terms conjointly with those of other countries, these have become Andjira terms of foreign origin. "The people of 'And, lira, otherwise called Trilingam, have, as Appacavi states above, frequented other countries and mixed their language with that of these several contries ; of such Anya-desyam terms the following are examples. The examples are of Anya-des yam terms in which aspirates, not belonging to the thirty letters proper to the Telugu, occur : such as, b.hala an eulogistic ex- clamation ; avadjidru an exclamation of entreaty ; tjiavu a place-station ; d.hdca a haughty, high spirited man : of those which have a final long vowel ; such as, ana the sixteenth of a Rupee ; navala an excellent woman ; codi a flag ; jira armour : and, lastly, of difficult words,, inappropriately ranked among Any-ades yam terms ; such as, calanu battle ; toyyeli a woman ; menu the body ; ullamu the mind. Of the list given by the author as examples of the several kinds of Anya-desyam terms, the whole of the words in the first are of uncertain deriva- tion : those in the second are either Hindustani or they are terms the last syllable of which has been casually lengthened ; thus codi, is the same, as codi and navala is either of Sanscrit derivation from nava new, or a native term * from the Tamil navam affection. Most of those in the last list are common to the southern dialects; thus calanu, in Tamil cal, is derived from the root cala to join, common to the three dilalects ; toyyeli, in Tamil ' taiyel, from tai to beautify, menu, in Tamil meni, from mel upward-outward, and idlumu from ul inward-mind. " OF TERMS AND FORMS OF RUSTIC OR VULGAR SPEECH. "Terms which cannot be subjected to the rules of Grammar, and ht which an irregular increment or decrement of letters occur are called Gramyam ; they are corruptions, and are described in the following verse from the Appacaviyam. . VERSE. ." Such Tenugu words as are commonly used by rustic folk are known as Gramyam terms ; these lose some of their regular letters and are not found in poetry, unless, as in abusive language, the use of them cannot be avoided, for example, 18 NOTE TOTHE INTRODUCTION. Vasldda Hari Somulu , iii > Destdda golladanti dittaca carunan Tsustdda caungili nid' Istdda tsepamannan ivi grdmyoctid." i ' J ' In this verse vastdda for vatstsunndnda', testdda for tetstsulsunndnda ; tsustdda for tsutsutsunndda ; istdd'a for itstsutsunndnda and tseppamu for tseppumu, are Grainy am terms In the preceding extracts, the anther, supported by due authority, teaches, that, rejecting direct and indirect derivatives from tbe Sanscrit, and words borrowed from foreign languages, what remains is the pure native language of the land : this constitutes the great body. oC the tongue and is capable of ex- pressing every mental and bodily operation, every possible relation and existent thing ; for, with the exception of some religious and technical terms, no word of Sanscrit derivation is necessary to the Telugu. This pure native language of the land, allowing for dialectic differences and variations of termination, is, / with the Telugu, common to the Tamil, Cannadi, and the other dialects of / southern India : this may be demonstrated by comparing the Desyam terms contained in the list taken by Vencaya from the Appacaviyam, with the terms expressive of the same ideas in Tamil and Cannad'u It has been already shewn that the radicals of these languages, mutatis mutandis, are* the same, and this comparison will shew that the native terms in general use in each, also,.correspond. It would have been easy to have selected from the three dialects a far greater number of terms, than these, exactly agreeing with each other ; but it is considered preferable to follow a work of known authority, and to which no suspicion of bias to any system can attach : the author, though a good Sanscrit scholar, was ignorant of all the dialects of southern India, his native tongue excepted. NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 19 TELEGU. Falu milk Perugn curdled milk Ney clarified butter Rolu a mortar Rdncali a pestle / / Utti a long net for holding pots or other household utensils. Pudami the earth j Padatuca a ivoman This term is probably a com- pound, but it is not easy to reduce it to its elements. Pasidi or Paindi gold CANNIDI Halu When P begins a word in Tamil or Telugu, it is in Cannadi changed to H, as Tamil Palli Tel; Palle, Can. Halli asmall -village : but in the old Can. all such words may, also, be written with a P. The Telugu term is not used by itself in Can. but is found in com- pounds as Benne, white ghee. duller. Orulu Onake This term may be used in Can. but nelu is more correct. Bangaru gold Podavi Pasaru or Hasaru with which the Telugu term is deri- vatively connected, is used in Can. in the acceptation of. green colour only. Bangaru TAMIL Pal. Perugu. Ney. Of these terms the fist and last are common to the high and low Ta- mil, the second is confined to the high dialect. Urul. High Tamil. Uroncali. H. Tarn. The Telugu terms are contractions of these : many similar instances might he adduced, thus ira night in Tamil becomes re in Telugu,' iron. du two rendu ; aven that man, ,ivea this man become vandu and vmdu. Uri In Tamil when the letter ~ ( m\ is douhled it, it is pronounced"^ and in similar Tel. terms, is written tt ( &) ) * Pudavi. II. Tarn. Pasuppu golden colour. Pasamei green colour, whence iis term is derived, means, also, beauty- purity pasnm, the adjective derived from it is frequently contracted to paint as pasumpon-paimpon pure gold and from this contraction the second ofthe Tel. terms is derived. Bangani L. Tarn- 20 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. TELUGU. ) Coducu a son "^ ^ , \ Codalu a daghter in i i law J Tala the head Nela^e moon, a month Vesavi "^ sultry weather- and V the hot sea- Vesaugi ) son a temple Madi afield Pnli a tiger Tsali 1 cold Madugu a natural pool or Iak2 U'ru a village Magavandu a man / / Vandu is here merely the personal termination equivalent to en in Ta- mil ; without this termination the word means a male of any species, i and magadu in the Mas. therefore is a husband CANNDI. Tale. Besagi As usual in Catfnadi the Telugu V is here changed to B Madi In Can. this word properly means b eds in which vegetables are sown ; the subdivision of salt pans. Hull U'ru Vlagenu This word in Can, has exclusively he second of -the Tamil meanings. TAMIL. Cuzhandi i Cuzhavi... and H. Tarn. Cozhandei L. Tarn. signify a child of either sex. These are the same as the Tel. terms the anomalous letter z'h (tg) being, as usual, changed to d and the dialectic terminations added. Talei- A short a ends all words in Tel. which in Tamil end in ei. Nilavu the moon. This compound is not used as a noun in Tamil though it may be as in epithet, as vesavi calam it is derived from Ve heat and savi light. Cudi or' Gndi- This used in Tamil signifies any habitation ; tiru- gudi, or dever- cudi is a temple ; the first member of the lattercornpound may be added or omitted in Tel. Madi This word may be used in the same sense as in Tel. but it means, derivatively a section, from the root madu to devide into sections. Pull. Mad u. U'r. Magen. This word in Tamil means, first, a man, a m ale of the human speei- es, secondly amale child, a son- NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 21 TELUGU. 'Andadi a ivoman. Aluca vexation - displea - sure. CANNADI. TAMIL. 'Adavel. The termination only differs ; the nasal in'the first syllable of the Te- lugu Word being scarcely heard in pronunciation. Alappu. The .only difference is the termi- nation. From the preceding extracts and remarks on the composition of the Telugu language, as respects terms, it results that the language may be divided into four branches, of which the following is the natural order. Des'yam or Atsu- Telugu pure native terms, constituting the basis of this language and, generally, also, of the other dialects of southern* India : Anya-des'yam terms [borrowed from otter Countries, chiefly of the same derivation as the preceding : Tatsa- mam, pure Sanscrit terms, the Telugu affixes being substituted for those of the original language: Tadb,havam, Sanscrit derivatives, received into the Telugu, direct, or through one of the six Pracrits, and in all instances more or less corrupted. The Gramyam ( literally the rustic dialect from Grdmam Sans. a village) is not a constituent portion of the language, but is formed from the Atsu-Telugu by contraction, or by some permutation of the letters not authorized by the rules of Grammar. The proportion of Atsu-Telugu terms to those derived from every other source is owe half;ot Anya-des'yam terms one tenth-, of Tatsamam terms in general use three twentieths ; and of Tadb,havam term one guarter. With little variation, the composition of the Tamil and Cannadi are the same as the Telugu and the same distinctions, consequently, are made by their / grammatical writers. Tbe Telugu and Cannadi both admit of a freer adoption of Tatsamam terms than the Tamil : in the two forjner, in fact, the discretion of the writer is the only limit of their use; in the high dialect of the latter those only can be used, which have been admitted into, the dictionaries by which the language has long been fixed, or for which classical authority can be adduced ; in the low dialect the use of them is more general by the Brahmaus they are 22 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. , i t profusely employed, more sparingly by the Sudra tribes. The Cannadi has a greater and the Tamil a less proportion of Tadb,havam terms than the other dialects ; but in the latter all Sanscrit words are liable to greater variation than is produced by the mere difference of termination, for, as the alphabet of this language rejects all aspirates, expresses the first and third consonant of each regular series by the same character, and admits of no other combination of consonants than the duplication of mutes or the junction of a nasal and a mute, it is obviously incapable of expressing correctly any but the simplest terms of the Sanscrit ; all such, however, in this tongue are accounted Tatsatnam when the alteration is regular and produced only by the deficiencies of the alphabet. But, though the derivation and general terms may be the same in cognate dialects, a difference in idiom may exist so great, that, in the acquisition of one, no assistance, in this respect, can be derived from a knowledge of the other. As regards the dialects of southern India this is by no means the case, in collocation of words, in syntaxical government, in phrase, and, indeed, in all that ?s comprehended under the term idiom, they are, not similar only but the same. To demonstrate this and to shew how far they agree with, or differ from, c the Sanscrit, the following comparative translations of examples taken from the section on syntax in Dr. Wilkins Sanscrit Grammar have been made into Tamil, Telugu, and Cannadi ; from these, also, will appear the relation these languages bear to each other in the minuter parts of speech and in casual and temporal terminations. SANSCRIT. 1 2, . ; 3 4 -56 Cumaras serate sivairam roruyante cha naracah 7 8 9 Id 11 Jegiyanti cha gitajnya memriyanti rujdjitah. TRANSLATION. 1 235' 6-644 4 The children sleep freely and the infernal beings are continually crying ; 9 77 7 - 8 II 11 11 11 10 10 The songsters are always singing, and those overcome by disease are always 10 cfymg. NOTE TOTHE INTRODUCTION. Z6 TELUGU. 1 3 2 6 6 , "> 4 Cumdrulu sicech.haga nidrintsutsunndru naracamuldn undedivarunnu mickili 4 9 7 7 , 11 11 8 arutsut&unndru gayaculu mickili pddutsunndru royamuchela, cottabaddavdrunnu 10 lo bahu tsattsntsunndru- / CANNADI. 1 :j 2 66 4 Cumdreru yad^hechch.heydyi nidrisut'tdre. naracadalli iruvarunnu herala 49 7 7 , 11 11 cuguttdre i; Cuz l hendeiyal tarn manadin paxHocu nitterei-pannuckirdrqal narayattil G 54 4, 9^ ,7 '7 idlamrydlum nilldmel cuppiduflirdrgal pdduvdr migavum pdduckirdryal 11 ii / / ,8 io_ 10 rogottinal oducca-pattaveryalum cureiydmel shdgirdryal. The construction of the Sanscrit sentence is as follows. The figures throughout refer to the collocation of the Sanscrit. . 1. A noun in the 1st case plural governing 2 a verb in the 3rd. per- plu. pres. of set e he sleeps. 3 a noun in the 2d case ncu. used adjectlvely, composed of swa own and iram motion' 4 the 3d per. plu. pres. of the reiterative form, medial voice, of rauti he roars. 5 a conjunction. 6 a derivative from naracah i by the taddMta affix an with the meaning of the 7th or locative case, being in a place- 7 the same as 4 fromgdyati to sing. 8 the same as o. a 'compound formed ofgitah a song and gnyah part, past act. ( caprateya } from jdndti to know. 10 the same as 4 from mrityati to die. 11 a compound from n//6 disease fern, andj^a/t past part, pas- (ctaprateya) fromjayattfo conquer. The construction of the Telugu sentence is j 1. Sans, a noun in the first case plural- 3 an adverbial phrase, formed from sicechchjta, of Sanscrit derivation, being from swa own and ichchMa desire, and . j yd,, changed from cd by sandhi, the inseparable part, from cdvudamu to bc- become. 2 the 3rd pers. plu. of the compound pVesent, formed by nidrintsutsu, the gerund of the present tense, derived from nidra Sans, sleep, and unndru, > > e third per. plu- pres. of andadarim to l>c-cxi.st. G Sans, a noun in the seventh 24 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. i or locative case. 6- a compound formed by the aorist part, of undadamu and the plu. pro. vadu he- that man. 5 a conjunction ; it is inseparably attached to the word it conjoins. 4 an adverb qualifying the following verb. 4 the same as 2 from the Telugu verb aravadamu to roar. 9 the same as 1. 7 an adverb. 7 the same / as 2 from the Telugu verb padadamu losing. 11 Sans, a noun in the 3d, or / > ' instrumentive case. 11 a Telugu compound from cotta the inf. of cottadamu it it it to beat, badda,by sand^hi for padda, the past part, of padadamu to suffer, used / to form the passive voice, and the plu. otvddu* 8 the same as 5. 10 Sans, an i adverb. 10 the same as 2 from the Tel. verb tsavadamu to die. The construction of the Cannadi is exactly the same as the Telugu, one or two of the compounds only differing. t , 3 is composed of Sans, adverb yathd as and ichfra. The verbs marked 2,4,7 and 10 are not compounds. 6 the 7th case is formed by the adjunct alii j place, united to naracada the genitive form of naracam. 7 is a compound used adverbially from adjiica excessive, a Sans, crude noun, and dgi the gerund of the past tense agavadu to become. The compound marked 11 is from the verbal noun hodeyel the beating, instead of the inf. as in Tel. The construction of the Tamil is ; 1 as in Tel. 3. the gen. plu. of the pronoun tan himself. 3 the gen. ofmanadu, from the Sans, mannas mind, will. 3. the dat. ofpadi a measure, used as b a preposition and signifying according to. 2 a hybrid compound formed from t nitterei, the same as nidra Sans, and pannudeltodo-make, the Tamil seldom allowing a simple verb to be formed from a Sanscrit word with a long final vowel. 6 as in Tel. 6 a compound formed by ulla, indefinite part, of the defective verb ul to be- have, and avergal the plu. of the pro. aven he- that man. 5 as in Tel. 4 the nog. part, of nilludel to stand-stay. 4 this with 7 and 10 are simple > verbs, as in Cannadi, not compounds, as in Tel. 9 an attributive noun from pddudel to sing. 7 the inf, of migudel to increase, with the conjunction um used adverbially. 7 as in Cannadi. 11 as in Telugu. 11 a compound from oducca the NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 25 inf. of oduccudel to oppress and pat ta the same as in Tel. and Can. 8 as in Tel. 10 the neg. part, of cureidel to lessen. 10 as in Can. In the preceding sentence the Sanscrit differs in ever}' point from the southern dialects; in the following, the variation, except in the formation of cases, is not so great. SANSCRIT. 1 2345 6 Samyamdya srutam djiatte nard dhermdya samyamam, 7 8 9 10 11 12 DJiermam mocshdya medjtdvi d,hanam ddndya bjiuctaye. TRANSLATION. 943 221 6 '5 A wise man keepeth the divine law for constraint, constraint for religion (and) 7 8 10 11 12 religion for salvation ; wealth for donation (and) for enjoyment. TELUGU. 9 4 , ,1 ,2 5 6 Med ( haviyaina narudu samyamamucoracu srutamunu dhermambucoracu samyama- 8 7 II 12 10 munu mocshambucoracu d.herrmamunu ddnamucoracunu bhucticoracunu dhana- 8 / munun dharintsutstunnddu. , CANNADI. 9 4 ,1 ,25 6 Medjidviydda manushyenu samy amaccoscara srutavannu d.hermaccoscara samya- * 8 7 11 12 mavannu mocshaccoscara d.hermavanna ddnaccoscaravdgiyu bjmciigoscaravdgiyu 10 3 d.hanavannu djiarisuttdne. TAMIL. , 9 _. 4 1 , 2 5 , 8 Arivalla manaden adaccattaccdga vedatteiyun deramattuccdgu, adacatteiyvjn wattle- 7 11 12 10 3 cdga, derumatteiyum ddnattuccdgavum bogattaccdgavum danatteiyung cdckirdn. CONSTRUCTION OF THE SANSCRIT. 1 a noun sub. neu. in the 4th or dative case. 2 the same in the 2d, or ac. governed by the following verb. 3 the third person sing. pres. medial voice, governing the several accusatives in the sentence. 4 noun sub. masc. in the 1st or nom. 5, 6, 7 and 8 the same as 1 and 2 respectively- 9 a noun of quality agreeing with narah . ; this word medjidvi, has the force of an adjective, though it is actually, a substantive. 10 the same as 2. 11 and 12 the same as 1 &c. 26 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. CONSTRUCTION OF THE TELUGU. 9 a compound having the force of an adjective, formed by affixing, to the > Sanscrit word, aina the past part, of cdvadamu to become. 4 as in the Sans. j formed by affixing the Tel. termination udu. 1 as in Sans- except that, in place of being declined, the case is formed from the sixth in CM by the adjunct orucu for the sake of; when orucu or osaram, which has the same meaning, are added to this case the druttam or nunnation, if interposed between the theme and affix is dropped; thus these compounds, though derived from danamunucu, become danamuc' orucu and ddnamuc osaram. 2 as in the Sans. 5,6,8,7,11 and 12, as in the Sanscrit, with the Tel. terminations and affixes ; the two last are connected by the conjunction nu and, repeated after each. 10 as in the Sans, it takes the druttam before the following d,ha. 3 the third person sing. pres. (f d ,harintsadamu to dress - assume, from the Sanscrit. NOTE. The compound dative, answering to the Tadarthya chaturt, hi of the Sanscrit and to the noun governed by the proposition for in English, is formed in the three dialects from the fourth case in cu by the addition of the same or similar adjuncts ; in Tel. by ai, orucu and osaram; in Can. by dgi and oscaram, and in Tamil by aga and osaram : ai and dgi, are the gerunds and dga is the inf. derived from the root d be - become ; osaram in Tel. signifies a side, inclination, bias, but this and orucu, from oray to join - obtain, intimately correspond with the English term sake, as, like the latter, they are used only in the formation of this dative, the meanin^ of which may always be appropriately expressed by the phrase for the sake of. The Canadi construction is exactly the same as the Tel. the datives are formed by adding oscaraforthe sake of to the fourth case in cu. 11 and 12 agi, the gerund of the past tense of dgavadu to become,is added to these datives, and the conjunction copulative nu is changed to yu, to mark their special connection with the following word. CONSTRUCTION OF THE TAMIL. 9 a compound having the form of an adjective from arivu knowledge and ullu the part of the defective uV toJtave. 4 as in Sans. 1 the dative case formed by adding aga, the inf. of ddel to become, to the dative of declension in cu. The sentence docs not differ, otherwise than as here noticed, from the Telugu. NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 27 In the following short sentence and all similar constructions the Sanscrit agrees exactly with the southern dialects. SANSCRIT. 123 4 Tasya bahu djianam esti. TRANSLATION. 1234 " He possesses, or hath much wealth, : " or, nearer in Latin, llli multa res est. TELUGU. r , > 2 3 4 Vaniki bahu djianam unnctdi- CANNADI. 1 23 4 Avenge heral a d t hana vide. TAMIL. 1 2 3 4 , Avenuccu micca porul undu. Again, in constructions like the following, when the sati saptami, or ablative case absolute, is used, as in Latin, or when the relative pronoun occurs, the Sanscrit idiom is totally different from that of the southern dialects ; in these there is no relative pronoun, but the interrogative may, as these examples will shew, be used for it. SANSCRIT. 1 3 4 5 , 67 Yas sa, servesku bjtuteshu nasyetsu, no. vindsyeti. TRANSLATION. 1 35767 22 *' He who upon all things perishing does not perish : " or in Latin Hie qui } 3 3 7 omnibus entibus periuntibus, non perit. ' TELUGU. 1 4 5 1 67 2 , Samastamaina b.hutamulu nasintsutsnudaga yevada nas'intsado ? vdndu. CANNADI. 1451,2 Samasta b,hutangal l unasisuttirel dgi ydvenu nasiseno ? avenu. TAMIL. 1 35557 12 Butangal elldmum ndsam adeiyum pozhudil ndsamadeiydn eveno ? avene. In the Sanscrit sentence 3-4 and 5 have the form of the 7th or locative case and are in the grammatical connection denominated the ablative case absolute ; 28 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. iu Tel. this meaning is expressed by the gerund of the present tense of the verb nasintsadamu, united with the inf. of undadamu to be, and followed by the inseparable gerund of Cdvadamu to become. ; literally the destroying becoming to be. The Can. is the same execpt that instead of the inf. the verbal noun the being, is used. The Tamil differs ; in this the future part, of the verb compounded of ndsam Sans, destruction and adeidel to obtain- arrive is followed by the 7th caseoipoz,hadu time, and the literal meaning, therefore, is in the time in which ( when ) destruction shall have reached. Again 1 and 2, the relative and it's antecedent, is in each of the southern dialects expressed by the interrogative pronoun yevadu with 6, the sign . of dubitative interrogation, added, either to it, or to the verb it governs, followed by the words respecting which the doubt is expressed, or the question asked, so that' the sense is who may it be that is not destroyed 1 ? he. The relative, however, maybe as well, if not better, expressed, by any of the participles followed by the word which in the Sanscrit connection, would be the antecedent ; thus this example is properly in Telugu translated by 345 1.2-6 , 7 samastamaina bh^tamaulu nasintsutsundagd nasintsanivdndu the last term being composed of nasintsani the negative of, nasintsadamu united with the > indicative pronoun vdndu- The preceding translations have been made into what may, not inappro- priately, be called the Sanscrit dialect of the southern tongues; the terms employed being chiefly from that language, and, when they could be used without affectation, the same as in the original passages : in the translations of 'the following sentence, the pure native terms of the three dialects only are used- SANSCRIT. 1 2 34 56 Daddlu sadbhyah sa sue. ham Haris smardt 7 8 9 10 11 Gopi gano suyati cupyati irshati, 12 13 14 15 Sma-rochcte druhyati tisht \hate hnute 16 17 18 19 20 'Slaghista yasmai spriihayaty as 1 apta cha. TRANSLATION. 1514 222 11 7 7 " Let Hari yrant happiness to the just, for whom the females of the cowherds . NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 29 6699 10 10 12 11 17 from desire, were calumnious, shewed anger, were pleasant, shewed malice, 15 13 16 18 20 19 waited, were sly and insidious, flattered, hoped fy cursed." NOTE. It will be observed that the English translation does not exactly express the meaning of the original, and, as this is carefully preserved in the other versions, it of course, disagrees with them. TELUGU. 17 17 76 8 6 69 Yeveni gurinchi golla-ddavari gumpu tamacamu vella leni-tappul-encheno- 10 11 12 13 , 14:" , 15 16 alegend ortsaccapoyenb impayenb chedocoreno cdtsiyundenb bonkeno pogadeno 13 19 3 5 2 12 corenb tit tend a Hari ped'dalacu hayrfitsugdca. CANNADi. 17 17 7 8 * *6 , 9 10 Ydvanan curittu gollatica gumpu soccuninda al cdjum-pattido muniyto 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 3 sanasitb baito keda-goritlo cddaconditto bonkitb hogalito gorittb bar/to, anta 56 1 1 Hari vall'evange sompannu codali. TAMIL. 17 786 9 10 Evenuccdga videiydl cut'tam naseiyendl az'haccdru-pattdidb munindadb 11 12 13 14 15 pordd'irundado vinb'anadb kedaccorinado cattucond'irundado poccan-chon- 16 18 19 3 _5 2 nadopugez hndadb cor ado tuvinadb averri nellavugal uccuchelvam coduccavum The observations made on the preceding example, respecting the construction of the relative and antecedent in Sanscrit, and the modes of supplying it in the southern dialects, may be made on this, The original, in the work whence it is taken, exemplifies the government of the fourth or dative case by the several verbs which therein occur ; in Telugu and Cannadi these verbs do not* govern this case, but theupapada dwitiya of the Sanscrit with the upaserga prati ; this, in these languages, is expressed by the accusative governed by gurinchi or curitu-mark, determine, used as a preposition : in Tamil these verbs may have the same government, or as in the translation intft this language, they may govern the dative, as in the Sanscrit, with the preposition for as explained in the note on the foregoing example. In translating this last sentence into the southern dialects, the difficulty has rather been in the selection of appropriate terms whereby to express the shades of meaning which the verbs, in tho original, convey , in general, however, it 30 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION, will be found difficult to express any sentiment clearly and precisely in Telugu or Cannadi, without using Sanscrit words in a greater or less proportion, while in Tamil, in the higher dialect ( Shen Tamiz'h ) especially, this may always be done with facility. Thus in the present examples, smarQ.li, a name of the Indian Cupid, "but signifying, the cause being put for the effect, love', is appropriately translated in Tamil nnsel sexual love : in the other two dialects, however, there is no such native word, the Sanscrit cdmam being used for it ; tamacamu, the word substituted in Telugu, means lust merely, and soccu in Cannadi desire in general. Again, asapta the third person of the past tense lang of sapali he curses, cannot be rendered strictly into any of the three dialects, except by / / / a term from the same root ; tittddamu in Telugu, and bayvadu in Cannadi, mean to vilify-abuse, either of these, $ being substituted for the b of the last, may be used in Tamil, but turidel is preferred, as it is more frequently applied when abuse by women is meant. Again linuti in Sanscrit means to dissemble this is exactly rendered by bonkadamu in Tel. and Can. but poccam in Tarn. though derived from the same root, scarcely extends to this meaning, nor is it in common use. To enable a comparison to be made of the superior dialects of the southern languages with each other, and with the Sanscrit, the following versions of an English sentence have been made ; they are necessarily in verse as this is the'appropriate style of the three dialects and, and with the preceding observations, will sffiuciently establish the positions maintained at the commencement of this t notej relative to the affiliation of the Telugu. 12 3456 When thou art an anvil, endure like an anvil ; 7 8 ibhen a hammer, strike like a hammer. i TAMIL. c CURAL-VENBA, 6 , - r > 4- 41 2 3 AdeiyeVdVt attel ddnyi ad^eiyelau i? 11 10 10 Snltiyel att attt'l ad i. NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 31 TELUGU. DW1PADA. 65 4 1 2-3 10 Day velan ariigi diyyai venca 12 H Tiyaca suttiya tiruna cot tu. / CANNADT. DWIPADA. i Adigallu sari baggi ydgi yu gallu. Maridi tirasada chamalige saribadi, SANSCRIT. ANUSH'TUPr VRUTTAM. Cutb b,hutwa cuta iva vinamya twam ayogjianah Bihutwa'yogfianavad gadjiam d.hairyavan prahara dwishah. TELOOGOO ALPHABET. ^~f^HE letters in the Teloogoo, as in most other Indian alphabets, are apt, "1 -- on a first view, to appear unnecessarily numerous. Some syllables even seem admitted into the alphabet, as simple characters. The dipthongs are represented by separate signs, not, as in English, by the coalition of two vowels. There is one set of symbols for initial unconnected vowels ; another for the same vovrela when joined with consonants to form syllables ; and in both of* these, the long vowels are distinguished from the short. Among the consonants also, the aspirated letters are represented by distinct symbols, not by a combination, as in our own language ; and the harsh are distinguished from, the soft letters. But those who may at first question the utility of so many letters in the Teloogoo, will perhaps relinquish most of their objections, when they find that the variety of sound in this language* is greater, and better represented, than * in English. On the length of a vowel, on the harsh or'soft pronunciation of a consonant, depends, in a thousand instances, the meaning of a wDrd ; and, conse- quently, it is of greater importance, in Teloogoo, that each different shade of sound should be accurately marked ; than in our own language, in which, comparatively, few words materially resemble each other, 2 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 2 Notwithstanding the Teloogoo alphabet may be thought to contain some superfluous characters, it will readily be admitted tnat, in consistency, it is su- perior to our own. The sound attached to each letter remains constantly inherent in it: the coalition of words may cause one character to be changed for another, or may require the elision or the insertion of letters ; but no association whatever can render any letter mute, nor can any change, or combination, give to one or more characters the sound belonging to another. The student, therefore, after once acquiring the correct sound of the Teloogoo letters, immediately pronounces every word with accuracy, and very little prac- tice enables him to read with fluency and precision : while a foreigner, who attempts to acquire a correct English pronunciation, scarcely ever arrives at the full attainment of his object. The proper pronunciation of our words, indeed, depends more upon the combination of our letters, than upon any fixed sound inherent in each separate character: and, in this respect, a person commencing the study 4 of our language, for a long time, labors under the difficulties experienced by those, who are left to discover the meaning of the principal words in a sentence, without any other aid than what the context affords. 3 All Native Grammarians concur in reducing the number of letters in the Teloogoo alphabet to thirty seven ; by excluding from it forty four characters which they acknowledge to belong to the language, but will not admit info the alphabet. They reject nineteen letters as peculiar to words of Sanscrit origin ; fifteen small connected vowels, as only abbreviated forms of the large initial unconnected vowels ; eight characters, as merely marks for certain consonants when doubled ; and two, as contracted signs for certain letters which they have retained. But, in giving a general view of the Teloogoo alphabet, I shall insert all the letters which tney have rejected ; for they belong to the language, as much as those which they, have admitted ; and the whole are equally unknown to an English reader. Inclusive of these, the Teloogoo alphabet will be found to consist of no less than eighty one different symbols- , OP THE LETTERS. TELOOGOO ALPHABET. VOWELS. Initial unconnected Connected vowels. vowels. Powers. a. . . 9 i , . ee * 00 * - oo . roo W. 5- ; roo ** ? ' loo & . . . ;,s , e S3 _^ . ue r- rsro . uo 15 IS 4 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. CONSONANTS. 21 sonants. Double forms of Powers, some consonants. S . , .? ....... .k Consonants. Double forms of Power some consonants. 21 2 ' IT" A n> *? g epO. ... cr H ^

* p $ sh } ^' sh . t h r- H oCT* h ' ! 1 0} i < <. ^9. . . , rru o n or m ^ *' i /^ H h ' 20 o 6 h 4 1 2 41 8 OF THE LETTERS. 8I&N& - . T 15 Initial unconnected vowels. 15 Connected vowels. 41 Consonants. 8 Double forms of some consonants. 2 Signs. 81 Letters. Of these eighty one letters, the initial vbwels ^^ roo, < ? ^ ch,h } j,h, t,h, d,h, 9 t y h, a? p,h, and 9 b,h, the nasals gnu ^ nyu, and the consonants 3 s/j, ^ 5^, vx ^5^, and g A, are the nineteen characters stated by Teloogoo Grammarians to be peculiar to words of Sanscrit origin. To these, the connected vowejs ^ rco, and ^roo, should also be added. For, had not all the connected vowels been rejected from the alphabet, as marks instead of letters, a place would have been originally assigned to these two characters, in the list of symbols peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives. Although the letter 3 sh, is, as above stated, peculiar to Sanscrit, modern authors admit, that, Sanscrit derivatives excepted, all Teloogoo vrords whic.li have the letter < s, followed by the connected vowels 9 i, ^ ee, ~=> e, or - e, may change the chesenco, or "^^r5o cheshenoo, he, she or it, did. c^/fo siggoo, or % &> shiggco, shame- The short initial vowels ^ e, 1 ^ 'a, and their corresponding connected vowels "^e^o, (exccluded by Grammarians as being merely marks) together with the consonants ^> ts, 25 dzu, ^ lu, &>rru, and C , are to be found in words of the pure Teloogoo only. The other letters of the alphabet are common to all Teloogoo words, whether derived from the Sanscrit, or otherwise. 6 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 8 The letter <$x ksh has been included in the Alphabet ; but, as it is a com pound of s k and & s h, it is rejected by some authors. VOWELS. INITIAL UNCONNECTED VOWELS. 9 The fifteen initial vowels, & u, & a, ^ i, * ee, &s m, & oo, < W^> roo, WOJ^ 3 roo, "2 loo, oJ e, ^ e, ue, 2o o, & o, and * uo, are emphatically termed by Teloogoo Grammarians \^~^/?a35coix> lives, or living letters ; because they are supposed to possess, within themselves, a perfect and independent existence or sound. They are purely initial, and are always written separately, unconnected with consonants or other characters. Like our capital letters, the initial vowels are to be found at the commencement* or a phrase or sentence only, and neve.r, in grammatical compositions at least, at the beginning of each word ; except when words are written by themselves, as in a dictionary or vocabulary ; for in a correct Teloogoo sentence, each word coalesces with the following one ; the who,le becomes a chain of continued links ; and there is no beginning, or place for an initial vowel, except at the commencement of the sentence itself. 10 In naming these characters, the Sanscrit word ~3~5s$oo karumoo is affixed to each ; thus, 9~5~tfsSco ukarumoo u, ^""S^tfsSx) ikarumoo i, and so on. 11 The initial vowels are written on a line with the consonants, never either be- t low, or above them. CONNECTED VOWELS. * 12 When combined with consonants to form syllables, the abovementioned vowels take quite a different -shape. In this new form they are inseparable from consonants ; and, from their constantly preserving a servile connection with some of these characters, Xeloogoo writers have been induced to view them, in this shape, rather as abbreviated forms of the initial vowels abovementioned, than as independent letters. "They are here again exhibited, opposite the initial vowels which they respectively represent ; and the particular appellation given to each is attached to it. ra OF THE LETTERS. t9 11 in it' connected form becomes, v u which in Teloogoo is named. f (D &OJ a ... do. . . . .o a .... . do Qq5bs~ ; . . . do. . ... a i . . . . do Ao<5 or * ee . . . . . do. . . . . 5 ee . . . . do &&$ 55 oo .... . . . do. . ... ^ oo ... . do r^s5oo -r5 ^00 . . . . . do. . . . '(j-o 00 . . . do- ..... . ~^ *20^X> roo . . . ... do. . . . ^ roo . . . . do . S^^j ICXXT 3 roo . . ... do. . . . ^~ roo . . do ....... sr^; 3 Ico . . . . . . . do. . nrt . . . . o loo . . . do 3^3$ ^ e . . . do. . . . . ""= e . . . . do o^^e* oJ f . . . do. . . . "^ e . . . . do. ...... <>5 2o 5 ..... . . do. . .do. .-."... 2o^ o - .... . . . do. . c . . . v$> 5 or J*.do ^ ue . . do. . . . . ^ ue . . do. ...... w\ vT"^* *< * uo . . . . . . do- . . . ^ uo . . . do. .. The connected vowels ^ u, D a, i, ^ ee, ~ r=> e t ~^ e, 5, and r3 ^> 13 uo, are written above the consonants to which they are attached ; ^ > ^ oo are written to the right of them ; roo, and ^p roo, are placed partly to the right side of consonants, partly below them ; and of ^_ ue, the upper part fe written above, the lower part below the consonants. When the initial vowels 2o o, &> o, are represented in their connected forms, ?4 by a compound of the letters e, and ^o oo, O" oo ; thus, ~* o d?,"" > ro 5, the -* e is written above, and the >3 ot, ^^ oo, to the right side of the consonants. The connected vowel 2 loo, is always written below the consonant to which 15 it is attached. CONSONANTS. * ' With the view to facilitate the acquirement of .the Teloogoo alphabet, the 16 connected vowels have been separated from the consonants, to some of which they must invariably be joined. For the same reason, in arranging the conso- 8 TKIOO<4OO til? A MM A R. nants, in the order in which thpy are usually placed by Grammarians, they arc exhibited distinct from the connected vowels. Hard. k kfhu . . ____ 1st. Vurga S V * - is ch ch,h dzujuj,h Palatal or "^>;53&>. ... 2d. do. ^ * $ es oop Cerebral or sScxr^s-f^C^X)3d. do. ^ ^Q^>. .... 5th. do. a) ^ OD y r lu v sh sh s h I ksh rru OX>0 O 53 " duharumoo dee, &c. To distinguish the letter o r from >.//&, the term ef> "S^^55c rrnkarumoo is applied to the latter only; the o r retains its original Sanscrit name, o^ repjiu. 18 Theten consonants kjtu, & gnu, & dzu, & ju, ^ nyu, & tu t ^ nu, "& bu, e> lu, and es rm, have the sound of the first vowel "' u, inherent; and are therefore represented in English characters by syllables ; thus k,hu ju &c. but all the other consonants specified above, in order to obtain utterance, must be joined to some of the connected vowels. It is of much importance to the reader clearly to understand, that neither the consonants, nor the connected vowels, exactly correspond with what European authors call a letter. They have been separated from each other, merely with the view to facilitate the progress of the OF THE LETTERS. 9 early student : but this separation of them will lead to false ideas, unless it be at the same time borne in mind that, in Teloogoo, they are never so separated, and are not significant symbols except when compounded with each other. Indeed the consonants and connected vowels form together a set of inseparable syllabic characters, generally compared by Teloogoo writers to animated bodies ; the life, or vowel, giving existence or articulation to the consonant, which, on separation from it, becomes a mere dead symbol, void of every sound. As Teloogoo words are composed chiefly of these syllabic characters, terminating with a vowel, a final consonant is seldom found in the language. When it does occur, the consonant cannot, as in English, stand alone. Without any sign, the ten letters before mentioned represent syllables ending in the vowel M, and the other consonants represent ao .articulation whatever. In the case of a final consonant, therefore, it is necessary to affix to it the sign F~, to denote that the sound is retained, but obstructed. Thus, final k, k,h, or g, must be written %~ 4> ^~ never s ^ A without any sign, as before exhibited. To form syllables, the connected vowels are added to the consonants, in the 19 following manner. ku ka ki kee kco koo kroo kroo klm ke ke ko ko kue kuo k,hu k t ha kM k t hee kjioo k.hoo kjirao k,kroo fyc. fyc* ^c. * gu ga gi gee goo goo groo groo glm ge ge go go gue guo It is not requisite to add the *' u, to the ten letters mentioned in No. 16; 20 because the sound represented by that letter is already inherent in them. . In adding to the consonants the connected vowels ^ CD, ^ 00, ^ TOO, and 21 ^~ roo, which are placed to the right of these letters, it is necessary previ- ously to write the connected vowel ^ u, above the consonants; except above those in which the sound of that character is inherent : because this sign, 10 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. which is termed &&$ ^ bound to the head, invariably retains it's place at the top of the consonants to which it can be attached, unless it's situation is occupied by another symbol. 22 For the same reason also, in adding to the consonants ^ gji, cP./,ft, x> m, 0X1 y, and *r h, the long vowel ~~* a, which is affixed to the latter part of these letters, the ^ affixed to the former part, is not removed; thus, ;&t> ma, cScro y a> & c : but as the consonant oJ^ h already terminates with a symbol resembling o a, when that vowel is added to this letter, it is written thus, "^ the mark c> being substituted for a. 23 Instead of adding the long vowel & ee, to the consonants,

an( i 5~ roo > fr om <^ ro . 24 In adding the long vowel ee, to the letter o m, it must always be written in the manner above mentioned ; thus, Xr me e, never & : in adding it to the consonant s^ h, it is written thus s~ hee, or jr. The vowel 9 i t O r ee, can never be added to the consonant cx*> y : to express, in Teloogoo letters, the sounds yi, or yee, we write the consonant ooo y ; in the former case, without the ^ u, *$v*^??, and in the latter, with the "* a^e-S&D, and under it we place it's double formg y, thus ^ox$ntyi,ghee, ^^^^^^ ) , lyeeta 9 chettoo, this date tree. 25 In adding the short vowel Ctro o or "^ "o d, to the consonants

m, and ooo y, it is invariably written in the latter form, never in the former shape ; thus, ;~S>w mo, to the consonant, the ^>or OF THE LETTERS. 11 S&> only is added ; thus, "^r mo <^n> yd Sec. This latter rule is occasionally applicable to the consonants a part of the verb &&> unco, to say. ^Sopapum, sin. Sec- while the former is always . found with some of them united to it, in the following manner ; & ru, ~&* ra, &* ro, &c. The student, therefore, can have little difficulty in distinguishiug the one from the other. Though native Grammarians, in enumerating the letters of the alphabet, 28 * consider > ts to be different from & ch, and %> dzu to be distinct from &ju t they are respectively represented by the same characters ; and, in fact, they are only two letters, each possessing two distinct sounds, which has induced Grammarians to consider them as four separate characters. Following the arrangement of the Sanscrit, the twenty-five first Teloogoo 29 consonants have been classed by native writers in five Vurgus or classes, each containing five letters, as arranged above in horizontal lines, (see No- 16.) The fifth consonant of each Vurgu or Class is a nasal ; and, in Sanscrit deri- 30 vatives, if a nasal immediately precede another consonant, without the inter- vention of a vowel, it must be that particular nasal only which belongs to the same Vurgu as the consonant itself; for instance, in such words, if a nasal im- 12 TELOOGOO GRAMMAK. mediately precede any of the 4 first letters in the 3d VurguM must be ra nu only, if it precede any of the 4 first letters in the 4th Vurgu, it must be w, and, if it precede any of the 4 first letters in the 5th Vurgu, it must be <&*> m, and not any other nasal. But this rule does not apply to corruptions from the Sanscrit, or to words of the pure Teloogoo, or of the common dialect. The nasal before a consonant, without an intervening vowel, is, in such words, re- presented either by the sign of the letter (0 n, viz. g- n, or by the character o n or m, or c w , hereafter mentioned. 31 Besides this division of the first 25 consonants into Vurgus or Classes, ac- cording to the principles of Sanscrit Grammar, there is a classification of the consonants which is peculiar to the Teloogoo itself, and an intimate acquaint- ance with this arrangement of the alphabet, which pervades every part of the language, is of the highest importance to a correct grammatical knowledge of the Teloogoo. The chapter which follows, on the changes of the letters, (perhaps the most difficult and intricate part of the Grammar,) will be abso- lutely unintelligible, unless due attention be paid to this classification. It is as follows. 32 The first perpendicular line in the forgoing arrangement of the consonants (No. 16,) containing the first letter in each of the five Vurgus, Viz. s k, ^> ts or ck, & U t, and ^ p, forms the first class ; aud these letters are denomi- nated 5b&ew or hard letters. 33 . The third perpendicular line in the above arrangement of the consonants (No. 16,) consisting of the third letter in each Vurgu, viz. A g, dzu or ju, d, <3 d, and > b, which are termed ^Stfsf wo O r soft letters, constitutes the second class. 34 The third class includes all the remaining consonants in the foregoing clas- sification (No. 16.) The consonants in this class are termed |^ew, or fixed letters', from their not bsing liable to those changes, to which, as hereafter ex- plained, the letter^ of the other two classes are subject. 35 The letters o n or m, c n , and S A, which conclude the list of consonants in the view of .the whole alphabet given in page 4, are omitted from the foregoing OF THE LETTERS. 13 arrangement of the "consonants in page 8; because the remarks which follow that arrangement do not apply to them. In contradistinction to all the other consonants, these three letters are never joined either to the connected vowels, or to any other characters whatever. DOUBLE FORMS OP SOME CONSONANTS. When a consonant is doubled, the one character is placed under the other, and 36 the lower of the two is written without any of the connected vowels, the sub- sequent vowel being attached to the upper one only ; thus, ~* peddu, great. This rule however does not apply to the following consonants, of which each -has its respective double form. viz. s k in it's double form is written ... .6- o5 do. ... *V> m , . do coo y--- do.... s o do , o i... do. . . ffifc ' * * * m oi v ... . .do. . These eight consonants, when doubled, are written first in their original 37 shape, and their second form is then written below them ; thus, $3& ukku, an elder sister, % kutti, a knife. &&\ unnu, an elder brother. ^9S5b ummu. c -^" 7$ r ^ a mother, a respectful female appellation. ^c*^ uyyu, sir, a respectful male appellation. ^ &/ kurru, a staff, ^ew Hfoo, a house. ^^ uvvu, a grand mother. If one consonant follow another without the intervention of a vowel, the 3g last is written below the first ; and if the last be one of those abovementioned * which has a double form, it is written in it'.s second may be attached either to the con- 14 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. sonant, or to the ; thus "^g nya, or $~ nya, <& nyco, or wyofl, or r^ 19 wyoo. The same rule applies if the subsequent vowel be long <^* or -* \n> o; but, when this vowel is joined to the C y, the latter form only is used, and the ^o of ^ being omitted, the &9&>~sfo> alone is affixed to theQ, the preceding " ^ ^^o being written above the consonant; thus, ~%T* n y<> or "^"^ n y> or ^ ^ n y- I n & U other cases where C or other double forms are used, the subsequent vowel is attached to the consonant only, never to the double form ; thus, #, ryee &e. SIGNS. The consonants have two auxiliary signs, viz. s~ r and r~ n : the former is used to represent the letter o /, and the latter the letter ,0 n, when these letters precede another consonant without the intervention of a vowel ; but, though pronounced before the consonant, ^ r, is written after it ; thus, 9&E-C TOO, ^ e, and 2o o, have each three measures of sound ; namely, the short, the long, and the continuous ; the vowel 2> loo has no intermediate sound, but the extreme short and continuous sounds only ; and the vowels & ue, and cL uo, are both long, and continuous, but not short. The short and long vowels are consider- ed so different as to be represented by distinct letters, but it has not been thought necessary to distiuguish the continuous measure of sound by separate characters. The initial &, and its connected form ^, have the sound ofu, as in tun, sun, 42 or of the o in come, done. This sound must not be confounded with the other sound given to u in English, as in cure, sure, &c. The initial t3 ? and its connected form o have the sound of a, as in all, call, tall, . .do. short i, as in^, kill> i do. long ee, as infect, keel. .do. short co, as in wool. , .do. long oo, as in moon, boon. .do* short roo, as in rook. .do. long roo, as in room. do. short loo, as in look. do. short c, as in they, or as ay in may say c. . do. long c, as in the same words lengthened. do .^ do 9 d do ... 3*. . . .do 5 d( do .6 do > ^ d< do..... .cs* do ' ^. . . .d do- . . . . /W. .. .do 1 d do.. .'cOOO . . Hn .^~ ~ . d do no: j rv . do ..... ( * U *..... d do d do..... .<*> do ( do O 1 CVH .w do ^ 8 or- ^< do. . . . . f) C*" 3>. . . . ..do. . . . - *orT v do.. *> do.. . , . r vjdo. short o, as^innote. do. long o, as in no, lo. do ue, as the word or o, . ..".. the uy'm [buy.] do "=" do, uo or ou in thou or of ow in 16 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 43 Each of the long vowels should be pronounced full and broad, and the voice should dwell upon them twice as long as upon the short vowels, which should be sounded as short as possible. 44 When the sound of the vowel 9 i comes after another vowel, it is expressed by the consonant o y, (written without the ^ u,) and that of 5 by the cha- racter cocro ; thus, T5"coo r ai, a stone. 2^ ODJ-O fro ee a palanqueen-bearer. 45 The long vowel ^ and its connected form "^ e in some cases, which must be learned by practice, as they can scarcely be embraced by any rule, instead of the pronunciation before mentioned as that generally attached to them, take a sound nearly approaching to oCo-o y a ^ and some what resembling the final sound produced by the bleating of sheep ; hence, perhaps ^&>f meku a sheep ; thus also, ~^> nelu, the ground, and ^Q^>3 nerumao, a crime are pronounced nearly as if written ~i3~ej nyalu^ TxTC&3$x> nyarumco ; and, in the common dialect, they are often so erroneously written. 46 The sound above assigned to the vowels *toW roo, r ti5~ roo, & 2/ loo, as Wvill as to their connected forms, ^ roo, ^~ roo, and 2/ loo, is that which pro- perly belongs to these characters in the Teloogoo language ; and which is invariably given to them by all the natives in the northern provinces of the Peninsula. In the middle provinces, the r and / are pronounced with the tongue mor curved towards the roof of the moutb 3 and the oo less distinctly, with an inclination to the sound of the French u, and to the southward, these letters assume the sounds of ri-ree-and lee-given to them by Sanscrit Grammarians. CONSONANTS. 47 It is chiefly in the pronunciation of the consonants that difficulty is expe- t rienced. ^ k./tu, & g t h, $ ch^h, cv> j : h, $ t,h t $ d t h, $> tfr, $ d,h, V p.hy 3f b,h, the ten aspirated consonants, peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives; are not, at the commencement of a word, familiar to an English ear ; but they oc- cur frequently in our language in the middle of compound terms ; the sound of the h flowing, in an easy gentle manner, immediately after that of the k, g, d> &c. which precedes it, without the least articulation intervening] thus, OF THE LETT KK.<. 17 the sound of ^ k, hu may be exemplified by that of the kh in ink, horn. ^s* do ^ g,h do gjt in dog,herd do. . . . . $ ch,h do ch^h in churchjdll. do c tji. ........ do tji in that, house. % do- .... ^> rf,A do d,h in a and 23 have each two sounds. ^ is pronounced either hard, as ch in 5eacA / 51 or soft, as ts in beats: and is sounded either hard, as j in jar ; or soft, as dz in torridzone. The soft sounds ts and efe are peculiar to the Teloogoo : and therefore, when - or K occur in words of Sanscrit origin, they are invariably to be pronounced hard; thus, tS'bvS&ydJw chundrcondm the moon,&t& 9 &> jndcondco, a fool, never can be pronounced tsundroondoo dzudoondW' In Teloogoo, both the hard and soft sounds are to be found ; but the rule is simple for ascertaining which of the two is to be given to these letters ; for if ^ or be followed by the connected vowels 3 i, s ee, -= e, -* c, or ^_ ue they are respectively pronounced hard, as ch, andj; thus, ^^ chetu, by, ^|| jetli, a wrestler ; but if followed by any other vowel, they always take the soft sounds ts and dz, as in ^H_ # tsukkSru, sugar. ~>^ tsofm, a place. >&> dzodao, a pair. Sf nya, sounds like n before y, or as ni in the word onion. t 52 ^ t & d and ^ n are the harshest possible sounds of t, d, and n, formed by 53 curving back the tongue, and forcibly striking the under part of it, against the roof of the mouth. 18 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 54 t & d and n must be pronounced very soft, the tongue being protruded, iu an easy manner, almost between the teeth ; the sound of t in tube, of d in duke, and of n in no, will convey some idea of the proper pronunciation of these letters. / The pronunciation of <$ t & d and <$ n is more soft, and that of ^ t & d and w w much harsher, than the sound of the English letters t d and n : but all endeavours to convey in writing an accurate idea of the correct pronunciation of these letters must, I fear, prove very inadequate to the purpose. 56 $ p, has the sound of;), as in pure. W b, has the sound of b, as in bold. 35b m, and its double form __% m, have the sound of m, as in man. cOb y, do .C y, . ,- . .--.do of y, as in yet. & r, do ij r, ..... .do. of r, as in river. o /, do r> /, do of I, as in billow. S> v, do. .......... Q v t do of v, as in vain. 57 ^. sh has a very soft smooth sound, between that of the s in the word sing, and of the sh in shine, but approaching more to the former, than to the latter sound. t 58 & sh, is the harshest sound of sh, as in push, busk Sec. 59 ^ a, has the sound of s, as in sister; never as in dismal, his, rosy &c. 60 ^r h, has the sound of h, as in ^az>. When this letter immediately precedes another consonant, as in the word y^^Ss^, it ought, according to the ortho- graphy, to be pronounced before it : but in Teloogoo so harsh a sound cannot be admitted, they therefore place the sound of the '&~ after that of the fol_ lowing consonant, and pronounce the word abovementioned Brumhit, instead L of Bruhmu. 61 v I partakes of the sound of both I and r, and is formed by the under part of the tongue curved back against the roof of the mouth : so far as regards the language of which we treat, this letter is to be considered as peculiar to the OF THE LETTERS. Vj pure Teloogoo ; for though it occurs in the Sanscrit Vedas, it is not to be found in any other Sanscrit work. It is common however to all the spoken dialects of the Peninsula. vSx ksh Is a compound of s k and *x sh. It is rather a harsh sounfl resem- 62 bling the ct in the English words fiction fraction &c &c. e$ rru is formed by a strong vibration of the tip of the tongue on that part 63 of the roof of the mouth which is next the upper teeth, as in pronouncing the words real, run, the voice dwelling forcibly on the first letter. The letter n or m never occurs except at the termination of a syllable ; 64 concluding the final syllable in a word it always represents the sound of m, as in mum ; in every other situation it is pronounced n, as in none ; except in Sanscrit derivatives, when it precedes a consonant included in any of the five Vurgus, it is then to be considered a mere abbreviation of the particular nasal which terminates the Vurgu to which the consonant belongs, and is to be pronounced accordingly. C n occurs only in pure Teloogoo words ; and like n or m, is found always. 65 at the end of a syllable, it represents a very obscure nasal sound, which is perhaps peculiar to the language, and can therefore be only imperfectly illustrated by comparison with a slight indistinct pronunciation of the final n in the French words bon, non, &c. This letter is found only in studied composition ; but, though omitted in common writings, the sound of this curious nasal may be discovered in the pronunciation of even the most ignorant natives. k The o n or m is denominated "$y* ?&~ &>'$''> &x> full unooswarum and the 66 C n &7F-&>~fr*^$*xx) half unooswarum. These are of two kinds, either radi- cal in the word, or inserted or added by some grammatical rule. The o n or m never can be changed into C n ; but if C n be preceded by a short vowel, in order to render the quantity of this vowel long, the c n may be changed into oraorm; thus, 5&o&> mundoo medicine never can become 3&c&>; but ?fex5V kulungi, possessing, may become >oA ; and *fi~ 9 3fo>C)& Rammndm, Rama, may become 20 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 67 h is peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives. In the middle of a word, it is pro- nounced like a strong aspirated h final ; as 9oo^)5, untuhpooru, but, at the end of a word, it takes after it the sound of the vowel which terminates the pre- ceding syllable ; thus, 9o52 is pronounced untuhu, not untuh as above. In Teloogoo, it seldom occurs except in the middle of compound words derived from the Sanscrit; and therefore in general possesses only the first of the two powers here explained- 68 A clear, distinct, and correct pronunciation, and an easy deliberate man- ner of speaking, are acquisitions of importance in all intercourse with the Natives, "by whom they are highly valued as marks of good breeding. Euro- peans are too apt to speak the Teloogoo in an abrupt, hurried, and conse- quently vulgar manner, and to disregard the great distinction between the long and short vowels, and the harsh and soft consonants ; we are in conse- quenc often unintelligible, or at least very obscurely understood by the Natives, who are either too obsequious, or too timid, to explain their per- plexity ; and we are thus induced to blame their ignorance or stupidity, when our own attention alone is in fault. ORTHOGRAPHY. 69 Founded on the principles above explained, nothing can be more nicely de- fined than the correct orthography of each Teloogoo word. The writers on this language, indeed, seem to delight in a refined minuteness and multipli- , city of rule, unknown to European authors ; and the last deviation from their established maxims would be considered an unpardonable error in any studied composition or literary work. But, in the colloquial use of the lan- guage, grammatical rule is more or less disregarded, even by the most learned 'persons; and as the Natives in familiar correspondence, or official business, write as they would speak, many irregularities in orthography are observable in common writings- The most general are the following. 70 The consonant <^ ?/, without any connected vowel, is improperly used instead of the initial vowel i. OF THE LETTBS. 21 The consonant cxxj y, with the connected vowel a, viz. oys~ ) Jg incor- 71 rectly used, instead of the initial vowel ~&> ee. The consonant OX) y, with the connected vowel *, viz. c&>, is used for the 72 initial vowel <^ e. The letter ox> y, with the connected vowel ~^ e, thus oso, is used instead 73 of the initial <*> & The consonant v, with the connected vowel v> co, viz- q), is incorrectly 74 used instead of the vowel &. The consonant v, with the connected vowel ^ thus &*, is improperly 75 used instead of &> oo. The consonant ^ v, with the connected vowel c " or ~ = ^ > , thus &* or "^), is 76 used for ^> o. The consonant J u, with the connected vowel * or ^TO, thus *> or "^7, 77 is used instead of 2o } is improperly 78 used, at the commencement of Sanscrit words, for the vowel ue & ; but the use of 9ox> at the commencement of a pure Teloogo word is not incorrect.* The vowel & u, with & above mentioned, viz. &&, is incorrectly used at 79 the beginning of Sanscrit words for & uo ; although it's use at the com- mencement of pure Teloogoo words is proper. The initial vowels, *?*^ TOO &c 1CXXT r oo, and their connected forms ^ roc 80 &. p> roo, which are peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives, are often confounded with the syllable 5b, or with the double form of # r (viz- ti r) and the con- nected vowel \> oo, thus, && krooshnu is erroneously written krooshnu and vice versa. CHAPTER SECOND. OF THE ELISION, INSERTION, AND PERMUTA- TION, OF LETTERS. Possessing the refined and inexhaustible Sanscrit, as the established medium 81 for the communication of knowledge, to the few among whom it's dis- semination is thought to be lawful ; Teloogoo writers have had little induce- ment to give much attention to the cultivation of their own language. Their literature consists almost entirely of poetry ; and their Poets, desirous only to please the ear, or, to flatter the vanity of the reigning Prince, seem to have deemed the improvement of their style a secondary consideration. The ca- dence of their verses, and the tones of the words composing them, have oc cupied almost their exclusive attention. The consequence has been a neglect of the more important qualities of composition, and a studied conciseness of expression, which, though not inelegant in itself, has frequently the effect of rendering their sentences obscure. At the same time, by a judicious union of the sweetness of the original Teloogoo, with the majestic sounds of the sonorous Sanscrit, they have succeeded in giving to the language a pleasing variety of modulation, which distinguishes it from all others current in the Peninsula. Another principal cause of this euphony is the extraordinary care that has 82 been taken to prevent any incongruity of sound arising from the conjunction * of dissimilar letters. The numerous rules, for this purpose, are scattered, in a confused manner, through the works of many Grammarians ; and, as the fol- lowing is the first attempt to reduce them to methodical order, it may here- after, perhaps, be found susceptible of great improvement. 24 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. I shall endeavour to explain, 1st the alterations which take place in letters at the beginning and end of words ; and 2ndly, the changes which occur in the middle of words. But it is proper, in the first place, to apprize the Reader, that the following rules are by no means rigidly observed, except in studied compositions. In the common or colloquial dialect,*many of the changes will occasionally be found : it is true that they are not there adhered to systemati- cally, but even in that dialect they are seldom entirely neglected. The Student, however, may find it more convenient to refer occasionally to this chapter as he advances, than, at the very commencement of his labours, to enter into some of the most perplexing niceties of the language. OF THE ALTERATION OF LETTERS AT THE COMMENCEMENT AND END OF WORDS, 83 In treating of this subject, the whole of the words in the Teloogoo lan- guage are divided into two classes ; one termed s'sfew kululoo, the other {&>}?$ (So i?r\e>ex> drootupritkrovtoolo)' 84 The class termed ^ew kululoo includes, 1st the singular and plural nomi- natives of all nouns and pronouns, (except <<& land "WrS) he she or it) and the oblique case, or what I have termed the inflexion, of all nouns and pro- nouns, both in the singular and plural number. 2dly. The postpositions <^c>?f_ or "SfcoSf of, 3cn>9^ or ^o8o5) towards, on account of, 55 ^Cc* through, ~^&> from, && through, S)Sc^cS5o^oo respecting* &s5bo on account of, ^^s5oo or ^oStfs&o for, on account of, &P& or % , away Jrom- 3dly. The final significant letters *" or expressing interrogation, -=> or denoting emphasis, and ^ or ^ expressive of doubt. 4thly. Indeclinable particles, like &>, S'S, 3& efe, &er*>, SJo-Jfcr, ^otf, & c . 5thly. All Interjections, and vocative cases. 6thly. The words, S^Sfc now> &3g&> then, ^SSjSfr when f OF THE CHANGE .OF LETTERS. 25 7thly. Every part of the verb; except the first and third persons in the sin- gular, and the third person neuter in the plural, of the first forms of the past and future tenses, and of the affirmative aorist ; the first person singular of the negative aorist ; the infinitive ; and the present verbal participle terminating in *& ; and, when followed by vowels only, the mdifinite relative participle ending in & or <&>, or the root when used for this participle. The Negative verbal participle, which always -ends in , is classed both in. 85 the S'sfew kululoo, and the # ^S/^S&ex) drootuprukrcotooloo. The nominatives &(& 2, U"r& he she or it, and the several parts of the verb 86 mentioned above, as exceptions ; together with all the other words in the lan- guage, not included in the foregoing specification of the Sf V ex> kululoo , form the numerous class denominated j e^S$^&ew drwtuprukrootoolw. Every Teloogoo word, whether included in the class of S'Sfew kululoo,', or 87 drootuprukrootooloo, naturally terminates in some one of tho ' connected vowels- I shall first point out the changes which occur when any of these words is followed by another commencing with an initial vowel ; and shall then explain the alterations that take place, when any of them is followed by another beginning with a consonant. In Teloogoo, two vowels never can come in contact ; therefore, when a 88 word terminating in a connected vowel is followed by another commencing with an initial vowel, there is either-the change termed by Grammarians Sundjii, or a consonant is inserted between the two words ; unless the initial vowel be one of the Sanscrit letters "WM roo, K&T'roo, and "2 loo, which at the beginning of a word, are to be considered the same as consonants. The consonants inserted, when Sund^hi does not occur, are co y if the for- 89 mer of the two words be included in the class termed "^ex> kuluho, and tf n if it belong to the ^&,#^S^&)ex3 drootuprukrwtoolw ; but, which ever of these two consonants is inserted, it chang.es the following initial vowel into it's connected form, and, coalescing with it, forms, in conjunction with it, one syllable. 26 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 90 Sund\hi is the elision of the connected vowel terminating the first word, and of the initial vowel commencing the following word, and the substitution of the connected form of the latter vowel in lieu of both ; as shewn in the ex- amples hereafter given. 91 Sttnd,hi never takes place unless the first word terminates in one of the three short connected vowels " u, i, or *o oo, except in a few particular instances noticed hereafter. FINAL, v 92 It may be adopted as a general rule that a word terminating in v followed by another commencing with an initial vowel, may at option have Sundjii; thus, "tkcO?^ that grazed, and 53q) a cow, make ~&:'&~& $) the cow that grazed, by dropping the final ^ in "&&# and the initial & in &$), and substituting for both the connected form of & viz. o ; which, uniting with the preceding <* n, makes the syllable ^~, by means of which the two words coalesce- But as the Sundjii of final ^ is optional, and ~&>r^ is included in the class of s ew \ululoo, sk^f^and &$), when Sun d,hi does not take place, become "So.^cS" ; &$j&$ffi$ drootuprukrootooloo, ending in ^, never admit of SandM- By rule 89, therefore, & n is always inserted after such words, when the following one begins with an initial vowel. The word ^oS' more, is excepted ; for adding to it *Sx> what ? we may say, either 22o"13&> w hat more ? by inserting tf n, or ^o~lf *> by Sundfii. 94 Vocative cases ending in ^ and the nominative case singular of pure Teloogoo nouns denoting women, and terminating in v, do not admit of Sundjii, when followed by a word commencing with an initial vowel. Being of the class named ?T^e>D kululco, such words assume c** 5 y as explained in rule 89 i thus, I^CCT a tvoman nd sf^& he she, or it gave, make, OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS- 27 a woman gdve, never fi . SopcS* O Krishlnaf and SJ ' here, make ^S^c3ooo^f_ aStf^ O KrisMna ! come here; never ^^^^^^^5%^. FINAL. * A word terminating in 9 followed by another beginning with an initial !>,- vowel, does not, in general, admit of Sundjii; thus $ & a ^wz/e, and <^ '& & where ; cannot by Sund t hi become SfjgSli^ but make ?f^Sb_?P;i8S zMcre w Me Awz/e . ? by inserting cxo in the manner above explained, STJ^ being in- cluded in the class named ?fsfex> kululoo. EXCEPTIONS. In the first form of the perfect tense of verbs, the second person singular 96 ending in or >, the first person plural terminating in 8&>, an( j the second person plural ending in 8, when followed by a word commencing with a vowel, invariably have Sund,hi> thus (OSo-ffiQS) thou servedst, and the gods, make iOS)c)e9SJSfc>bo tf/i0M servedst the gods, by dropping final ( and initial 65, and substituting, in lieu of both, the connected form of 65 viz. "% which, joining with the preceding J u, forms the syllable 55", by means of which the two words coalesce. In the same tense, the first person singular terminating in &, and the third 97, person plural ending in 9, may, or may not, have Sund.hi, at pleasure ; thus, l_ I have saluted, and 65-j&g&>cO the Unperishable, make l^^J_ //foue saluted the Unperishable (Vishtnoo) ^^9 ^ey came, and A e Crotfo, make sS'S^S'x&SbeA) ^ GoJs came ; the Sundjii, however, being optional, these phrases may have another form- We may say ^^^J^ _ & ?5-I^3b^ jf Aa W saluted the Unperishable (Vishtnoo) ^^QcCo^b&^x) the Gods came; here <^ n is inserted in the first phrase, because\~oto>; 9 is in- cluded in the \&j *$i So ;\C^)O drooluprukrootooloo ; and c 00 y in the second sentence, because ^"^9 is of the class named ^v ex) kululoo. 'The pronouns 65S ^^ S5S ^ ow , ^a this, ^S) ^^e, ^^ z/cA? ^S) 98 what ? the word 53o^ again, more, and the postposition to, have 28 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. optional Sund.hi; thus, e>a and ^ make &~&> or &>>% what is that? and &> make & s > or 9>o>S) HJ/MC/* are these 9 in the same manner we may say, "-^r^lS^ or "-CcOrSftOToSX) wAal y^as Jeen done? 35ox)SX> or, wore? T^SSoo^S^^ or Tr ) J5bo$&'^f$9 he, she or z< ^aue to Rama* In all these phrases, except the last, when Sundjii does not take place, ooo y is inserted ; because each of the first words are included in the class termed JT$ex> hululoo ; but in the last sentence, N> n is inserted after i, because it is of the class named (&}*$ \3>j&\&ex) drootvpruhrootooloo. 99 Words ending in 9 , if followed by the word e9x>tf added to adjectives, or how much ? have Sund,hi at option, thus; ">& and ^o* 5 ^" make 3d5box>?5 c/^/". In the same way, we say , followed by others beginning with an initial vowel, invariably have Sundjii ; as Tys&DcSSb llama, and ^^^f& he, she, or it gave, become TT'SfoDoSlS^Rxj Rama gave. Innumerable other instances might be given. EXCEPTIONS- 101 The accusatives ^f&X me; ^^^ thee, *$&^ him, her, or it, U s, Sto^bo you, &S&3, thenii the postpositions ^#& for, &> to, &o&> i n . the words <^o&> in which, ^o&> i #/, ^9o2^ in that, and the particle &> added to the roots of verbs to form the present verbal participle, have also Sundjii, when followed by an initial vowel, but it is entirely optional; thus ^"rfo^. me, and &ex>s$x> nffe MOM, make tfl3^e>3B$ or S(^^J*4xiaio rw/e MOM me, *& speaking, ^&$cfo thus he, she, or if sa7, make 9&)k>!03o or ^^P^ speaking, he, she, or # /A5 saz'c?, "S^-i&> saying, and I^sri^c2fc / ie {5 make ISSjj-x&'Sr^c&o or " : 3e3>j>-C&^)"(2r^j:2^2 Ae w saying. In these phrases, when SundM does not take place, the first words being all \&&\&f^ ^^ drootupritkrootooloo, & n is inserted between them and the words which follow. OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. Zif The first and third persons singular in the affirmative aorist, the indefinite 102 participle in &, or the root used for that participle : and nouns in the accusative singular ending in *o when deprived of their drootuprukrootica affixes, never admit of Sand, hi $ as j& I come, have come, or will come, and ^^2*0 now, make T^|oS5>j>2Sb / come, have come, or will come now. ^"^^ he comes, has come, or will co me, and ^So^So now, make S5"-Kk^s3>j>& fa comes, has come, or will come now. ^axo-lfc that protects, -^C5bi the'god, and ocrsr;& I have meditated, make e lxOafc)3';: 5bce>c-a'Sr o &> / have meditated on M the protecting God. "75"5&o the accusative of "G^SxttC^ib Kama, deprived of it's drootuprukrootica affixes, and -H<&\o" : 3i& he, she, or it saw, make l : & he, she, or it saw Rama. All words ending in any of the short vowels, invariably have Sundjti, when 103 followed by <^C a leaf; or by the words ^^. an elder brother, ^^ a mother, ^ 9 $ an elder sister,. e^cOog a father, ^>_g a mother-in-law, ^^ a father , K>S5 a grand mother fyc. when added to proper names to express familiarity or kindness ; thus, 1*^ the hand, held so as to contain any thing, and <^C<3Sb full, make I3l3co fl Palmyra-leaf. Nouns of Sanscrit derivation, even ending in the short connected vowels ", 104 ?, or ^, which in the nominative singular do not adopt the Teloogoo termina- tions C&bj S$iv>, or $), never admit of Sund,hi ; thus, 00^^, a swan, and <^& which ? make ^OpS^)^ rohich is the swan 7 2$^e~ durb,ha, a kind of sacred grass, and <>5^ ivhich? make >$"e-c3oa to/'c^ z> ^*e durljia? Sj-*8 <^ e ,(70^ Vishtnoo, and oOC~^r& 7 is inserted between it and the following word, according to rule 89. 105 Words ending in any of the long vowels never have Sund.hi, nor do the short vowels ' "* or 2/ admit of Sand, hi, except when followed by the words specified in rule 103. When followed by any other words beginning with an initial vowel, words of such terminations, if they be ySfc/Cf^ 3^i3bex> drootu- prukrootoolno insert ^ n, and if &% &> kululoo coo. As the first word in each of the following phrases belongs to the class termed ? coo is inserted between it and the word which follows. a W oman, and <*>& where? make ^55"erc&>a where is the woman ? 0:0 being inserted between #>tr an j oift changes the following initial vowel a) of <^& to its connected form , and uniting with it, forms one syllable c&>, by means of which the two words coalesce ; SS^S a Palanqueen, and ^ &> he, she, or it mounted, make 3>&sc&r &) he, she, or it mounted the Palan- queen; S5"^x coloured, and 2ol3 a garment make Sl&c&MiS a coloured garment; ~o night, and *>o<6 lustre, make ~oc^>o5p moonshine ; "^> Me ancl 2oJ5qJ) beauty, make ^>^>o?5^) personal beauty; S> money, and donation, make ^ooo-oS) he, she, or it went, make !%C^ he, she it or it went slowly ; $ n being inserted between ScSi^A* and changes the following initial vowel & of &c~7\;& into it's connected form "^ , and uniting with it, forms one' syllable ~^, by means of which the two words coalesce; the accusative )~$~e^ the Creator, and -&>tl\o" : 3f& he, she, or it saw, make S3!^'r) i JUo~T3r& he, she, or z sazy the Creator; ^^ (9orf, in the accusative case, and -& i JUo' : 3f& he, she, or # Saw, make ^ K^jA.o'SrW Ae, 5//e, or it &aio God; ?^?^J Me Goddess of learning, (in the accusative case), OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 31 and 9<&~^r& he, she, or it asked, make &x> <* > $~J(&> he, she, or it asked the Goddess of learning ; J* the moon (in the accusative case) and tser^io-O having seen, make | "ST'er^lo-O having seen the moon. It must here be parti- cularly observed that the accusatives afcovementioned are, in the first place, for the sake of example, deprived of their drootuprukrootica affixes. When a word, both ending and beginning with a vowel, is repeated, there 106 is Sund t hi; thus, &Z>^an elder brother, when repeated, becomes ^^J^. bro- tlier ! brother ! ^S what, in the same manner, becomes <&~&>2to what ! wliat ! The pronoun && she or it, when added, in composition, to other words, 107 frequently loses the initial & ; thus, "S^ c ^) a husbandman, a labourer, and 9& she, become, in composition, ~5~c <$)8> a female labourer, by the elision of 9 in 9& ; but in consequence of ~3~C^) ending in ^>, Sundjii also may take place, according to rule 100, and the two w/>rds in question will then become TPCXSa ; in the same way , S^SSb &3 a man of the Comtee cast, and ^>^> she, make s b&3& a woman of the Comtee cast, but as the elision of ^ is optional, we may also say ^S$b3cSoa by inserting coo according to rules 95 and 89. Inflexions ending in V) "^ or ^, though included in the class of s"sfew 108 kululoc, affix ( n when followed by postpositions, or prefixed in composition to other no.uns commencing with an initial vowel, thus, ~&&x>. Rama, and <^;&>x> a serpent, bones, make ir&3ol35Sx)^ ex) a serpenfs bones. Having thus endeavoured to explain the changes which take place, when a 109 word terminating in a connected vowel is followed by one commencing* with art initial vowel, I shall proceed to state those which occur, when a word ending with a connected vowel is followed by one commencing with a consonant. If a word beginning with a consonant bo preceded by another included in 110 the class termed Sv ex> hululoo, there is no elision or insertion of lettflfs and permutation takes place in the following instances only. 32 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. Il I Nouns in the nominative case, even when used accusatively, and all parts of the verb ending in &> t 2&>, and & together with the words 9>>j><&> then, ^S5^><&> now, <^S3^&> w hen ? preceding a word beginning with any of the hard letters &&'&, change them respectively to X# ; thus, ^>*X> wealthy preceding *^2& she or it will not go, changes the *> p of S3"^&> into 3 v, and we say ^ >*>*> &> riches will not disappear ; in the same manner, c^^)-^ 3 -ST^CcSb he is going, and S">8 a robber, make sW^fcSft^^C&KgS tfte roooer is going ; ^^) ^^^ she, or it is departing, and "&& **> /h'tf ndship, make sb^afcf^a^OSto friendship is departing; ef>55>j>&b ^ eW} and -tf^c^or&Ae, s/j^ or it went, make 9S5^&b^>63o;& ^ she, or it then went ; ^So>j>j>2&& cs5or& Ae, .?%o~ : d>&>he ) she, or it was pleased, make 5^ t> 5'5b?^o' : Sr^> the master ivas pleased ; never (5X'5b?c2>X5bro' : 3?& never "O^S&oC <&>'5b?!o" : 3?& Rama was pleased. 113 When two pure Teloogoo substantives are joined together by a copula- tive conjunction, not expressed, but understood, and the latter word^begins with any of the hard letters ^ & & So, these letters are severally changed to fQ${$&o5j ; thus, "5^e>3 a leg, and "Te&>ex> hands, make 'S^ew e^<3bew legs and hands ; ^^ an elder brother, and ^^M^exj younger brothers, make ^^^ gSaSx^exJ elder and younger brothers. * Although $ may be changed into X - -f into 3 - &> into & - 5 . into & and S5 into , the rarerse of this rule does not hold goud, these letters are not interchangable : K cannot by any means become ?f, nor X$, "$ &c. The first series may be converted into the second, but the second can never be converted into the first, OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 33 If a word commencing with any of the five hard letters & ~& *** Q >, be pie- 114 ceded by another included in the class termed ^^e^^iS^^bew drootupru- i krootooloo, both permutation and insertion of letters invariably take place ; but if the latter word begin with any other consonant, there is insertion only, and it is optional* When a word included in the \&j & \&i3^&)Vd drootuprukrootooloo precedes 115 another word commencing with any of the five hard letters $ '%> & C" So, it * * invariably changes these characters respectively, into the soft letters X K & w, and if it end in 9 or ,3. it is requisite to insert between the two words, or ?& if it terminate in any other letter ; but if it already end in $ or ( . j&, these terminations cannot again be affixed, for the repetition would be monotonous : at the same time, if the i&> i *$\&i ^>ex> drootuprukrootooloo'end in a short vowel, either o or C may be substituted for the or &>, but only c if it termi- nate in a long vowel; thus, ~&$v (the accusative plural of ~&& God) deprived, for the sake of example, of all it's drootuprukrootica affixes, antf I served, make ^^W^^8>Rl or ~sT#e;o^>-a8 between the two words, or in consequence of the 'o i n IzsS&i o being short, substituting either o or C for &>. Any of the ^ ^^ ^^drootuprukrootooloo preceding a word commenc- 1 1 6 ing with a consonant different from the five hard letters, without causing permutation, may at option affix 8 if it end in. 9 5 or ^1, or f& if it end ii\ any other vowel ; but if it already terminates in or & these affixes are not again to be added, because the repetition would be monotonous: either 3& S- ^ & $ & f in place of R) or ^^ w * r is converted into X- rf into a - fc, into ^ . tf into g and So into W, but, as befor observed of another rule, the reverse of these changes does not 'hold good. 5 34 TKLOOGOO GRAMMAR. provided the drootuprukrmlmloo terminate in a short vowel, but if it end in a long vowel r we may insert C n only ; thus, deprived for the sake of example of all arootuprukrootica affixes, the accusative ^58 an enemy, and ~7^ !)>$> / won or conquered, make t98$~KO-)& by affixing in consequence of ^59 ending in ; or e>81?e)-a9 or e>8-~^0-a8 by affixing o n ori~; or es8ol?)-aSS> or ^>8c~XO-a:0 by affixing o or C ; or as the whole of these affixes are optional, we may say simply e95~^>-8<0 / conquered the enemy : thus also deprived, for the sake of example, of all drootuprukrootica affixes, the accusative TT'dxc&O Giants, and 3 : oc-g)7T t> <5b they killed, make ~&\ by affixing &>, or T^vlxJobotfo&o-a^Sb or TP'&Joo by affixing ^ n or i~ ; or as the whole of these affixes are optional, we may say simply ~G*&'&vSpoo--^>&> ffoy killed the Giants; but we cannot here affix o or C, and say Tr > &&ool3" 5o, because 4> follows, and the affixes o or C precede the letters X K to 55o & & $ >cdx only : deprived of all its drootuprukrootica affixes, the 3d person in the first form of the past tense of ^"^^ to come viz-SS'liS^ he, she, or it came, and TS^OVSOCI^ o, coxcomb, make ^ : ^f&~C5~ olp?ioCi2b by affixing &>, or ^"^o-fs^o^^c^ or ^"^C-cjoo^soca^b by affixing o O r C ; or, as the whole of these affixes are optional, wemay say simply 55"^^ "i^ov^C^b a coxcomb came, but we cannot affix n & or i~", and say r \'m~ oQ&cSfe or " "W 6fi j because these affixes never precede the consonants 1 J 7 Certain masculine nonns in *^> C-5^> form their accusative singular either by changing C&b into > or by dropping C^ altogether ; thus, Nom : T^S&DC^ Rama, Accus: l^s&oiO or l^sSixD: in the latter case, it must be observed, as an exception to rules 115 and U6,-that to such accusatives in \> the drootu- prukrootica affix $ is to be added, instead of the affix ?& ; thus, ~S"S&o , one of the accusatives of Rama, and ">>> / served, make lTS&o;>?$ never "^S5bo^)K^D-5)^ I served Rama. OF TllE CHANGE OF LETTBS. )."> . Nouns ending in c&>S$ change this termination optionally into "^^o O r 118 ; thus, S&DjgcCd3w a pearl, 'oo O r this rule is also applicable to nouns in c&b. ft03- -- OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS IN THE MIDDLE OF WORDS. The changes which take place in the middle of words are few and easy, and consist chiefly of contractions which occur naturally in a quick pro- nunciation- Present verbal participles ending in *& preceded by r&, optionally drop 119 the ^ of <&, or sometimes change the &> into o, thus, 9i$j-v&> saying, seeing, &&>& hearing, make && - s ^ - Srfr^, or - &o& -c5b . -i5"?Sb-iS3 going, $J^&>-&> entering, and some other verbal paticiples do not change &> into o, but they frequently drop the "o in ?&. Verbal Roots of more than two syllables, of which ^ - ew - &o - 5b or 120 few are medials, frequently drop the ^ of these syllables ; thus, ~ld'&>&>t3 plait, to twist, often becomes ~^^^ and <^5Sb -Z& ; zoee/?, ?o cry, ^^^ ; but if, in such roots, one short syllable only precede <^o > or few, no elision of the "O takes place ; thus, &>2&-b to wipe, cannot become e$j Cs. Nouns of three syllables, of which the middle one is &> ew or <2Sb, freqt^nt- 122 ly drop the N> of these syllables ; thus, -) a watei^cottrse, make "^^ "^ T>e; ; and this elision of ^ takes place even in other words; thus, "S^ftoST 6 ?!) a buffalo 1&T""iW(i)0 a species ofjiger, sometimes become A in the middle or end of a word is often changed into 3 ; thus, \*fijfo J23 Y//, become also 36 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 124 Many Teloogoo words which have 11 r in the first syllable, frequently lose it in the vulgar dialect ; thus, ^; Ao or >$) an ear-ring, is com- monly both written and pronounced cfr 6 ^) or &*&. 125 The reader need not be surprized if, in the course of his studies, he should meet with some examples in opposition to the foregoing rules, supported by good authority. On no part of Grammar are the opinions of Teloogoo authors so much at variance, as with respect to the changes attempted to be explained in this chapter : the ingenuity and subtilty with which each combats the arguments of his opponent, have gained for every celebrated writer on Gram- mar some adherents ; and as authors rigidly observe the precepts of the parti- cular Grammarian whom they select for their guide, a comparison of almost any two books will exhibit some discrepancies not to be reconciled. Every endeavour has been used to select those opinions which are most generally received at present, but the subject itself is so intricate, and the opinions of native Grammarians respecting it so contradictory, that a foreigner who at- tempts to illustrate it must necessarily feel diffident of success. CHAPTER THIRD. The words of the Teloogoo language, formed of the letters treated of in 126 the foregoing pages, are classed by Sanscrit Grammarians under four distinct heads. 1st. ~o$S&o Deshyumoo, or, as it is more emphatically termed, ^^^ ^^ Utsu Deshyumoo, ihepure language of the land ; 2d. Tutsumumoo, Sanscrit words assuming Teloogoo terminations. 3d. Tudb.huvumoo, Teloogoo corruptions of Sanscrit words, formed by the substi- tution, the elision, or addition of letters ; and 4th. \^/v>^3&C3&o Grdmyumoo, Provincial terms, or words peculiar to the vulgar. To these we may also add the t5 ^""?^^ x ' ) , Unyu Deqjiyumoo, or words from other countries, somtimes given as a subdivision of the first Class, and comprizing, according to the definition of ancient writers, words adopted from the dialects current in the Canarese, Mahratta, Guzerat, and Dravida provinces only, but now also in- cluding several of Persian, Hindoostanee, and English origin. In each of the three following Chapters, which treat of substantive-nouns 127 and pronouns, of adjective -nouns and pronouns, and of the verb, the ISVcs&o will be distinguished from the &<3>J55boo W0 rds : but all abservations regard- ing the &i\^S>x> and e3?Sel3'C3S wor ds will be found in the Chapter respecting substantives ; because the words of the two last mentioned classes consist chiefly of substantives ; and the reader, reasoning from ana- logy, will find it easy to apply the rules given under that head, to adjectives, and verbs. 38 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 128 The rfiTMS&CSSbo, or provincial terms, are contractions or corruptions of pure Teloogop words, rather than a separate class of vocables ; I have there- fore deemed it better to offer, in the course of the work, such remarks respecting them as occasion has suggested, than to collect the rales regarding them under any separate head. S UB STANTI VE S. 1ST OF THE POSTPOSITIONS- Before entering on the subject of declension, a few preliminary observations are necessary, respecting that very useful class of words, by means of which the various cases of the substantive nouns and pronouns, in this language, are formed. 129 English substantives are declined by prefixing to them, in the singular and plural numbers, certain particles, termed prepositions. The cases of Teloo goo nouns and pronouns are formed in the same manner, except that the particles follow the noun, instead of preceding it ; hence, I have termed them postpositions. In Teloogoo, we would not ^say with swords, by men, of me; but ^J&e;^ - 3&&>s3a^& . i^>^>o?f_ swords with, men by, me of. 130 When a preposition accompanies an English word which is liable to inflexion, the word cannot stand in the nominative case ; it must assume it's inflected or oblique form : we cannot say of I, to I, &c. but of me, to me, &c. In the same manner, in Teloogoo, notwithstanding some nouns have nearly the same form in the inflexion, as in the nominative case, yet as all nouns and pronouns may be said to admit of inflexion, it may be laid down as a general rule, that when followed by postpositions, they cannot continue in the nominative case ; by, some of the postpositions, they ' are converted into their oblique form ; by others, either into this simple inflected state, or into the dative ; and by a few, derived from verbs, they are changed into the accu- sative case. The following is a list of the principal Teloogoo postpositions. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 39 CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD INTO 1'f's OBLIQUE FORM. - <3oo?f of', the sign of the genitive case. I - o to, for ; the sign of the dative case. er" 5 in; the sign of the local ablative. ~3> - ~>$ by, by means of; the sign of the instrumental ablative. e"~ - eT'Si - e^S^ef with, along with ; the sign of the social ablative. $ in, by, with- .loithin, inside- '---by, by means of, from. to, for. .for, on account of, about. >S$co ..,on account of, for. '...respecting. in. like. through. - x>o- .from, away from. FOUND IN BOOKS ONLY. with, along with- .wi/A, together with, for. by, from. by, by means of. CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD EITHER INTO IT*S OBLIQUE FORM OR INTO THE DATIVE CASE. ........out-side. upon, above- -...below, under- - o^D^C - r^^55b between. 25 A _ 40 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. ~3 > ?f .................. ...... behind, after . 13oa>cl ....................... behind. tO&Dj&TT -<02&>o .......... against, opposite* , CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD INTO THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. Scr-2>H- - />8cS> . foQo-& towards, on account of. FOUND IN BOOKS ONLY. . ....through. ....... .from, by. through. 131 Under the following rules, the whole of these words may be added to any noun or pronoun, placed in the particular case which the postposition is stated above to require. 132 The postpositions - o s the signs of the dative case, are not used promis- cuously with* any inflexion ; is added only to inflexions terminating in 9 - or ^ ; thus, inflexion ^9 Vishtnoo, dative ^8l to Vishtnoo ; inflexion $\ s\ The Goddess of prosperity, dative ^.^i^ to the Goddess of prosperity ; and o to inflexions ending in any other letter, inflexion ""&> a stick, dative to a stick, inflexion S> & a ruler, dative 0 f a ruler, inflexion Sfo/fosS" a woman, dative Sfo/foS^ to a woman: but it is requisite to insert the syllable 3 between o anc | a \\ inflexions ending in N> "^ or ^ ; as, inflexion Rama, dative TT 3 S5ixD^6 to Rama, inflexion 65o?5s^o beauty, dative JSs^xD?5o to beauty. 133 /The postposition $ is added only to the inflexions of nouns denotin^ * O inanimate things ending in ^>; thus, we may say -^^x$ in the paper, because the inflexion ~3^s&j ends in *o ; but we cannot add $ to S^V a female garment, for it ends in *-, nor to /^ow^ a horse, because it is an *) animate object. 134 Inflexions always terminate in some vowel, and the postpositions &O&, eJfcoo, e)ewtf, &>& } a nd ^SbTV commence with vowels; but, by the rules already given, two'^owels cannot come in contact; a singular inflexion OF SUBSTANTIVES. 41 terminating in \> ^ or ^ although included in the class termed kululoo, when followed by these postpositions, affixes < n\ thus, ~5"s5ex> rjd& opposite Rama &c. (rule 108)- When these postpositions, however, follow a singular inflexion ending in any other vowel, or plural inflexions which always end in ^>, such inflexions being of the class named vex> kujulov, <:>M is inserted be- tween them and the postpositions in question, which, in consequence, become respectively ci5bob - OCoeao - cOofe>oe - c3o&>k> and o^2$aJfc"7f '; thus, ^S" Od5oo.!56 in rulers ; at the same time, as all plural inflexions end in >, and therefore have inherent the connected vowel ^, which before an initial vowel, may, by the rules before given, have Sund t hi at option, we may also say Sf& ooCSb i* rulers &c. .&c. 1&> o^"Saow and "^^ are never subjoined to any words except verbal nouns, 135 or nounldenoting inanimate things j and 3J~> is used only after abstract nouns. - So i^x>Cc* - ls;b and $~3 always change into '^fte - *& ^c& - *8?o ]3g and ^J^jwhen used as postpositions. The n^ure and use of the foregoing words will be more fully explained in 137 the Syntax, where it will be shewn that many of them, though used as postpo- sitions, ap in fact parts of nouns, or forms of verbs. I have no doubt that the whole anderived from the same sources : at the same time, without a further knowledg of the ancient dialect than we now possess, it would be difficult to trace the rigin of some pure Teloogoo derivatives, such as csioo Jf t} ie s |g n j of the geitive, and & or the signs of the dative case. This difficulty has led ' some to Nat these, and similar words, rather as affixes inseparable from sub- stantives,han as a separate class of vocables. But, whatever may be the history oktymology of these words ; whether they are derived from nouns or verbs novt>bsolete, or are themselves original terms, there is no doubt that, in use, theare distinct from all others in the language? and precisely equi- valent to ot English prepositions. This, I think, justifies my classing them as a separa part of speech, and giving them the appellation by which I have endeavours to distinguish them. 42 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 138* The articles a and the may be considered as inherent in the noun ; according to the context, may mean either a or the person. 139 The indefinite article a is somtimes expressed by the numeral &>", vulgarly written Q, meaning one ; as, ^^55o^oX one or a person. 140 There is not any separate word to represent the definite article the. In the concise and nervous idiom which characterizes the Teloogoo, this article, to- gether with the relative pronoun tvho, which, that, is incorporated with the verb, in that curious part of it termed the relative participles, which possess the combined force of the definite article, the relative pronoun, and the verb ; thus, in the sentence <^c ?"*-) #s$ari^> t ^ e p rson w fr o saw me . five glish words are expressed by three Teloogoo terms, #r&^ signifies m person, and t^&cS has the power of the, who, saio. 3d. OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTATIVE NOUNS. 141 The substantive nouns have two numbers ; the singular StfofosSfebo, anc | the plural t rw>T$X) ; and three genders, the masculine s^e^Cs&o, in- 8 eluding the gods and men only ; the feminine j^, , >oXsSx>, compizing the goddesses and women ; and ,the neuter t^)o'e)oX35co i including nanim ate things, and all animals, except the human species. 142 The cases are properly three only; the nominative, the inflexio, and the accusative ; but, in the following general remarks applicable to alhouns, the usual arrangement of six cases is observed- SINGULAR. 143 It has already been mentioned that there are few words in tl Teloogoo language which terminate in a consonant, among the nouns theres not one. In the nominative cafe singular, they all terminate in some of ( e following vowels ^^=3 s sr>^ "^ ^^-^ or "^ thus, &*$ a ruler, $2^ a worn cm, ^>9 a robber, ^o$&>o beauty, "^ w a shawl, 3"jk a stick, "J. tl hand &c. m w 144 The" Inflexion singular varies with the declension, as explaed hereafter- OF SUBSTANTIVES. The Genitive singular of all nouns is the same as the inflexion singular ; but 145 in books, and in conversation with Bramins, we occasionally find the postposition ^ X5 ^_ or cxfco?f of, added to the inflexion, to form the genitive. The Dative singular is formed by adding to inflexions in 3 or ~^_ - #35 145 to inflexions in ^ N7TS or ^, and 5 to inflexions in all other terminations. All nouns in the Accusative singular are the same as in the singular inflexion; 147 except that the inflexion is of the class termed "$ ex) kululoo, and the accusative of that named \&> iio5 i^Qbex) drootuprukrootooloo. That the reader may al- ways bear in mind this distinction, the inflexion will hereafter be "written in it's simple state, but to mark the accusative, the affix < will be added to all in- flexions in s> or 21, (except to inflexions formed by changing the termination of the nominative into that syllable), and the affix &> to all those ending in any other letter, (except to those mentioned in rule 117) and an &c will be further added to all, to denote that although the affixes $ or & are universal in the common dialect, and in correct language may, with propriety, be used before any consonants, yet others may be substituted in lieu of them, under the rules for drootuprukrootooloo \^j*$\&j^&) ? ~X), contained in the preceding chapter. The Vocative singular is either the same as the nominative singular, or is 148 formed by merely lengthening the final vowel of that case ; unless the nomina- tive end in v>, when that vowel is changed into ^ or o. The Ablative singular is formed by adding to the singular inflexion the 149 postpositions er 6 . ^# . S* & c . or $ to t } le i n fl ex j on o f nouns denoting nanimate things ending in "O. PLURAL. The Nominative plural is formed, in various modes, from the nominative 150 singular, according to the declension to which the substantive belongs. It always ends in ex>. The Inflexion plural is formed by changing ew of the nominative plural into w. 151 The Genitive plural of all nouns is the same as the inflexion plural; but 152 in books and in conversation with Bramins, we occasionally find the postpositi- ons"^^, or ^wr of, added to the inflexion te form, the genitive. 44 TELOOGOO (UlAMMAR. 153 The Dative plural is formed by adding So to ( ne inflexion plural in e>. 154 The Accusative plural is the same as the inflexion plural, both ending in O; but the inflexion is included in the kululoo, and the accusative in the i&i&^&t^&vj drootuprukrootooloo. To remind the reader of this material distinction, the inflexion will hereafter be written in it's simple state, without any of the additions peculiar to the ku,luloo; but ?&, with nn &c. will be added to all plural accusatives, for the reasons mentioned in treating of the accusative singular : $ is never aftixed to plural accusatives, because they always end in o, never in s 5 or "^ . 155 The Vocative plural is formed by changing the final N> of the nominative plural into o $ or o TT . 156 The Ablative plural is formed by adding to the plural inflexion the post- positions. W* - "-c^ - &^ &c. 157 The Vocative particles, *9 - &>< - 2oox> an( j 2* i) are often prefixed to the vocative case : the first is used in calling men of inferior rank only ; the second in calling females inferior to oneself, among whom a wife is always included by the natives; and the third in calling men of equal rank with oneself; these three are prefixed to the vocative singular only : the last is prefixed to the vocative both in the singular and the plural number, and is used indifferently in calling superiors, inferiors, or equals. 158 It is of great importance that the reader should constantly bear in mind that, in nouns denoting inanimate things, the nominative is generally used for the accusative, and the accusative for the ablative, but that this is not the case < with nouns denoting animate objects. 159 By the addition of the various postpositions to the different cases which they govern, the reader may form any number of other cases at pleasure. lo'O The nouns belonging to the iSSgsfco, or language of the land, are more numerous than those of any other class ; and, as the rules which regulate their declension extend also to nouns of the three other denominations, it seems proper to treat of them firsh :s. OP REGULAR ~S$ vSSbo NOUNS. The regular nouns of this class are divided into three declensions. The first 161 includes all masculine nouns, the nominative singular of which terminates in c 2&; the second, all feminines or neuters of more than two syllables, having the nominative singular in &> - "" &> _ or & ; the third, nouns of all gen- ders not included in either of the two foregoing declensions. The general rule?, already given, explain the mode in which the different cases are formed from the nominative singular, the inflexion singular, or the nominative plural. It will be sufficient, therefore, to show how these three cases are formed in each declension. FIRST DECLENSION IN C 2&. Many nouns denoting masculine agents have the nominative singular in 162 c b; but, as the letter C is unknown to any, except the learned, the C preced- ing <&b is usually omitted in writing, and the nominative of this declension is consequently made to terminate simply in &>. The obscure nasal sound of c before <&> will notwithstanding be found in the pronunciation of even the most illiterate persons- The singular inflexion of nouns belonging to this declension is formed by 163 changing the final c <5& of the nominative into & ; thus, nom. v>Xc<8b a hus- band, inflexion oSaAJD. nom. *$&x> Ccb a younger brother, inflex. e^^Six^S). But, with the exception of f c&s c &> a younger brother, and 9A; because *o does not precede the c <&> of the nominative case ; but, with the two exceptions abovementioned, all words which have N> before c & of the nominative have two forms in the inflexion ; thus, nom. W^ 2&>o!So a strong man, inflex. wD&D^ O r ^^ ^ 5 . The nominative plural is formed by changing C c&'of the nominative singular 164 . into e>J; thus, nom. sing. S5bXc2sb a husband, nom. plu. SfcXew husbands, nom. sing, 55^0 C^ a younger brother, noin. plu. ^S&^ew younger brothers. 46 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. The oilier cases of this declension are formed according to the ^eueriil rules given above ; and, for the sake of illustration, a word of this declension is subjoined, declined according to the usual arrangement of six cases. SINGULAR. C3& ........................... a younger brother* i o r es&o >15^x>j:f_ ........ ofayounger brother. &o )i3 .............................. to a younger brother. Acc efo&s & &c. ................... ....... a younger brother- V- efS&> C~GJ ......... . ...... ....'.......9 younger brother. Ab. &Sxx> iO - ef^ - "iS^" . ^** ....... in t by, or with a younger brother. P L U K A L. N- e^^x^oo ............................. younger brothers. G. ^^ V or ^^ > c^ 50 .^. ---- of younger brothers. D. ef5&,e;^> ........................... fo younger brothers. Ace. e^^Soo e)o^) &c. ..................... younger brothers- V.' iS"S^ er "^ ........ .... ............ younger brothers. Ab ^^J SJ - er* - ^SeS" - ^ ....... i nt by } or with younger brothers. 165 By rule 163, all words, except e^^c^b and esejoc^, which, in the nomi- native singular, have the vowel ^ preceding the final termination C^ may in the inflexion singular have two forms : such words, therefore, have likewise two forms in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular, which are formed from the inflexion ; thus, nom. sing. a)j)x<&b a strong man, inflex. sin. v&> or >>&>. sren- sing;. &>>>b<0c&>o' or w^CSb^ooS' dat. O or> "U~~" *v> ~U~~ sino-. We)25o^)| or W&^^So by the addition of to >e)&>!0 or ^o to a)e)5$o o fy^ ro * on on rules 132 & 146. ace. sing. &> &c. or we)^> &c- see rule 117. abl. sing. ttSeS^^ - er- 6 - "^^ - or ^^^ - er 6 - ir - &* and even D or) V> and ^^tfc, which, in the other cases, are exceptions to this rule, in the dative OF SUBSTANTIVES. 47 similar, take two forms : viz- s& %.- O r ^55c o . ef>ex>!0 or iwo. ^ 6 m The plural however has no change of this kind. In the inferior dialect, & is substituted for $ in all the singular cases of 166 this declension, except the accusative, which is made to terminate in Hk in- stead of $ ; thus, nom. sing, ^\x> c5& } inflexion sing. e$2$& d a t. s j n g. 5"s5cx> ~~tS 4 ^s accus. sing. e^S&^rl!^ &c. but these forms are never to be found in cor- rect writings. EXCEPTIONS. Some word- 1 , of this declension, form the nominatve and inflexion plural, by 167 changing the final C & of the nominative singular into o and o . or into >"^ ar.d c ^, instead of forming them regularly, by changing cu& into ex> o respectively ; thus, Xo&cSso robust man, makes in the nominative plural Xc3*-V?/, and several in "^ >co and -~*x> : but "^OT^SbD a wife, is almost the only feminine noun of this declension. The inflexion singular is the same as the nominative singular ; thus, nom. 169 sing, ^oea^oa/wr^e, inflex. sing. ^H^. The nominative plural is formed either by adding ex> to the nominative singu- 170 lar ; or by changing the termination ^ of the nominative singular into ex), and lengthening the preceding vowel, if not already long; thus, nom. sing. ^oef)S5JxD a horse, nom. plu. /fce>3&>ex> O r /^o^^X) horses- e<9 es w i The other cases are formed according to the general rules already given. 171 Subjoined is an example of this declension, according to the usual arrangement of six cases, 48 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. SIN GULAR. N XSftsSSbo.., ..... a /tore. G /foesisco or /&&9 3oo csfco^ , ...of a horse. e*9 66> ee Ace- /^oes^f &c ...................................... ahorse.' ee V. /fcesSsr ........... ................................. o horse. ee * Ab. /foe>3co -tr . & - ........................ iX by, or with a horse. &9 PLURAL. N /^oes^ooex) or /S^ex) ............................ horses. &e> A ee or G. or 6 " } of horses. or 66) 66) or Aoe^i) ........................ ^ h orses , 66) 6> ee bce>?6o &c.") or Acc. ' or } horses. V- 7^oeso5ooo~ o u or AD ef> , by, p c\ Ab. or )> .............. , ...... in, by, or ivith horses. . er 6 - 6> 172 All nouns in this declension, besides the dative singular as given above, may also form that case by changing S$DO o f the nominative into $, lengthening the preceding vowel, if not already long, and affixing the postposition? instead of & ; thus, nom. sing, /^o^^o a horse, dative sing. /fo&9S5i>D?5o O r fc~& nom. sing. 00x3"^ a bribe, dative sing. e.)o^S"S^o?5So or 173 The postposition $ added to the singular inflexion of nouns ending in *o denoting inanimate things, is either affixed in the regular manner to in- ,flexions of this declension, or the sSoo of the inflexion is changed into fS, and the preceding vowel, if not already long, is lengthened ; thus IT^JS^MrS or in paper. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 49 The nominative singular of nouns in this declension is often, in books, found 174 changed, from xx>, to %^ or o ; thus, nom. sing, ^ows^x) a horse, is often found written AoeaS&o^ O r ^b *~> O2X> - This rule, however, does not apply to nouns which have the long vowel * preceding the final &*> ; TfcpnHRjfci a wife, can never become "*3"^ T>S ^ or "^oTpoew. In the inferior dialect, all the singular cases in this declension, (except the 175 accusative), ending in &>, constantly change that termination into o ; thus, in conversation we frequently hear ^^ gmrrum used for KoegSSbo gmrrumco ; but this practice is contrary to the genius of the language, which requires all words to terminate with a vowel. The accusative, in the inferior dialect, is formed by changing &> of the no- 176 minative singular into >X and lengthening the preceding vowel, if not already long ; thus, nom. sing. ^o|g 3oo a horse, ace. sing. ^||*^ nom. sing. fc>o 5^o$bo a bribe, ace. sing. >o"Tir > N . The following, with all other neuter or feminine nouns, of mor than two 177 syllables, ending in ^x>, "" S5x> ? O r ~~s5bo, are declined like the chin, a beard. sale, a wife. V a dispute. lime, chalk. a key. the lock of a door. lead. an i ron style. raw r i ee beauty. && M yaw. .a fight, a battle. .tin. .residence. ..an elephant's. trunk. ..an accusation. .a crime. .a wager. .a bridle. S&o 50 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. THIBD DECLENSION- 178 This declension includes all other regular nouns, of every gender, not com- prized in the two foregoing declensions ; it comprizes, therefore, all regular neuters in &>, all regular nouns in S5w O f two syllables only, or of more than two syllables when the 5&> is not preceded by *" "= or ; in short, it com- prizes every regular noun whether masculine, feminine, or neuter, provided it be not a masculine in c &o, or a feminine or neuter, of more than two sylla- bles, in ^sSx), ~= 5&> or S&>- 179 The inflexion singular is always the same as ths nominative singular ; thus, nom. sing. > to the nominative singular, except to those ending in short s which change the final 9 into *o ex> as, nom. sing. )8* a child, nom. plu. C)^ex> children ; CJ (j^ ^g but as the noun "_Q a knife or sword, ends in 9 , it makes 3" e&gx) swords, in the nominative plural, never ST^exj* 181 The following is an example of this declension, declined according to the usual arrangement of six cases. SINGULAR. N. a child. G. or Acc. V. Ab. &c o child. N. G. 1). PLURAL. children. or >|e)C&30' of children. , .....to children. Acc. OSSoi\x> &c .children- V- SsSera^r , ....o children. (A* Ab. ' OF SUBSTANTIVES. 51 A few of the numerous words included in this declension are annexed. 182 9)\ 5sj> the head. /WO&3 . a pond, or tank. "So ^g a roll of beetle $c. tf" ^ . To "^^$) i . an artificial lake- ^ex)^ ^ X ^> the neck. 3* ^SSoog- [foot step. -fcssb ^g #* *>Anj v' . a frog. ^^ a bull, an ox. ^fF* iV*} J * -SooK Sov> . , fi rf 8?*^ . . . a woman. r'^Ts- . . . . . a whip. fc>^ ...-..-... a blow. *Te>8 ...... w tixjc^) . a door. #er8 ^sS3-9 -T^a ^^ ^^ ^oa ^^:\ . . ft rim r 5 ^ ^j-a.. a well. 52 TELOOUOO GRAMMAR. an ass. Do"S a large metal pot. a window, a creeping plant. S3 13 a small village. a spear, or pike. a box, a chest, a table. Sp the body- IRREGULAR PLURALS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 183 Many nouns ending in &, ^, ^, |?, <&, or &, which are regular both in the singular and plural, frequently drop the <> of the penultimate syllable in the plural number: thus, ^Sft &3 a person of the Comtee cast, makes the nom. plu. S^SfckweX) or ir'afo^; and if a double consonant precede the "b thus dropped, it is reduced to a single consonant in the nominative plural ; thus, "^ ^ a tree, "S^ex) or "^^f trees, wj? a bottle, nom. plu. ax>gbex> O r ^Jo bottles. ^o<2& an eqq, nom. plu. fto5bex> or ^o&> eqqs &c IAS 6s> ro V9 384 Some nouns in & or 2&, regular in both numbers, forn> also an irregular plural, by changing the & or #o of the nominative singular into & ; thus, nom. sing. fr>& powder, regular nom. plu. c^Sfcex), irregular nom. i Arti j^C** plu. s^^y. A Or> 185 All nouns in this declension ending in &,, which have the letter C or o immediately preceding these terminations, besides the regular plural, may have two irregular forms, viz. by changing the & or ^ of the nominative singular into either <*&> or w - } thus, nora. sing. fc)OGc a carriage, nom. plu. ajoSfcex), irregular nom. plu. 8>oJfo or a)oyo. fir fv> ISfi Many nouns having the termination of the nominative singular in ^ or ?^, in addition to the regular plural, form an irregular one in the manner mentioned in rule 184 ; thus, ~*>x>'& & an alligator ,makes in the nom. plu. either "S\>^ ex>ex> or "sfco^W but nouns of two short syllables ending in or ex) have the re- gular plural only, e)) a tiqer, makes ^)ex>ex> tiqers, never ^)&. C*i /' v * */ **^ Or) 187 The noun "*> o<*sO marriage, makes in the nom. plu. "H>o?sX) marriages* 188 Some nouns, having the nominative singular in &>, change that syllable in the nom. plu. into C&ew . thus, "?& a tank, nora, plu. ^;coex> ; others OF SUBSTANTIVES. 53 change the & into C^oeX) ; thus, ^ ^ JAe wawie o/ a tree, nom. plu. ?v c?6ew ; others change the <& into o) in the nom. plu. as, W T >?&> jfoA, nom. plu. Xr*ex> fishes, and others have the regular plural by adding W to the nom. sing. thus, ~&>(fo the body, nom. plu. ~&>r&e>3 bodies, 1TV& ^ e tcaisf, nom. plu. IPj&eX) waists. The noun ~ooo n^rfa makes the nom. plu. $ p -*>, and the noun 3q) a cow, 189 makes in the norn- plu. either 3q5)ex3 O r 55ew. IRREGULAR "SJSTCS&O NOUNS- As it is hardly possible to form any general rules for the declension of the 190 irregular "w^f CS$M nouns : a list of most of them is subjoined, shewing the nominative singular, the inflexion singular, and the nominative plural of each. Except in the formation of these cases, the whole follow the general rules for declension laid down in rule 143 &c. Most of the following nouns change the last syllable of the nominative sin- 191 gular into & O r C3 to form the inflexion singular, and into o2fc or &o to form the nominative plural, some of them also form the nominative plural, in the regular manner by adding *> to the nominative singular. Nom. sing. Inflex- sing. Nom. plu. / Waler boiled >f r ^e purposed ^ & ZZ&vo or (^ of dressing nee fyc. . ....... J f Any thing placed under a | ) 1 ' ou J, ld vessel \ to P revent ifs Vo^^S oc&5b^o or \falling, such as a straw I ( rope 8fc. ... , ....... . ...... ) Theforehead. ........... >C&>^ c^?^5bex) or The mouth ............. ~&rt>3 "^b-D5bex> or The west. .... ..... . . . S5c35b&3 SSSiS&esex) A river .............. &&3 ^asoew or C A plain, an open field, an~\ _ ^ ew J empty space of ground, an >J/^ ^e3oex) or {^esplanade, the outside. ..) 00^8 The palate or throat* . . . o^^S fc?o?sewo or TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. In/lex. Sing. Nom. Plu. A kind of pap made of raggy. Cftoa)^ tJowewew O r or O r O r or O r 54 Norn. Sing. TcX<&> / ceeding from the birth of a > ( child j 0/-6 cooD / "^ c points of both hands join- \ ed together, to hold anything. J <$> cOe) cfo fifo ^0 "sr^XQ A plough ^) i_0 The interior of the cheek ^) ^3 ^) ex>exD O r ^ ( The palm of one hand, held\ /\2 L "\^ / E c^) & ^3 ou v s vy or (.place ) s ^ t> | r _^ The navel S C The Courtyard, the enclosed V S5woAe) J empty space of grouna with- V (^ in a native house j S^S' A large pestle. . . S^c 3 5^ S' i *^ * An opening, a door-frame... "SP 3 1^3 "53^1^ or -^p ^ ^ A^ \derandthedbow J S JeX) or i- > "TT ^ "T^C^beX) nr "J ( A sepulchre, a place for bu- 1 , , ^ ' f "" or burning the dead, j v ^ O r or O r OF SUBSTANTIVES. 55 Nom. Sing. Inftex- Sing. Norn. Plu. SThe mater in which rice has") been washed, grown sour andt-^r ^ ^, So^lS^iJ&ex) O r boiled, vinegar ........... 3 The kg of a bed-stead- ---- &3 r2&*x> or A rope ...... .......... reFM&3 IT 5 ,c&ex> or on salt or barren! \ground, fuller's earth ...... j tree .......... IT'&S ~&* or * A nest ........... %?>& X&*btyo or { A Country, or district ; general assembly : it also (^ means a day, or time . . . .j {Rising ground unfit for the~\ estivation of g rain,in w hick { ^g -&*&>&> or 5 tobacco ana other plants of [ same kind are grown. . . J yard ........ "lo^^S -^^^bex> O r Pasture land. ........... t)i3 l)afcex or \ 5 j* A town* ' v . ojw oJoSoex) or Most of the following nouns have the singular inflexion the same as the no- 192 minative singular, or form it by changing the last syllable of the nominative singular into 3 ; some however form the inflexion singular very irregularly. The nominative plural is formed either in the regular manner, by adding X> to the nominative singular, or by changing the last syllable of the nominative singular into $ or & Nom. Sing. Inflex. Sing. Nom. Plu. Aspindle &&>&> or The nail or claw ^5b or /^ Water &Sb or Blood A hare. The forehead .................. ex> or Tfte beginning .................. 15do<5ex> or "Sooc543 -13oo>ex>ex> Atortoise .................... ..U^ex) or ^4 wiorter ......................... 6^ex> O r S^^S - 5^ex>ex) or Hunger, appetite ................ C?TD or 5jpzZe A sickle... Apandal, or shed ........... ..SSoftO or 3o&&3 . SSoaex>ex) or f Boiled rice mixed with milk,~} I wrf seasoned with sugar and : ^ other articlesjhat give a high ' ^ oX?) r^asA : this word is derived '. \from the verb o^o^b to \ \_ejfgrvesce ............... . ........ j j^ n ^^ummt for digging, ) ^^ _ (somewhat. like a short hoe... ) > o o An axe... , ^^D or ^^c$S.^^ex>ex) O r CAO C/i C* 5^t ?row '1***"** which l-? ica^e* are toasted'. .............. C , ^pZace ........................... TS^4,X) or ^^3 . ^60003 or C Apiece of wood, placed upon~} j ' Ae shoulder for carrying a . -5^3 & or -^>^^3 . -^^JgbeX) or . ) burden, like that used by milk- > \jnaids in England. .............. j A pair, a pair of shoes .......... "^2& or "^3 "S"^ex> or f Bran, the substance on rice "\ J below the husk, the husk is >tfq)5b or [called &&> .................. ) Fruit .............................. Soo<3& O r S5o. ceX) or o or t> or sore-.... ...... , M .......^)o^ or ^)o^3- )0&oe.x-q$;)os& or OF SUBSTANTIVES. Nom. Sing- Inflex. Sing. Norn. Flu. The body 2oO or 2oo3 2og3ex> A village && or ^Q &>5bex> or Thread.... &r>&> or ^4 humped back ... &*.& or 4 field producing grain ~&<& or J free, worf S5cn>;& or sr->e or The body ~&>?5b'or ~^> ~^-'&>ex> ^4 ?zame, an appellation ^Sb or "ij9c^3 ~"!j<5bex> or A share... ^n>0 or ^r^c^S ^rex>ex) or daughter STC^:) or S^c ^8 - ^c^oSbex) or The following nouns change the last syllable of the nominative singular 193 into o&3 to form the inflexion singular, and into oScex), oroW or ooto form the nominative plural : some of them also form the nominative plural in the regular manner, by adding ex> to the nominative singular. Nom. Stay. In/lex. Sing. Norn. Plu. ^ A house ^o&3 ^x> or A female's breast TSToiS x3'r5b>ex) O r Sand 35bo3 The sky, the atmosphere Soo&3 The nouns noted below change the last syllable of the nominative singular 194 into 8 in the inflexion singular, and into &>e in the nominative plural ; and those which end in ox>, with a short vowel preceding it, lengthen that vowel QMS does not admit of any such change : it is a plural uouu trf the 3d declension. 3 58 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR, both in the inflexion singular and nominative plural, -5-00000 stone makes in the nominative plural "^ex> or ~G*&>. Norn. Sing. Inflex* Sing. Norn. Plu. C Any thing on which ar- "Z5~ooo -J tificers place their ivork (^ an anvil, c. 75"ooo A stone ............... ~5"& "troo O r -53-0030 The mouth A hole in the ground, a pit Thehand ....... A small well ...... , o Ghee 195 The following nouns in fe^xo change that syllable into _ef to form the in- flexion singular ; they form the nominative plural either in the regular manner, by adding ex> to the nominative singular^ or by changing the last syllable of the nominative singular into &*>. *v> Norn- Sing*. Inflex. Sing. Norn. Plu< The neck.. ,.5e e5>ft^>ew O r ee o ee or e T y4n z'rojz or wooden spikc~\ J on which criminals were L ^_^ ^gjp 1 ^ or (, impaled ............... J ^ soz^'wo machine ....... K* eB ^twex) or ^ o g(9 Elevated ground ......... Sto J^ 196 The nouns noted below form the inflexion singular in > or &3, and the nominative plural either in ex>ex) or ^ : some of them want the nominative. s- . Sing* Inflex. Sing. Nom. Plu. The left side ......... "^SoO or The inside ...... ........ er^O or That side.. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 //?:. Sm#. iYom. Pto. The further side The right side ........................... S5e;SoD or This side ...... The nearer side X) Thefinger ............ . The singular inflexions, and the nominative, plural, of the following nouns 197 denoting time, are formed very irregularly. Nom. Sing. Inflex. Sing. Norn. plu. (Every day, ever. (^ which . ? fy c^b corrupted from "Sr>(2^b a day} Ayear ....... , Last year...- 1 > ) That time,then This time, now Which time, when ................ t Time... ' Day-time, noon Yesterday ........... . The day before yesterday ...... . Night, evening *A") .. C mornng Time, in Former -times. Time, in composition only ; as, zf&v $ in3 hours time* t when the noun sfc2& affixes the postposition ?5, thus ^J^)??, it means in the morning 60 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 398 "ex> when it denotes the liquor extracted from the Cocoanut, Palmyra, or Date tree, is a regular noun of the 3d. declension ; but when it denotes a stone,ii becomes in the sing, inflex. ^o&3 , and in the nom. plu. SoflSo* 199 the measure of a fathom, a fathom's length, and the inflexion singular "23~~C&3. 200 Most of the irregular llsf^sScx) nouns, which have the inflexion different from the nominative singular, by changing the final vowel of that inflexion into *% form, in a manner peculiar to themselves, an inflected local or instru- mental ablative ; they have also the regular form by the addition of the post- positions er* - T&# &c. thus, inflexion S'o&S the eye, inflected ablative S'ok), regular ablative S'o^-er^. -to^ &c. in or ly, the eye ; and many of these iflected ablatives are used as adverbs or postpositions ; thus from the inflexion ]J3 $ comes |^k> in a plain or outside; from lto>>63, ~5ook> in the begin- ning, or at, first, from er^sSD, cr^Soo in the inside, or inside. 201 The student will find it of great advantage to commit to memory the follow- ing list of nouns, denoting the several degrees of consanguinity and affinity, peculiar to the people of Telingana. .. ............ a father ............... \astep mother i^i a father's elder brother- his wife ....... ......... ~^Jf also a mother's elder sister. i^ i a father's younger brother his wife ........ ........ i)o5"ef also a mother's young sister. a grand father ........ a grand mother father in law ....... a mother in law a mother's brother ...... his w(fe also a father's sister. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 61 V3 < f the son of a mother's brother, or of a father's ") [ sister, a marts brother in law .... \'" Z ^ 00 x '} a -o a a -3 18 r a , a -a - a woman's brother in law =r oa * n { $ I the daughter f another's brother, or of a father's sister. | | }, I "1 ^ I * L ^ .-^-J g 1$ also denotes the elder sister of a wife, or husband, or an elder brother's wife. 55befCJiex) also denotes the younger sister of a wife or husband, or a younger brother's wife. an elder brother an elder sister ^fr -^ ^a younger brother a younger sister " . ~lo> to&o a husband .a wife '< a child a son a daughter *...cn>Ce&5b a grandson a grand daughter . a son in law a daughter in laiv s> 5l> ex) /Me sow /"a waw's j #Ae daughter of a man's 1 J 5^er or of a wo- j s/sfe? % or o/ a woman's > (^wzaw's brother ..... \ brother ....... . ............ ) the wives of the same husband to each other. X) the wives of tivo brothers to each other, joint daughters-in-law. the husbands of two sisters to each other. ex> mothers in law to each other. fathers in law to each other, All the words in the above list preceding ~W& a* grand father, and a grandmother, and following eSsSo^cSo a younger brother, and "^ younger sister, together with the words 35bca . sfc 202 a and . ; though expressing degrees of relatipnship, are never used in TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. addressing the person to whom they refer ; in speaking to such relations, the males are called ^dSotf . ejS^cSc - $_ - ^fco, and the females or O c 203 A native never addresses his wife by name, nor by the term denoting the degree of her affinity to him : but, in speaking to her, makes used of cu o^> and other words, equivalent to our phrases " 1 say, Hear you/' &c. It is considered a great indelicacy, approaching almost to indecency, even to mention the name of one's wife or husband to any person. 204 Such nouns in the foregoing list, denoting females, as have the nominative singular in ^o, form the singular inflexion by changing that termination to ), and the nom. plu. by changing it to o^ or Oyufc^. OF NOUNS TERMED &8>\>V>3$b:)>ex> the inferior. The o5br>8o<>x> or superior class includes nouns of the masculine gender, and the 5>5SbtiS-e&e>3 or inferior class comprises those of the feminine, arid neuter gender, as defined in rule 14 J. 207 The Sanscrit derivative is formed from the crude Sanscrit noun, and crude nouns, in the S anscrit language, generally terminate in the vowels v * s 5 ^ e) or m tne consonants -S"2Tef~<"(^"?"fr^~So5 IT 208 If the crude Sanscrit noun becomes a nominative singular in Teloogoo by affixing the termination C^b, it is declined like the nouns of the first regular ~'S& declension. If, in order to form the nominative singular, it assumes the Teloogoo affix S&x>, jj follows the rules for the second regular ~zS3fC35ba declension ; and if it is modified in any other manner,'or is not changed at all, it 11 The rules respecting Sanscrit derivatives and corruptions apply to adjectives, as well as to substantives, borrowed from that language. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 63 is declined like the nouns of the third regular iS^TCsSbo declension. It will suffice, therefore, to shew how the nominative singular in Teloogoo is formed from the crude Sanscrit noun ; for, when that is known, this general rule will guide the student in declining it. OF CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS ENDING IN VOWEL9. 1st OF THOSE IN ^ Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in short v form the nominative singular, 209 in Teloogoo, by changing that termination into ^c e&>ex> or superior class, The God Rama makes the nom. sing, in Teloogoo & the sun literally light-maker do 3" the f moon literally snow-rayed do & Sec. are declined precisely in the same manner as ^sSco^CuSb Sec. see rule 164 ; and, as all Sanscrit derivatives ending in 0*0 nave tne vowel N> preceding c2gb of the nominative singular, every noun of this description takes the two forms explained in rule 165. thus, also in the C93&r o j&ex> inferior class. a garden, a forest makes the nom. sing, in Teloogoo a mountain do do a dwelling do.. . do an elephant do do sin.. do do a lotus do- do &e. are declined exactly in the same manner as . see rule 1 72. EXCEPTIONS. The noun %H\&> a friend, together with words used in composition to 210 i ) -/ w imply eminence, as coo,,^ a lion * T *SrP*; a tiger &c. are considered included t The sun and moon are included in the oSboJ^e^beX) or superior class, because they are t;onsiiiered, or ai least personified, by the Hindoos, &s male divinities. 64 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. both in the superior and the inferior classes. Thus, we msy say either or &>\&j Z$x> af fiend, ^)5b5$v^>o^=^ O r ^Sbsl&otfrwiJfc a man-lion, a noble person, <)&>5x-rog^>^ S$x> or "<^5b&~^Cy^x>oycb a man-tiger, a fierce person. 211 The noun 5S# offspring makes WSSe^sSbo, never WSSSbec&b, and the word atfra denoting, either a house, or a protector, refuge &c- when it has the latter meaning, takes in Teloogoo three forms, $ tfrsSJco or $> &FW or'S'^rax 2&; but, when it means a house, it has the first form only. 212 The nouns c*5crcc an experienced person, and &n>e a messenger, a spy, included in the or3)OO O r superior class, together with all nouns of the female gender, and the words ^^ a kind of holy grass, usually named durbjia, a woman's garment, rOfO a sivan, se> the Indian nightingale, -XQ& or 8j a history, $j*$$ delirium^ confusion, 9*per*>& desire, S^o^rs exaggeration, or enlargement, sooc ttw earthen pot, with some other nouns of the 9xOo&" D <3oex> or inferior class, do not affix the terminations mentioned in the above rules, but, remaining unchanged, are declined according to the rules for the third regular ^^ C^o declension. 2d OF THOSE IN 9 213 Crude Sanscrit nouns of all genders ending in short 9 , when brought into Teloo[oo, do not undergo any change ; and, therefore are all declined like S nouns in , of the 3d. declension. The God Vishnoo makes the nom. sing, in Teloogoo Sr8 Mind ,....do , ; ....>) or An enemy ............ do .......... 3 iSbior'^'iQb.qftor &c. follow the rules for the 1st. declension. Sec. and ^o5b &c. are declined like nouns of the 3d. declension. Thus, also, in the 9S5b^e&ex> or inferim' class. Me iorfy makes the nom. sing, in Teloogoo ei& or wme, honey. . ...... rfo ........ 35?$>D or a ray. ..... ...... do ......... fi9o3o O r t^a^r. ......... do ........ es'oax) or a co?/; .......... rfo. ....... "?&> or &c. and ^^3^) &c. follow the rules for the 3d declension. 4th OF THOSE IN ^ Crude Sanscrit nouns, ending in short ^, form the nominative iinguter in 215 Teloogoo by changing that termination into ^; thus, l.^/^) a brother S$Jn>f\ a mother &c. make {^J& and 5^r^ respectively, which are, of course, de- clined like nouns of the 3d declension. EXCEPTIONS. The nouns ~F& the Creator, #S>^ the sun, ~^^ a giver, and "3^ 216 a fearer, with a few others, admit of another form, by affixing c ^ ; thus, we may say either St^^c^b or S^S"- the Creator &c. 5th OF THOSE IN ^^ AND *. The crude Sanscrit noun ^_ wwvy ending in ^_ makes the nom. sing, in [Teloogoo <^> a cow ....... cv^ . .' ... do ...... X*& a ship ...... * ..... do- . ~sr*$ or ~&*& the moon has no change, the Teloogoo norn. sing. ' * - [being also p do ....... K* 66 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. No other crude Sanscrit nouns ending in 3_ or """ are ever found in Te- loogoo works. It is, therefore, unnecessary to lay down any rules respecting them. 6th OF THOSE ENDING IN LONG VOWELS. 217 Except monosyllables, all crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the long vowels 5 or vr^ w hen adopted into Teloogoo, change these long terminations into the corresponding short vowels, * * and \> All nouns ending in long vowels, thus converted to short vowels, are consi dered as originally terminating in these short vowels ; and, accordingly,form the nominative singular in Teloogoo, agreeably to the rules already given for crude Sanscrit nouns ending in short ^ 9 or o respectively. EXAMPLES. The protector of the world, being changed into S^ 5 , makes the [nom. sing, in Teloogoo S>3f$)cfe 8ee 209. , being changed ) Z^c&>'$> or do 8 do sgo^cSb se e 4. ( the wife of Vishnoo, being feminine, \ ( is merely shortened into ......... ) Suruswuttee ...... 1 , j _,_ . _cj >do . . do-- -rrefvS 866 213. the goddess of learning, j f a woman, makes the nom. ^ <>r^\ ' or SdSo*) see 214. . 1 ^^ . . . >..... ,so I sing, m Teloogoo either, f 21 8 . cS^ the earth, \3^~*j an eye brow,._g a woman &c. being monosyllables, never shorten the last vowel ; when adopted into Teloogoo, they remain the same as in Sanscrit, and are declined like the nouns of the 3d. regular o3fcs5i declension. OF CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 210 Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the consonants ^ ~ 5" ^" ^T $ f\ and Sr form the nominative singular, in Teloogoo, either by changing -o and ^~ to 3&_ - ^ and 5" to ^ - 2?" to $> - f" and 5? to Ij 3 or ^_ - and Ix to * for all genders-or, if masculine, by affixing "o 03^, an( j if neuter, by adding ""s&tt. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 67 EXAMPLES. Masculine or feminine. Masculine. i)3S^5&>T5~ makes ^)Sx^3&>& or fl)Sv^s$M-i&c<3Sb one w j to strews flowers. S?SS IT . . . .do . . lo?$)& .... or ~co2$)o&>C'2Sb . . . one skilled in the vedas. do . . -0#?f&So^> or ^PD&Sf^ospoC'Scone who protects the cor- [ners of the world. do &&$^lfo_ or ^tf#3^6cb one who touches ghee. do ..... 3| ...... or <&ctfa5$j3C&> a-n erceroy of *A Sooras, [or angels ; a gaint. Zr do ..... 93Siy)#Okx> ... O r ^S&^^^SS-ooC^bone^o/eerfson nectar or ambrosia, an immortal person. Neuter. do tf^6_ ....... or S^iS'^bo ..... skin, leather, bark. do ... ^3 i& ...... or M^ i 3$3o ..... wreath. .. do ... a$8&e$o ...... or )83&.J5oSx> . a society, an assembly. ...do ... S'&So^ .......... or g'&sfcSoo ..... a corner of the world. do . . .y; ^J) ---- or \^^.^> . the rainy season. do. . .55b$b0^ w . . . or & c . follow the rules for the 1st. declension. &c. are declined like the nouns of the 3d. declension. EXCEPTIONS. speech, a word, makes ^ r '>^_, but not "^tfsSM. 220 c ortune, and W3<5~ adversity, make ^o53^ and ^^J or ^ and ~ calamity makes only 2) So ^>. 9 ....... do ..... The nouns ^RO ^" appetite, &c. ^*^i$" a sacrificial stick, make either and ^S^ or '$&>% and ^^^ - T rore makes 68 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. I" "a an eye, &&SL or &y kw anc j S}C,&. 00 ep . &>Z&~ lightning, 5$b5bJ~ wind, X&& a feather, &c. make 2DcOcM - )&>g_g> . 5S^5b^ . X5b> which are, of course, declined according to the rules for the 3rd. declension. 4 EXCEPTIONS. 222 The nouns ^XSS'cS the Deity, and o5"r&5&~cS Ifunooman, have respectively the following irregular forms. C&> or or a king ..... ............. do f when denoting Brumha, one of the ~-l attributes of the divinity, personified in J- do ... \v*}'& l,the Indian Trinity, becomes ......... J ' when denoting the supreme being himself, becomes either or OF SUBSTANTIVES. 69 Nouns ending in 3&I~ have also an irregular form. EXAMPLE- or o are rarely adopted into the 224 lightness, smallness, makes Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in IT Teloogoo. Crude Sanscrit nouns terminating with S" form the nominative singular in 225 Teloogoo, either by affixing <&> or ^ ; or, after dropping the final consonant, by following the rules for crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the particular vowel with which they terminate. Masculine nouns in ^ T admit of a fourth form, by assuming ^oCi^b without dropping the final 5 . Masculine. EXAMPLES. makes in Teloogoo if a? 5 c&> or r ~ & c &b anchorite. Feminine. do. do. . or O r Nettfer. .... do. .. . . do- . do. . . . . do. . . .... do. . . . . do. . . . . . . do. . . . do. . . do- ... ... do. ... do.... ... do.... ' do. ... ... do.... do. ... ... do.... fr;. .... do. . ..do.... [a female resplendent as gold. the mind* the breast. the breast. penance. darkness. eriod of life. EXCEPTIONS. s3r.S)p> a sacrificial fire-offering, 226 a giant, o the mind, 5Sb^-^ /u^re, tf5~ a /a/te, 650^-^ n, water, o$V- water, ^5A'^ transgression, and a few others, affix onl the sllable & as- 3o&o - e>3fcio & c . 70 TELOOOOO GRAMMAR. When ihe noun ^cSfcfT signifies a bird it makes SScS&tty, but when it signifies the total period of life, or youth, or age, &c it makes either, S$<3&&> or tf cOo&y - e;S)tf " a nymph, makes ^>%)S3, or ^jtfioo) ; ~^#S~, the Creator, Brumha, makes ^#. OF NOUNS TERMED $>\S^5$X>eW QR CORRUPTIONS OF THE SANSCRIT- *r 227 Besides the regular Sanscrit derivatives, there is in Teloogoo a class of worda named &&\&x>?x> t or corruptions of the Sanscrit. These are formed from the crude Sanscrit noun by the substitution of one letter for another; by the elision, the insertion, or addition of letters ; by subverting the order of the letters, or by doubling some of them. After these changes in the original letters of the crude Sanscrit noun, some of the Sanscrit corruptions affix Teloogoo termi- nations, in the same manner as the Sanscrit derivatives, and others take no affixes. In either case, the rules already given for the declension of the ~ C3$ nouns apply equally to the >\5sS. It will, therefore, be sufficient to submit a few explanations respecting the manner in which the nominative singular is formed from the crude Sanscrit noun ; at the same time, these, from the nature of the subject, must be necessarily very undeterminate. OF THE CORRUPTION OF THE VOWELS IN CRUDE, SANSCRIT NOUNS. 228 If the first syllable, in the original crude noun terminate in the vowels 9 or N>, these vowels are often, in Teloogoo, changed to "*' or cv *. thus ; &T a quarter of the world, makes ~3S . JDS' 600 a pungent taste, makes "SX^oo . &> SStf an astringent taste, makes &*$. 229 If the first syllable in the original crude noun end with "S or these ^ letters are respectively changed to ~" and EXAMPLES. SCfS? ............... sorrow ............... makes $> ............. -...pain ...... ............ do ................. ~ expenditure ..... . ...do ................. liberality ............. do ................ .justice, propriety... .do ......... *... . . ........... do ............... OF SUBSTANTIVES. 71 The same rule applies to * C or og terminating a syllable in the middle or 230 end of the original crude noun, provided the preceding syllable be short ; in this case, however, the consonant preceding *" or -< is doubled ; thus. ...... learning, art ........................ makes ...... 'C ...... ayoung girl ........ * .. .......... do S ...difference ............................. do v terminating the first syllable in the original crude noun, are 231 changed to ^ or v*; thus, fever .............................. makes the sound of the voice, a note ............. do a sound ........................ . ..... do .S f ^e 12/A day of the increase or decrease of the moon do. . . &% The vowel ^ in the original crude noun is sometimes changed to ? , "*, 232 . or 8 ; thus, . beauty .......................... makes a beast ........................ do .Thursday .......... ......... do ...... a star ......................... do ......... 8^ THE CORRUPTION OF CONSONANTS IN CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS. The consonants $ , o y are often changed to ^" ; thus, 233 .......... theplanet Venus ............. .makes ^ ....... sugar ......................... do .......... a plate made of bell metal .......... do ......... The consonants -S" , 1^, and S, in the original Sanscrit, are frequently 234 changed in Teloogoo to 5" ; as, > a cash (the coin so named) '. ........ makes an elephant hook .................. do danger, deceit ....................... do ..language.,, . . . ............ '...do 72 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 235 *&~ is somtimes changed to 5" ; as, the day omchich the moon is full.. .makes ...... q disposition, quality .......... . ..... do . ... . 236 cSo, at the commencement of nouns, is frequently changed, in Teloogoo, 'to """ as , as, cSSo55b ... ... Yama, the God of death * ........... makes ...... cScr$5d ..... fAree English hours ................ do ....... 237 S preceded by another syllable, is changed in Teloogoo to "?^Nor |_ ; thus. 5<&. ......... a serfe ..................... makes ...... 5 ?f lac ......................... do ....... _ a /efter or charactor .......... do ....... -Sf>-?f do . .... . rule, definition ................. do .. 238 "tj. preceded by the vowel ^, is. generally changed to ^^ ; and preceded by , to 5 ; thus, cCo K ......... a sacrifice .................. makes ...... a?5^3&o .... the sacerdotal thread .......... do ....... a command, order, or adjuration. . .do ._o command, permission ............ do ...... but it is sometimes changed to 89 ; thus, 15^ ^ a Queen, makes a^- 239 &" is changed in X. . ...... ... makes ....... a crane. ...... ..... . ...... do 240 The consonants of each vurga are interchangeable. EXAMPLES. a face ................ makes . . colour ................ . . do a seat ...... .... ........ do ............ a J7iwdc>o Aowr ......... .do ............ a forest ................ do . ........... a history, a story. . . ...... do ........ .... the mind ................ do a line^ . - .......... do beetle nut . . do, , OF SUBSTANTIVES. 73 The consonants 5 ^J~ fx ^ or So, when connected wilh other consonants 241 without the intervention of a vowel, are generally dropped, and the consonant with which they may be connected is sometimes doubled ; thus, \o$ otf:ro3 ...... a journey .............. . .......... makes . ...a mark ......................... do f\ & ............. .a cow-house ........................ do ej ....... ........ fire ................................. do ....... ...... .......... a piece of money ..... . ............ do ......... '* Some of the changes among the ^^\ &x> nouns are so little obvious, that 242 the reader may occasionally be inclined to doubt the existence of any connexion between the adulterated word and that stated to be it's original. Great deference, however, is due by a foreigner to the concurrent testimoney of native authors . on this head ; and when it is considered that most of the &\S5s$3o words have, in all probability, passed into Teioogoo, through the medium of the Pracrit, or other corrupt dialects of the Sanscrit, and have been naturalized in it for ages, the little resemblance now to be found between some of the original words, and their corruptions, ought not, alone, to invalidate the established etyTnologies of successive Grammarians. OF NOUNS TERMED W^g 65^'S^O OR FOREIGN. In treating of the declension of the ^^iSSfCSSco - &^bs&o an d <>\ 243 55"s$x> nouns, the peculiarities of the (^v^sC35bo O r common dialect, have been duly pointed out. It remains, therefore, only to offer a few observations res- pecting foreign nouns. The great facility with which the Teioogoo adopts arid naturalizes foreign terms, must already have attracted the notice of the Student. The intercourse of the people of Telingana with the neighbouring provinces, has led to the in- troduction of a few terms from the Orissa, the Mahratta, the Guzerat, the Canarese or Carnataca, and the Dravida or Tamil : but, except from the Tamil and Canarese, with which the Teioogoo is radically connected, it has not bor- rowed extensively from any of these languagps. Since the Mahomnicdan con- 10 i- TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. quest of the Deccan, numerous technical revenue terms, and words connected with official business, derived from the Arabic, Persian, or Hindee, have been introduced into Teloogoo, through the medium of the Hindoostanee; but the use of many such words begins now to be superseded by that of correspond- ing English terms. 244 Nouns of foreign derivation are subject to the same rules as the nouns of the third declension ; thus, the Hindoostanee words. s'ax>3b news. (OoJ->oo a question. | , ... a treasury. ^^ an answer. a country, a district- arrangement, settlement. " ^ ^ a number. - ... a visit. a disturbance, an intrigue. 2 . ..... trouble, annoyance. Co .... the chief town in a district. J-C& ( a carriage of any kind, a ' ' \ palankeen fyc. c a petition and the English words. ink. a pen. or language of the land. 247 There are no relative pronouns in Teloogoo: the idiom of the language renders the use of them superfluous ; as will be fully explained hereafter. The substantive pronouns have two numbers ; the singular, and the plural. 248 The speaker, and the person addressed, being present, their sex is supposed to.be obvious: the distinction of gender is therefore confined to the pronouns of , OP SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. the third person, in treating of which, we shall explain the peculiar manner in which it is marked. The substantive pronouns, like the substantive nouns, may be said to have 249 properly only three cases ; viz. the nominative, the inflexion, and the accu- sative ; but they are here declined according to the arrangement adopted in the declension of the nouns. The vocative case is wanting in all the Teloogoo pronouns. The genitive or possessive case, without "c5fco^_,is likewise the inflexion, 250 which, with the addition of the postpositions, forms the different compound , cases. The inflexions of the pronouns are of course included in the class termed "sfeA) kululoo, while the accusative cases belong to the (&> \ S$\&j^^&>vddroo~ tuprukrmtoolco ; but, in addition to this general distinction, it will be observed, that the pronouns of the two first persons have the inflexion entirely different from the accusative. THE PRONOUN OF THE FIRST PERSON. 251 N G D Ace. . Singular. .of me to me or me Plural. We ........... of us J S5cn>o .............................. to us or us n us. Ab "ST" -er* . --co .&* i n e . me Men of rank, speaking of themselves, generally use the plural ~&>S&o We, 252 for the singular ~j;& / : indeed, arrogance often induces inferior natives to apply the plural to themselves ; but this is understood to be very improper when they address a superior. The Ratsawars and Velrnawars in the Northern Circars, a bold warlike race of men, scarcely ever deign to speak of themselves in the singular number ; even to a Bramin, their acknowledged superior in cast. In the superior dialect, <*><& and oi^bo are sometimes used for &> and Singular. N . . D-. . feSo Ace. . .>&> or THE PRONOUX OF THE SECOND PERSON. Plural. if*. -_ VL . . thou . . of thee . >to thee . . thee -in Sec. thee 253 254 you - &j-cs&>=5' of you or 4 to you . you * in you 76 TBLOOOOO ft U AM MAR. 255 Although both the singular and plural inflexions of this pronoun end in s , they take, in the dative cases, & instead of i, in opposition to the general rules 132 - 146 & 153. 256 Addressing inferiors, or conversing familiarly with equals, >q) thou, the nominative singular of this pronoun, may be used ; but, when we speak to superiors, or even to equals or inferiors, with any degree of kindness or respect, the plual S>r5b you, is the only proper term of address. To be called &q) thou, bj a person decidedly his inferior, is an insult not be borne by the most meek Hindoo, he will resent it as studied disrespect, couched in the most bitter terms of reproach. 257 When much deference is paid to men of superior ago, rank, or learning, the speaker uses the words IT'S&o or &o&5b they, ~&sS$-zr>& or "^"^ SXs Lord, "Which correspond with the English phrases, Sir, My Lord &c. &c. 258 In the superior dialect "&>$) and -&>5b are sometimes used for&q) and^ 5 ^^)- 259 The pronouns of the first and second persons have their respective plural . numbers, 5kS5x> and SXr&>, as given above, corresponding precisely with our words we and you* But the first of these two pronouns in Teloogoo has likewise another plural, applying to both persons jointly, which, from the want of a corresponding term in English, we are obliged also to translate we. This plural is declined as follows. N Sfotfaoo we G sfotf ,. 5&>csko' of us D SfctfSo to us Ace. 5Sbr^e> or 3fo#35boe> ?/.&x> we: iSoSSbo is the plural of the first person only, it refers exclusively to those who speak ; but o&f5&> i s a plural, used by the first person, but applying to the first and second persons conjointly ; it refers exclusively to neither, but includes both those who speak and those who are addressed, each of whom may be either one, or more persons. For example, if two gentlemen, meeting several OF SriJSTANTlVK PKONOl'NS. I < Bramins, were to enquire who they were, they would not use the joint plural of the first and second persons and answer o$3cS$x>i^j'o3~ c ea3O5x we (who speak and are addressed) are Bramins; for, in that case, they would be under- stood to affirm that the gentlemen also were Bramins. Using the plural of the first person, they would say ~&>S&> 13" .^S^DO^X) we (who speak) are Bra- tnins- THE PRONOUNS OF THK THIRD PERSON. The Teloogoo pronouns of the third person may be divided into two classes; 260 the definite, and the indefinite; the first referring to one or more particular de- fined objects, and the second referring to a number or collection of objects less defined. The first class consists of the demonstratives, and of the interrogative pronoun derived from them. The second class comprizes the collectives, and their interrogative. The distinction of gender is confined to the pronouns of this person, and the 261 mode in which it is defined in the singular number, is different from the mode in which it is marked in the plural. In the singular, the masculine gender is distinct from the feminine and neuter, which are both represented by the same word. In the plural, the masculine and the feminine are the same, and the neu- ter is distinct from both. It is of importance that this peculiarity should be strongly impressed on the memory of the Student, for it will be found to pervade the verbs and adjectives, and materially to affect the construction of the language. DEFINITE PRONOUNS. 262 DEMONSTRATIVE PROXIMATE. Singular. M. F. If N, N. )cob ...>& he, she and it, this. G. & or oD^csko^T _ G$& or oPcsfoolT , t jpf him, her and it, this. D. >>...., &fS , a$ ^ Wj herandit, this. Ab. -> ^^ - 'S3' - p. .0$ . . er*. TS^-tS" . in tyc. him, her and it., this. j 8 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR, Plural. M. & F. N. N. &5o .................. q ........................ they, these. G. &8 or fc8Soor_ . ...i^S or &3iaxir_ ..... o/^Aew, these. D. Ace. Ab. 8- -er - - . . .6. - - - **. . .in ^a and ^^ are vulgarly Avritten o^S and QX, jj. O^O DEMONSTRATIVE REMOTE. Singular. M. F 5r N. N. *rcafo .................. a ......... . .Ae, she and it, that. G. -sr? - -snS)^oSl_ . . . TS^ --^^^ooj_ . . . O fhim, her and it, that. D. -SJ^^I ..................... -25*^3 ............... .. .to him, her and it, that. Ace. "sr ^ ..................... 7?T> ^ .................. him, her and it, that. Ab. -sr^. .er 6 - ^#- ^..TS* ^..er 6 .^^.^ t - n <. Awn, Aer & if, jtf. 4- F. N. N. -s^Sb ..................... & ................ they, those. G. ~^8 - T^8"^>o I' ...-5P> 63 --5T" iS ^o?f_ .o/* ^Ae D. "sr8 .................. "sy^Si ............. to them, those. Ace. TT8^ ................. ^n'^SfD ............ them, those. Ab. -sr8..er- T&&.S*. . thS M C^. < 4Jr.iS ft m -c. them, those. 264 It will be observed that the change of ^ ee to a and of <9 z to & u, in the first syllable of these pronouns, is the only difference between them. 265 Besides the plurals >& and "wSb, these two pronouns, like some of the regular !33fC3& nouns*, occasionally take irregular plurals ; thus, >5b often o becomes ^ C( ^ or bc\&>i and "^r5b is changed into "5^c<^> or "S^c ^^. In this case, they make the inflexion plural >C< or &C i^, and "S 3 ^ ^ or and the accusative plural,^ c^ixO O r CCiY^, and" 5 ^^^ 3 or rc 9 OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. In the common dialect, the accusatives )> and ~ZT*& are respectively written 266 The singular numbers of the foregoing demonstrative pronouns, and their 267 irregular plurals, are never used, except when inferiors or equals are spoken of: when persons of very high rank are the subject of conversation, the plurals s^>5b and Sa>, are used to express the English words he or she. Bat if the speaker alludes to a person only in a trifling degree respected by him, instead of the pronoun 3G2&", he uses ^<&c<&b to denote a male, and -&>C)3 or -^."^ to denote a female ; and instead of the pronoun ~^c &b . tfJ^cSD for the mascu- line, and tsOSi or ^"^ for the feminine gender ; or if he alludes to a person considerably superior to him, yet not of very high rank, instead of )C<3b he uses denote a male, and "Y^^to denote a female, and instead of "rcb, for the masculine, and ^S~5o for the feminine gender. These pronouns have no plural number, SJ^C^band 9f cb are declined like nouns of the firs.t declension ; thus. N ............ Wtfcgb ............. . .......... / ie . G ...9#S- ef>&^DO*f . ..of him. TJ" D ............ ef><3' <0 ........................ to him. Ace ......... *3& ........................... him. Ab ......... ^^^...er^ - 1$&- cT 9 ...... in &c. him. - &$) - -&"!>> and -^"Sa and e5dSocS are declined like nouns of the third declension ; thus, . N .......... 3o3otf .................. he. G ---- ---- 5d5o?5 . ef dCo^^oo^ . . . of him. and . ........ him. 5 - ly# - (5^ *in |-c. him. Instead of >&3 and TT43, in the neuter plural of the demonstrative pronouns, 268 we sometimes find & and ^ used in bcoks. g(J TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 1NTERROGATJVK. Singular. M. G. I). Ace. Ab. N. G. wh')? which.? of whom 9 which ? C !0 whom ? which ? ...in frc. whom ? which? M. S F. Plural. N. '..who? which? ..... of whom ? which ? to whom? which? whom? which? Ace. 58$ Ab. ^S^9.. e -^ 269 Instead of <&&, the word ^3S^ which follows the rules for the first de- clension, is often used, in the singular, to denote a female. 270 The initial <^ & <^ of the interrogative pronoun is constantly converted, in the common dialect, into 3 & o^ 3 ". 271 In the common dialect, ><3> - -F>%> and c*5oS5\ <& are used, in the singular number of the definite pronouns, instead of & 7T and *ti$\pi except in the accusative, which is made to terminate in P^ instead of ^. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 272 ' As the pronouns of this class refer to a number of objects, they have no singular, but are all of the plural number. COLLECTIVES. M. Sf F. N. N. ^oSeso ........................ ^<0^ ............... so many. G. ^oe . ^o&fcB 3cx>_?f ..Sp^OS . q$.C&'Sx>g_ ... of po many. D. ^oSeBi .......... /. ........ --.^^^5^^ ......... to so many' Ace. S?oeB$ ................. . ...... S?^C^ ......... 50 w W y. Ab. 2?oSe,.oe3 ........... ............... o&^ca ....................... to off. Ace. e>oel ...................... ..^c3 ....................... a//. Ab. Af. * F. ^- . N. ^o&&*> ...................... "."8^.....; .................... a few. G. ^oe3. . r > o^e3^x)' r _ M r > ^c^..r ) ^ci3cSx)^l ofafeio. D. ^025631 ..... ................... Ace. Ab. r^o^^er 6 - -^^ - ^....r^c^S .. er- ^^ . ^ , ^ a few* INTEBEOO1TIVE. M. <^ F. N. N. ^o2SftX3 ........... .. .............. cOSK ........................... hoiotnany? G. ^o2SeS..e<. ......................... tco ...................... ^o w many ? Ab. <^o^e3 .. er* . ^^ . ^ .. . . $&j L C*3er*-l5tf-$'*. . in & AOMJ mawy ?. ^ The initial <>J of this pronoun is, in the common dialect, converted into c3o. 274 None of the foregoing pronouns of the third person can be used more than 275 once in a sentence, with reference to the same person or thing. If I say, ~^c<5& he, "ofr^oQ i , e^* with his father, S^-SV^'^'C^b has come, 1 should not be un- derstood to express that he (the third person) has come with his own father, but that he (the third person) has come with the father of a fourth. If I ask SX<&> Soooo^is^awiyc-a* did he go to his liouse ? I ask whether he (the third person) went to the house of another, not whether he went to his own house- 11 82 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 276 This peculiarity in the use of the pronouns of the third person, has given rise to the reflective pronoun IF'So, which is the same for all genders, and is always used with reference to some nominative of the third person preceding it. Singular. N '. er'jfc he, she, or it. G li#-lf#9blf:i of him, her, or it. D &?5o t j l i nii ^r, or it. Ace . &&* ortfffc^ him, her, or it. Ab ^....erS-ll^^.. i n fa. him, her, or it. Plural jq 1 15" e 5b or "ST*s5bo O r &S5bSo they. of them. to them. Ace... es$cor &>x>, them. Ab #35b....er* - "tf- S*.... i n S$c. them. we say ^c&5tf#o.^iT*>-S^-sr>c2& Ae cime with his (own) father. ?5oooo&3l c?T* ( ^ W "^T C C-UJ T) rfirf Ae ^o to /'. (oit'w) house? 277 The pronoun <&?*> commonly written oSoSo, what? is defective: its in- flexion is &Rto*>fy or >3, but it is seldom used, except in the nominative or dative case ; thus, nom. sing. iX>, what? dat. sing. oO&Sl, or <6So63, ^ or for what ? why ? 278 The words ^c^-efo^-^o^when standing alone, are not to be consi- dered pronouns, but adverbs, respectively denoting in this place, in that place, and in what place ? but when the postpositions & - er* - "^<& - $& - S'o'eb.^ and a few others, are affixed to them, they are indeclinable pronouns, res- pectively denoting this, that, what ? as ^o2&er* in this, &Q&'$& by that, what? wherefore.? ADJECTIVES. O p "Z^CS&O ADJECTIVES. The l#bo adjectives are indeclinable, varying neither in gender, in num- 279 her, nor in case ; but dependent for these distinctions upon the substantive nouns or pronouns, to some of which they are invariably prefixed. The fol- lowing list, containing a few of the most common, will shew that they gene- rally terminate in the short vowels or v>. -Xv ; cold. V'lS . i or* "So f qnff CS \^ soji. fb?^ little- G* ojfeo red. ^9o5So5bo .... ...beautiful' oJTO \ iipllmn oJ^bAo ^fl{//, /OTiy. SSi ^ *$ new. ^) v sweet- *sx>v) acted, old. S&o-S ,., good. 84 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 289 A number of $$ adjectives, ending in " and denoting qualities which are the peculiar objects of sight, taste, or touch, when prefixed to substantive nouns or pronouns, may, at pleasure, affix the particle '$.; thus, t$v black, ~S^ white, ^|g red, ^^ yellow, T^^> azure blue, ^C^A sweet, ^)^ sour, S?^ or ~^_^ soft, prefixed to substantives, either remain unchanged, or be- come #> - iSeJSO c. as "%> or HoiOw|o a white cloth, cSfcg or d&CSO SooSSb a sweet fruit, "^o ^ or 13oj >_) so/2 cotton. 281 To all ~e&3gs$x> adjectives, when prefixed to substantives, we may, at plea- sure, affix the particles ;-> cxwtf or ef>oook>3o&3 from the verb q) to become; but these affixes do not alter their meaning in any way whatever; thns, ~lo$ great, rT*^ Iar 9 e > ^.3> new > ^^ blind > ^^ short > 3&>w slack, &c. C^t *** O make "^-^ocootf or 1boc56x>o4SX)ew a or '^'^o^jSb^cO a great person, and so forth; these particles, however, cannot be added to the adjectives mentioned above as assuming <^, until that affix is first inserted; thus, we cannot say ^^^ but / ^ : it is at the same time to be remarked, that the addition of cootfdux^o^S to "^^g^ adjectives is, in general, neither neces- sary nor elegant. EXCEPTIONS- 282 The adjective ^^- handsome or fine, always affixes $> ; thus, we say -%& K)S5rS)oX a handsome person, not ~Z>& S&^oX. & empty, 5&o& good, and ^^ 5?na//, take no affixes whatever: thus, lJj ~?o an empty box, S&94w59(0x a good person, "^^J^^^ a small horse. 284 The adjective ^ (^ ;6.> f^tf or ow^iw^otS may be optionally added jthus,^^"^^ ^S^ix) or ^f^^oc^T^A^sSbo ^'^ paper : when it assumes the syllable 5$x>, it admits of another form, according to the following rule. 285 All iSS'QS&o adjectives ending in s&o, when prefixed to substantives, either affix ^KQ-^ocotf , or eocwtfSoosfo&S, or change the final 3$*, to 3) or OF ADJECTIVES. 85 thus, fc3o&3$x> beautiful, makes e5os5b/<6-t9o&3&ax>tf or or 1&n>3&>3 ............... leaky. lameness ............... oo3 ................. / am*3 .................. //w/I It is necessary to apprize the reader that many "wSfcsSM nouns are used 288 both as adjectives and substantives, in the same manner as a number of terms in our own language; thus, we say &&&$gf&&8fo& the damp is great, and #&av^ a j amp c i offl} the word $& jn Xeloogoo, and damp in English, being used, in these sentences, first as a substantive, and afterwards as an adjective noun : thus, also, we find that ^:&> means either bitter or bitterness, "3c^ tall or tallness, "S^ew^ broad or breadth, wCo) heavy or weight, &$) sweet or sweetness, Sec. but e>o;Sx> 6ea M fy O r beautiful, and other words in S$bo, which are used either as adjectives or substantives, may be .considered properly to belong to the Utter class of nouns; for it will be observed that, by rule 285, they cannot be used in the former sense, without adding certain affixes, which as substantives they never assume. 86 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. OF OOj35DoS ADJECTIVES. 289 The rules which have, been given for the derivation of substantive nouns from the Sanscrit, apply equally to the derivation of adjectives from that lan- guage : ft3^5S3xx> adjectives, therefore, in opposition to ""oS^* adjectives, admit of the distinctions of gender, number, and case- Sanscrit. Crude. Adjective. ........ .virtuous ........ skiUed Masculine- # C o Q" . ..independent ........ ^$C & Stf&o.CS. .. dependent ......... SS&eS'o, e&> JoicOb ....... rf^ar .............. i5o i excellent. ......... lofty, tall ....... ( Teloogoo. Feminine. Neuter. ,^ i.* ........ X> C & S5bo i3 i <). , V-.> .poor ............. >. ........ ...,, , .^ proper.. extensive dexterous.. .i 290 e^t^S$>^x) adjectives, when immediately prefixed to substantives, do not in . general admit of declension. They usually require the particles OF ADJECTIVES. 87 or &OM& 6oos5"o&3 to be affixed to the nominative singular, if the substantive be neuter; and if the substantive be masculine or feminine, either to the singu- lar or plural nominative, according as the substantive may be in the singular or plural number: feminine ^3&S&3 adjectives in v, before affixing these par- ticles, previously change the final ^into oiyex) in the singular, and ^Tfo or x3~5"ofl in the plural, from the word *ex3, denoting a female ; thus, or ox>o*& a handsome house or houses, handsome men, C .1 _ } a handsome z0oman,<&o&Ty*o^2 ; ooo?5 jo ex> or 8* OXJJ5", ro .^xD handsome women. ; thus, we may say #tf#) or 7^5^o^)^ewo or sSew&ew a melli- fluent expression or expressions (literally, words full of quintessence.) Sanscrit adjectives ending in the terminations o^el and v>cS , when adopted 292 into Teloogoo,change them,in the masculine gender toS5"o&cband3fc&x~ ^b; in the feminine, to S5oe&TT > ex> and 5fcoe^)"C~'cx ) or 55" and 5fo) ; and in the neuter gender, to S^otf o$x> and SSoo^sSix), or o?T) and 55b^o. EXAMPLES* Crude. Adjective. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. { r ...sensible ....... ax5as^oQbc^ < ^ 1 * / > C tf T . I f jectives, preceding #e^3&S&o substantives, often drop all their 293 Teloogoo terminations, and are compounded with the substantive in their un- inflected or crude state, according to the rules of Sanscrit grammar ; thus, 88 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. ).. ...wicked nnd.....~5^Jx(OCC<2& a gi an f ma j become [a wicked giant- ... .excellent 3to&...&$<\$to ...... ahorse ................ V/Vo^S^ an [excellent horse. , and... ...<"3bo ...... money ................. &Z$$x> [much money* opulent, and . } 3&& ..... a master ................ fJ 6 *rJf^ s j&& [an opulent master. 294 In the common dialect r neuter adjectives in S&>, of whatever clasp, ajre con- stantly prefixed, with the particles fcS>;6-fc>aitf or >ax>tf&x>tfo3, to sub- stantives of all genders and numbers promiscuously; thus, or box*W&c. a handsome man-men- icoman-ivomen-face?-faces, fyc. 295 The rules respecting *25^SS'3xx> and 9gl:5 i zf ^"^o substantives are also applicable to adjectives of the same descriptions. OF ADJECTIVE PBONOUNS. ...,,. . _v 296 The adjective pronouns may be divided into the same classes as the substantive pronouns of the third person, viz. definite and indefinite, with the addition of the possessive pronouns. POSSESSIVE S. 297 The possessive pronouns consist of the possessive or genitive cases of the respective substantive pronouns, without the postposition ^|1_ viz. his (remote) his (proximate) her or its (proximate) .her or its (do) , .our .their M fy F. (proximate) .our P _ .their -N. (do) sr8 their M> $ F. (remote) .your r63....; ........ their N.(do) his, her, its .their 298 These pronouns are indeclinable ; they are prefixed to nouns in the same manner 1 as the !#3&o adjectives, but without affixes of any kind ; thus* *r* ow*x> my house, -5T8^:)a955boex) their horses, &c. on ^ * ojn OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUJSS. 89 DEFINITE PRONOUNS. Each of the definite adjective pronouns consists of one long vowel ; viz. 299 the demonstrative proximate "^, or, as it is vulgarly written, osr , meaning this; the demonstrative remote & that; and the interrogative ^ or, as it is commonly written, , what ? When prefixed to substantives, these pro- nouns are sometimes converted into their corresponding short vowels, and the following consonant is then doubled; thus, -&>;ffe33bo or S^JTsSbySSbo or, as it is commonly written, cxw^oSbej&w or ox>'5S>y this lotus> &~&"vx> or that lime, &T*^S$w or <^;3"i>5$x> or as it ia vulgarly written or ^>yw3fc> w hat time? Wh,en the vowel is shortened, the " is doubled, in each of these examples. INDEFINITE PBONOUN3. The indefinite adjective pronouns are prefixed to plural substantives, with- 300 out any intermediate affix ; they are merely the nominative cases of the indefi- nite substantive pronouns of the third person, viz. M. & F. AT. so many. all. a few. The indeclinable particle &0&, commonly written ^olT 9 , meaning thz 301 whole, in full, Sec. affixed to substantives, has the same force as the pronouns e= or W^ prefixed to them ; thus, ^oSwSfo&oStftaJ or all men t W^Sjbgew or 3j&)e;o5 all things. 12 CHAPTER FIFTH. VERB S. Teloogoo verbs are of four kinds ; neuter, active, passive, and causal. 302 These verbs are divided into two parts, the affirmative, and the negative ; 303 and each of these two parts has an indicative mood, an imperative mood, parti- ciples, and a verbal noun. The affirmative verb has an infinitive, but the negative verb has none. INDICATIVE. The indicative mood, in the affirmative verb, has, properly, only four 304 tenses ; the present, the past, the future, and the aorist. In the negative verb, the aorist is the only tense. Each of these tenses has two numbers, the singular and the plural ; and in each number there are three persons; but there is no distinction of gender, except in the third person. In the singular number of most of the tenses, the third person masculine is distinguished from the third person feminine and neuter, both of which are the same. In the plural, the third person masculine and feminine are one ; and the neuter is, in general, different from both. In a few cases, however, the third person is the same for all genders. C3 ^ IMPERATIVE. The imperative has two numbers ; the singular and the plural. This 305 mood, in the affirmative verb, has two persons ; the 2d in the singular, and the 1st and 2<1 in the plural. In the negative verb, it has the 2d person only in each number. PARTICIPLES. The participles are of two distinct kirtds : the one we shall denominate 3o6 verbal, and the othei 1 rekitive, participles. The affirmative verb hag two verbil participles ; the present and (lie past, 307 92 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR, The negative verb hss one only, indefinite as to time. These verbal participles require the addition of some personal termination, or of some tense of another verb, in order to distinguish number and person. They can never be used as adjectives, or substantives, like the English participles, in such phrases as, the sounding shore, by promising, in speaking, Sfc. fyc. they must almost inva- riably be followed by a personal termination, or be governed by some tense of a verb ; as in the ph rases, froionirtg she speaks, phased he departed, wondering he stands. The wordsfrowning, pleased, and wondering, represent the Teloogoo verbal participle; and the words speaks, departed, and stands, the Teloogoo governing verb. 308 In the affirmative ve: h, rl-vere are three relative participles ; the present, tha past, and the indei.' itr ; In the negative verb the indefinite only. They admit of no personal tern .-i nations, they ean precede nr> verb, and are termed relative participles, because the power of the Kn-!;l'*ii relative pronoun who, which, tkdt, is inherent in them: they therefore* f.U- MVS refer to some noun or pro- noun with which they agree, as adjectives: thus, a tree which grows, a horse that leaps, would be expressed in Telo^g^o by the relative participles; viz. "'SjSl^l^ a growing tree, &>&> 3^^'xtf ff leaping horse. In order that the reader may recollect that our relative pronouns are inherent in this part of the Teloogoo verb, the relative that (selected, as agreeing promiscuously with all genders) will be prefixed to it in English; thus, that leaps, that grows, frc. VERBAL NOUNS. 309 The verbal nonns are declinable substantives, expressing the action itself which is signified by the verb. Those terminating in ^S&o follow the rules for the second declension ; and those ending in any other syllable, are declined like nouns of the third declension. The origin of every part of the Teloogoo verb may be traced to that crude form of it termed the '^T 6 ^ root; which is sometimes also an abstract noun, and, in the common dialect, is often the 2d person singular of the affirmative imperative. It always ends in - to ^ s toprevent, to oppose. o* console, to comfort. to oppose. 80 &... ............................................ fo/>0wr. ............................ to venture, to dare. to bless. to lie down. . .................... to think. GC-J& .................................................... to induce, to excite. to fly. ... ....................................... to be twisted* . ............................ to shine. to make a noise, to bark. . .......................... to make- i .......... to write. 38cS58o .......... , .............................................. to rain. to ask. . ...................................... to thunder. , ....................... to fly. to clean, to wash. to study, to read. to icandeT) to turn back. to grow. .... .............. , ................................... to spin. It is necessary to remark that, although the Teloogoo root has been trans- 311 lated with to* the sign of the English infinitive, it is never used in an infinitive signification. 94 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 312 From the root thus terminating in *0 , are formed the verbal participles, and the infinitive of the affirmative verb ; and from these three principal parts of the verb, viz. the root, the verbal participles, and the infinitive of the affir- mative verb, spring all the rest of it's parts, both affirmative, and negative, as shewn in the following table. OP VERBS. 95 THE PRINCIPAL PARTS OP THE VERB. From the root in ^, the present verbal participle is formed, by adding & 313 in the superior, and & in the inferior dialect ; thus, $~ k* 3 , to beat, makes S^kg *$> or ^^>^),beatinff> The participle &c&^ from the root &o2Sb to be, may be added,, as an auxiliary, to each of these participles, which, by the rules for Sund.hi, make -vSa-^)^ and *&><&>. respectively ; hence i $ rn ^^^^. and rt ^'S3^>^ beating. The past verbal participle is formed by changing ^ of the root into ; in 31- other words, as expressed in the table, by adding 9 to the root in ^> the final \> being dropped: thus, from ^? to beat, comes >~&, having beaten. The infinitive is formed by merely dropping the final ^ of the root ; thus, 315 from the root ^^> comes &*$>, to beat. INDICATIVE MOOD. The present tense is derived from the present verbal participles ; the past 316 tense from the past verbal participle ; the future and the affirmative aorist from the root, and the negative aorist from the infinitive, by the addition of the affixes shewn in the table, which consist partly of certain terminations defin- ing the several persons singular and plural, partly of particles interposed between these personal terminations, and the principal parts of the verb, whence the tenses are derived. PERSONAL TERMINATIONS. The personal terminations of the verb are derived from the substantive 317 pronou ns. The personal terminations of the first and second persons are, 318 For all the tenses, except the first form \ p thejirstform of the pa , t tmse . of the past tense ..... . ............. f Singular ...... 1 > .......................................... ..... .................... > 2sf\ ...} ^J"' !. .1... .!. ..I.. ........... ...... Plural ......... 1 sSbo ................................................................ ^ . 2 & ......... ,,,,,,, Mt.t... in* .................. ................. 9 yb TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 319 Except the first form of the past tense, which merely converts the final o to * , the first person singular of all the tenses ends io &>, the termination of the pronoun ~^^> /; the second person singular, in .the same manner, terminates iu q), the final syllable of &^) thou ; the first person plural ends in &, the termination of "&>* we and the second person plural ends iu &>, the termination of xr 5o, you. 320 The personal terminations of the third person are not so regular : ihey stand thus. Pruent. Past. Future. Aorist. Negative Aorist. 1st form. 24 iorui. 1st form. 2d forict. ^ *w Singular. ' F*. <% A f ^ ... ... fv ^' .."" '"- 5o 8. 5o So ?> &>. <& * . The first form of the past tense, and the affirmative aorist, have ?&, and the two forms of the future $, for all genders in the third person singular- 322 Except the first form of the perfect tense, which merely converts -o into 9 9 the third person plural of all the tenses in the masculine and feminine gendres ends in ?&, the final syllable of the pronouns *>&> or "ST"?^), they, in the neuter of the preset 1 1 tense, and of the second form of the past tense, it ends in S3, the final syllable of the neuter pronouns 2?> or >, they; but the other tenses have the neuter plural the same as in the weurex singular, except the negative aorist, which terminates in > OF VERBS. 97 INTERMEDIATE PARTICLES, Before affixing the personal terminations above stated to the principal parts 323 of the verb, from which the tenses are derived ; the affirmative tenses assume certain intermediate particles, which are the same for the first and second persons both singular and plural, but are liable to variation in the third person, as shewn below. 1st and 2d persons 3d person singular. 3d person plural, singular and plural* Present o A?. /*. to & M - $ F- N. p fist form. ..8 c*- < ' \_2d form. ..-jjj-o. ...... . . -*& -~ ~& * Future < , f c V Aorist... , &> In the present tense, long * (><&> -x>) is prefixed to all the personal 324 terminations, except the third person feminine or neuter in the singular, and the third person neuter in the plural, which prefix P^. In the first form of the past tense, 9 is prefixed to all the personal termi- 325 nations, except to those of the third person, which take ~* before them in the singular, and in the neuter plural : in the masculine and feminine plural, there is no prefix. In the second form of the past tense, ~*F* is prefixed to all the personal terminations, except the third person feminine and neuter in the singular, and the third person neuter in the plural, which prefix #". The first form of the future prefixes ~^& to all the personal terminations, 326 except to those of the third person singular and the neuter of the third person plural, which prefix -* &. The second form prefixes ~* to all the personal terminations ; but in the third person singular, and in the neuter of the third person plural, it may at pleasure be changed into . t The affirmative aorist prefixes &> to all the personal terminations, except to 327 those of the third person singular, and of the neuter third person pkral, which take no prefix, 13 98 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. 328 The negative aorist does not assume any prefix before the personal termi- nations* PRESENT TENSE. 329 The personal terminations, connected with the intermediate particles for the present tense, are exhibited in the table ; thus, ~~ r> efo-~~ q)-~~' D c 8fc-S>^a. &c. ' When these affixes are added to the present verbal participle, in order to form the present tense, the final *^> of the participle is dropped, and the present verbal participle, in all verbs, having four forms, viz. *&- &- T&r&v^- and &o&>^, the present tense, which is formed from the participles, has also four forms, viz. T^rfo . !?"*&> - Ji>'sr" < ^> - ^"Sr^rfo & c . thus, the present verbal participles rkx>a& - T'&x>&) -^^-i^^^and S^^S&^^L. beating, respec- tively, make ^bg^&> &c. ~k13-*& & c . rfc-ifcT3^ifr &c. or ~^&> iy \r& &c. / Sfc. beat ; but it will be seen, from the table, that the third person feminine or neuter in the singular, and the third person neuter in the plural, are not added to the participles in -v&r&^or e&Sx^, but only to those in *&> or e> : they have, therefore, only two forms ; viz. T&O^& or &bS$g&- -Sx>?5^jD or Sfc3frSS respectively ; for the conversion in the singular of <^ to o, in the common dialect, can hardly be reckoned a new form ; thus, ro tgj j &> tf^a or S^ko&^a she or it beats, {T^-tfctf^ja or r|&>S>^g> they beat. The participles in &> and -J^f5^ are both strictly grammatical, but those in e> and ^^^ are generally used in the common dialect. Of the four forms of the present tense derived from these participles, that only which is derived from the participle in ^f^. viz. -SfcTo^fc & c . j s strictly grammatical, the form derived from the grammatical participle in -&>, viz. "^rfo, i s vulgar, and it's use is confined chiefly to the religious bramins of the Northern districts : but the forms derived from the participles in &b and ^boO;^ , viz. U'cS) an d &>72P^$) &c. are in common use, and should always be selected in preference to the other forms, when we speak the language. PAST TENSE- 330 There is not any variation in the past verbal participle, from which the two forms of the past tense are derived ; their formation, as shewn in, the table, is OF VERBS. 99 therefore very simple ; &*& having beaten makes in the first form r &&> / have beaten, S^^BSS thou hast leaten c. The third person of the first form is Tlb?& he, she, or it has beaten, the 9 of ^|3 being dropped when the termi- nation "^ &>, beginning with a vowel, is added to it. In the second form, ^""3 having beaten, makes S^lS^jfo & c . I have beaten Sfc. Both of these forms are strictly grammatical, and both are equally in common use. F u T u R E. All the terminations added to the root, to compose the two forms of this 331 tense, commence with vowels ; the final o of the root is therefore dropped, when they are added to it ; thus, the root ^^ makes ^~^>25^ or ^"to^), / will beat. The second form of this tense is used by the vulgar only. The first person singular of the second form of this tense must not be confounded with the third person singular in the first form of the past tense. ^ "l^^ I will beat is entirely distinct, in meaning, from ^~^ji^ he, she, or it has beaten ; but the only difference in writing or pronouncing them, is, that the ~* before r& j s long in the former, and short in the latter. It is of much importance to the reader to understand, that the two forms of the future tense are soldom used ; the present or the aorist being commonly substituted for them. A o R i s T. The formation of the affirmative aorist from the root, and of the negative 332 aorist from the infinitive, by the addition of the affixes shewn in the table, is so simple, as scarcely to require explanation : the root ^^ makes it's affir- mative aorist r k x >&>f&, 7 do beat, have beaten, or will beat ; and from the infi- GO riitive ^^ comes s^^^X), I do not beat, have not beaten, or will not beat. IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLES, AND VERBAL NOUNS- AFFIRMATIVE VERBS. The afiTirmative imperative is formed by a'dding to the root&>or Sxr* for the 333 2d person singular ; &&x>, or in the common dialect "^55oo, for thelst person plural ; and c agb or cd for the 2d person plural : the last mentioned termination, in the common dialect, is added to the infinitive, instead of the root ; thus, from 100 TELOOGOO GBAMMAB. come ^<^M or ^ar beat thou; ^sSo, or in the GO GO CO GO common dialect ^"^^M, let us beat, ^^C^o or i^cs O r in the *X/ GO GO common dialect ^^^, &ea ye ; the reader, however, will bear in mind that, by rule 310, the root itself, in the common dialect, is often used as the 2d person singular of the affirmative imperative ; instead of ^^>J5bo or GO -- D , therefore, we constantly say => ^ beat thou. 334 The formation of the verbal participles, in the affirmative verb, has already been explained ; see rules 313 and 314: it only remains, therefore, to shew the manner in which the relative participles are formed : the present relative participle is formed from the present verbal participles in r&r^ , by chang- ing f&>^ into <^ : there are two verbal participles in <&^ viz. the gram- matical participle in "*&w^, and the common participle in *&f&^; the rela- tive participle, therefore, has also two corresponding forms, -J&fS^and ^>f^; thus, from r 4W&3&^ L an( j ro &>o?&)&)^ beating, come ^t^ 3 "^^. and, in the common dialect, ^^^^^ that beats. The past relative participle is formed by adding the syllable ^ to the past verbal participle ; thus, from g^ & having beaten, comes s &$ that has beaten ; the indefinite relative partici- ple is formed by adding to the root -= &b or *"= & in the superior, and ~* or e* &3 in the common dialect, and as all these terminations commence with a vowel, the ^ final of the root must be dropped when they are added : thus, the root ^^ makes its indefinite relative participle S^^o^o or ^ l^s in the superior dialect, and in the common dialect, ^~ or ^ "fr 1 ^ that beats, has beaten, or will beat. The root itself is somtimes, in books, used as the indefinite relative participle. 335 The affirmative verbal noun is formed by adding & to the root, or in the common dialect, by adding S^sSw to tne infinitive ; thus, from ^^ come *"oo&o, or in the common dialect &&>x> the beating. eo to 336 The negative imperative is formed by adding to the infinitive os5bo or o&rt>, or in the common dialect ^, for the 2d person singular ; and oc2& or ocd,or in the common dialect ^o<^, for the 2d person plural ; thus, from ^^ to beat OF VERBS. 101 come ^k&3bo or JT>eoloj)on> O r ^^Z* beat not t/iou, and c or 60 60 O 60 or s k>$ QCS beat not ye. By adding tc the infinitive s , we form the negative verbal participle ; by adding to it $, we form the negative relative participle ; and by adding to it S5o, we form the negative verbal noun ; thus, from "~k> to beat come %~^ without beating or having beaten ; "~<^<0 that eo *-3 eo doe s not, has not, or will not beat ; and S~to*K> the not beating. GO Neuter and active verbs are conjugated in the same manner : we shall, 337 therefore,treat of them conjointly ; merely distinguishing the iS^fc 3$w from the ee^3&S&o verbs : we shall afterwards submit an example of the passive verb, and shall conclude this chapter with a few remarks on the causal verb. OF "3#3Sw VERBS. Roots in &> or d&o undergo certain changes to which other verbs are not 338 liable : we shall, therefore, divide the verbs in to three conjugations ; the first, including all verbs the root of which terminates in 'any other syllable than <3&> or -i& ; the second, all those that have the root in cCco ; and the third, all those of which the root terminates in *&> ; and, in giving an example of each conjugation, we shall place first the correct grammatical form, the common forms following in order, as they more or less approach to it. FIRST CONJUGATION. All the roots ( that terminate in any other syllable than ctfw or -^ belong 339 to this conjugation ; and merely require the addition of the different termina- tions mentioned in the foregoing table. The root ^ to beat, is selected as an example of this conjugation. 340 Hoot..,.. ....... ,...^ r ^^ common. , common. Present verbal } g-^ ^^ ..-^^^^^^..^30 beating. participle ...... j eo ck eo eo <*' "y Past... do .......... 1 ........................ . .......... . ............... liming beaten. Infinitive .......... "? ...... ...*., ........ . ..... . ............. . ........... to beat. , , eo 102 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. common. . .. ^00^30.., ..Heat. { W^A) 1 She or it beats, eo .You beat. common. common. ..I beat. _S~ ! fe.' J C^A,>.^^ft. fy^b.vtSf-mF^^ > I He beats. it beats . eo . . We beat. eo c^ eo You beat. f^ ^ 1^0 W~ ^w --- ^ H S 1 ^' "^" ^ ^^^ w " * r *" T I iey beat. ^ (_^; ^6ooe$o^\ S) -.i^^ooQbJ^N S) I *N PAST. ^8"ST"^o I have beaten. eo " q^) . . ...thouhast beaten. .... ...He has beaten. f^ eT eo i^Jcte; r~3?5a -x .i 1 * (c^ r ~%-&> t... < cv-; 60 c mmon. (. She, or H has beaten. Co w I s ^3oo. . i V w J OF VERBS. .. We have beaten. ej eo ... rt> fe3^r c 5o You have beaten. eo r'feSa * They have beaten. ... ,.1 > , ., ( ' eo eo FUTURE. common. I shall beat. -$) Thou will beat. eo ( -i 1 fH&. she or it wi J ill beat- eo fa | ^s- eo" eo We shall beat. CJ .~~^So.., ..You will beat. "J }. They will beat. j J A O RI ST. ', rfzW 6ea^, or shall beat. . v _ _ TAow beatest, didst beat, or wilt beat. k if eo .fie, sAe } or z< 6eafe, rfzrf beat, or will beat. We beat, did beat, or shall beat. fbl .......... '> ^^ beat, or will beat. '^^ !* M TAcw 6efl^, c?irf 5ea^. or will beat. IMPERATIVE MOOD. beat thou . &'sSbo ...... S^^-^Xoo.. ...letvsdeat. o eo common. TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. common. PAST. ........................ that has beaten. INDEFINITE. common, common. VERBAL NOUN. common. eo tlus beating. NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T. .% ^~^^a I do not, did not, or shall not beat. ^ ^ &$) Thou dost not, didst not, or will not beat. gi r^' 05 J ^ re |3C<5& ff e does not, did not, or will not beat. [ ^ ^ k> &> She, or it, does not, did not, or ivill not beat. e do not, did not. or shall not beat. o nof > did not > or wil1 not . * 1 N > They do not, did not, or tmll not beat. ) > J IMPERATIVE. common, % ^^03600 ...... r*&&&r.... ....'., ........... r *g'; Common. "^^0^ beat not ye. &j / VERBAL PARTICIPLE. .ivithout beating, or without having beaten. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. that does not, did not, or will not beat. VERBAL NOUN. .....'-,. .the not beating. OF VERBS. 105 The following are a few examples of the numerous verbs in the first conju- 341 gation which, in all their forms, are similar to ^^ to beat* Root. Present verbal participle. Past verbal Infinitive. participle. ..,!^ ..... 5501 ...... S$ex>?f ...... to utter, to pronounce. ..... & c ..... W^. ______ S93& ...... to sell o -6 . ...&c ..... . ...^^ ......... to plait * ...... &c ..... 8 ........ tf ......... to become cool, to fie . [extinguished: ...... to swim. ....... -&>$ ...... to briny forth, to produce, [applied to cattle, or grain, . ....&c. ... ...... ^ ....... to swell. .fo listen. . eo" eo *= eo v, . ..&c....^C^ ?&x ...,&c ..... ^^ ........ c^rS.. ..... bite. .to b e found. .... to break, EXCEPT LONS. ' The undermentioned and a few other roots ending in &>, when followed 342 by -C6 or &>, change &>*$> or ^&, at pleasure, into & or o-^, ^> or o2^ ; and in these verbs, the syllables or tf>, followed by ^, are invariably changed into' o, the & being at the same time, converted into &>(& or ^r&^x) or S^O&D^O. J n the second and third persons plural of the affirmative aorist, instead of i^oS&Sb, we may, by a rule applicable to these verbs only, change the a of &>, or the &> itself, into <* ; thus, ^ocSc5b or s^o.&o^, yow or they buy, did buy, or will buy; thus also S^ffo followed by ^^v^, makes ^o^f6o^ buying; and, in the perfect tense, i""*^ followed by w&, makes s^o&SiO I have bought. 344 The foregoing verbs, together with to go corrupted ......... .to fall. . , at the commencement of any of the terminations mentioned in the table, into " c&>; thus, *^13?& or i^^^or^o he has bought y "~^^^ or ^^^0^^ I shall buy. 345 All the roots mentioned above as exceptions, instead of forming the past relative participle of the affirmative verb in the regular manner, may, at plea- sure, form it by changing the final *o of the root into *" and doubling the preceding consonant; thus, we say either "^ or ^^. that bought, &^<5 or e$X thatjitted. 346 The roots in r& specified in rule 342, together with the three roots in &o mentioned in rule 344, contract the second form of the past tense, in a manner peculiar to themselves ; by doubling the consonant of the second syllable, which coalesces with the vowel of the third syllable, and rejecting both the OF VERBS, 107 vowel of the second syllable, and the consonant of the third syllable ; thus, g^&iapffc I Bought, becomes ro- Rr o < ^&, and SS"Sr*&>, Ifdl, becomes 3Tpi&. The verb S~&>, to buy, is here given at full length, as an example of the 347 irregular verbs of this conjugation. Root ................ ............. ^^. common. common. Present Past.. ....... do ................ s"" '^ ......................................... having bought* Infinitive ........ . .............. s^> ...... .... ....... ..... ........... ......to buy* Verbs in ?&, such as *"f&, do not derive any form of the present tense 348 from the participle in &>-&>. AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I buy. '.....Thoubuyest. ..- ....... He buys. She or u - LuySi "oi&^3$i... .......... We buy. common. common. common. ..... rt> o&n>cfi&...j& 108 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. ...JF5b ........... r'^r^Sb ...... Youlought. fj r^^a ......... "{0^80 ........... s^^V^ ...... -^ \ } They bought. ........ j FUTURE. common. I shall buy. , Thou wilt buy _ . e . r^ ...... ) or \ ibfo; ...... J or \Hesheoritwillbuy. We shall buy. " You will buy. U r'-saio ............................. r r'^^T. ....... j A O R I S T. 2 re ^c$D?5>... ro o25b^>.../^M i y, bought, or shall buy. *&(**< sr;5o2$;qg). ^o2$D^)...7%OM ^^, boughtest, or wilt buy. no J &> ^^3?^ ........ ,.,. ....... ,.,He } she, or itbuys, bought, or will buy, .OF VERIis. lOi.) g^oc&SSM.. We buy, bought, or shall buy. J&5b-) or > low buy, bought, or trill buy. j J or g^OiS&i ^ They buy, bought, or will buy. \*-S 1 IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. .....buy thou. .let us buy. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. common. ... ."~o ^f^ that buys. FAST. that bought. INDEFINITE. common, common. "* tJ... r *~3$...that buys, bought, or will buy. VERBAL NOUN. common. .s^p^SiSjco th e buying. NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. AORIST. Idonot, did not, or shall not buy. ^ N r ^?5q^ ..... ............. Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not buy. co ^ j ^ sT($<:&> ................ He does not, did not, or will not buy. She or it does not, did not, or will not buy. "* ^ We do not, did not, or shall not buy. You do not, did not, or will not buy. -j { 13 f- Z*/je^ cfo o^, did not, or will not buy. 110 TELOOOOO GRAMMAR IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. "?5r ...... buynotthou, common. VERBAL PARTICIPLE. t... without buying, or without having bought. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. that does not, did not, or will not buy. VERBAL NOUN. the not buying. SECOND CONJUGATION IN 349 All verbs having the root in cOw-form the affirmative aorist and imperative, either in the manner explained in the table rule 312, or by changing cX&>&> of the affirmative aorist into >, and cCfotS of the affirmative imperative into & ; and, in these cases, if the vowel preceding cfcco be 9 , it must be changed into O ; thus, from "^cOw to do comes ' : ScX&>&>;& O r ^^jfo I do, did, or shall do. q or "^>efs&o let us do; but the root tf&c&d, which has 9 preceding , makes &?& or C2&e&>;$>, and tfcld&>SS& or ^S^cS'sSM, never and ^^ifsSM. 350 In the common dialect, roots in cs&o f orm the second person of the affir- mative imperative by changing the cs&> into ox> ; thus, "^cSSoo to do makes "Sooo do thou. 351 Roots in csfio, when they affix 9 ^= or -=*, or terminations beginning with these vowels, as shewn in the table, rule 312, invariably change the final syllable ctf into & or <& ; thus, the root "3ctf / ^ when ifc addg 9 tQ form the past verbal participle, makes "^ or ^ A C y^ done, and when it adds ~~&&> to forra the future, it makes "^"^2S^3 or ^"?S^> 5 & c . never -3>^& &c. when followed by & to form the verbal noun, and by ?5b i n the third person singular of the affirmative aorist, such roots change the cOoo ] n t o Joo at option N. B. The verb S^^ has two irregular forms in imperative, viz. ^or ^^ Jw ^ ^ OM ^o3& or OF VERBS. Ill only ; as ^c&ok or iS&eo the doing, ~&<3$x>& or ~3>&ti> fo, $/, or it does, did, or will do ; and if the vowel preceding the cS&> be 3 , it must be changed into ^ ; thus, 8<3$x> to be damp, makes ^2&c&r&>. Roots incCco, when followed by e&r&^ore&j invariably change the sylla- 352 ble cfcx> into the letter &, which coalesces with the e5 in it's doubled form D ; thus, "-ScBcw followed by e&r&^ or &>, to form the common present verbal participle always becomes &<&^. and "& respectively, never "-ScSSw^)?^^ and "-ScOooo^b. The following is an example of this conjugation. 353 Root ................................ common* Present verbal participle ........ common, . . "S^r^J^. .."^ i^ doing. Past ...... . ..... do ............... ^cO...-u/'a ................. . ..... o ......... having done. Infinitive .......................... ^-ScOo ............................ ..... ...#> do- Verbs of this conjugation do not derive any form of the present tense from the participle in cfc&x&. AFFIRMATIVE VERB- INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. common. common. *~ . 1^ c| . * I do. ..... Thou dost. u e does. . -\ I. ^J She or it does. They do. 112 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. PAST. fe ""* ...... i did. ...... ....... ) ...... Thou didst. \ r*s il.jfe; """ or or ^ She or it did. common. common, \ We did. did. FUTURE. common- common. I shall do. Thou wilt do. or - \ He, she .or it will do. We shall do. -w5^v>6 r?5 ax-^ v. ,m d 0t ^^5 ] ' They will do. A O R 1 S T. / do, did, or shall do. TAoM c?o^ didst, or wilt do. He, she, or it does,did,or will do. ...... We, do, did, or shall do. cbo2&3o .......... ^SbSo. . ... . .YOM do, did, or will do. ^e&Sb...-j / __-5 ^ _x C3(OOr5J- / { ^' . / They do > did, or will do, > ^-_^ . . ...... __- ^ _x & OF VERBS. 113 IMPERATIVE MOOD. common,* ?cK>aj- ^Scoo dotlion. GO . common. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. "25b<3\ .."-^oOO^A.. PAST. . . .that did. INDEFINITE. ) .. < -i common. common. common, common. [ that does, did, or will do. VERBAL NOUN. common. .,. T*> coo so -LocXxjwooSw,. . ,,the doino* NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T. 7 do not, did not, or shall not do. Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not do . He does not, did not, or will not do. She or it does not, did not, or will not do. We do not, did not, or shall not do. You do not) did not, or ivill not do. > They do not, did not, or will not do. IMPERATIVE. common, , . . , . "^cJJblf . . . . . . . do not thou. common. t ,, Isc05?fo<*,.,.,,..,?o not ye. 15 114 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. VERBAL PARTICIPLE. "^ctfo^T ................................. without doing, or without having done. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. 13c55o<0 .................................. that does not, did not, or will not do> VERBAL NOUN. "ISctfoSo ..... ............................ the not doing. 354 According to thg common dialect, the syllables c or ^, in this conjugation, when followed by the consonant t & , are at pleasure changed into the letter s cO, which coalesces with the t 5 in it's doubled form ; thus, the 1st and 2d persons in the first form of the past tense of "-ScCbo m ay become- - -s "3 **>$.., ................ ............ 1 did. & ". _^~" 3 3 "3_o>S) .......................................... Thou didst. , ........................... We did. 355 The following, with all other verbs in cS5co, are conjugated under the fore- going rules. Root. Present verbal participle. Past verbal Infinitive. participle. . . ..to become fatigued, or [tired. ....^ iecowe i?z disease. N ....... o< ........ ...o obtain. .. to twine. ....~3ootfcX5o to attack in the field of {battle. to ma^e a noise, to sound. to take, to purchase, to \pull- fo weave. ...^ n/ft, to bloom. OF VERBS. 115 Root. Present verbal participle. Past verbal > Infinitive. participle. (a pour. x ....... look) ......... oMcOo ....... fa graze. ____ to bear a burden- S^cOo ...... to feel disgust. .Is.cxxx) ...... 13 cfcooi&^x);^ ...... . S.^> ........ y~s^cCb ..... fo castf, to throw. SfOdBoo ...... rDcSS&o-i^^ ...... JfO^b ........ r)o5o ...... to mix. 08 ci&o ...... ^QcKS&o-ESb,^^ ...... 3oQ^> ........ o9d5o^. . ..^ ra ma} 7 become 13cC&>C, the infinitive wcOo, &cJ5o &c. &c. THIRD CONJUGATION IN -Efc. All verbs having the root in &>, form the aorist and imperative, either in 357 the manner explained in the foregoing table, rule 312, or by changing &&> in the affirmative aorist into $>, and -&>> in the affirmative imperative into Cf. If the root has a double ^^, the & and & are also doubled, into & and _& ; thus &>o-c$oo&> or ^^o^i^> - >>o-i&&>o or &S)o^55oo } "So^^D^j or "So e^o?^, "3a-l^> \25s6o or ~So__^^. In ihe common dialect, the terminations-^w and SXr, in the second person 358 singular of the affirmative imperative, are often dropped in this conjugation. The undermentioned verbs terminating in &, likewise deviate from the 35 i) rules given in the foregoing table, (312) by forming the infinitive in *>, instead of itf, and taking ) instead of & before the terminations for the affirmative; imperative. . 116 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. .. . ..to make a loud or clamor- [ous noise. to iveep, to lament. to bite. only when it signifies to [protect, .to suck, to eat. .to measure, to serve. &... .to pass, or elapse. ..'..to walk. ...to stand. ...to call. ....to forget. ...to grow, to shoot. ...to quit, to leave. ...to rise. (This verb has also an irregular form in the 2d person of the affirmative imperative, viz. l?^^ win. rise thou, "SoSb rise ye.) thus, 5bew-&> to call, makes, in the infinitive 5oew^ } never obew-tS", and in the imperative sbex>q)3Sbo never >ex)-i&s5ix>. 360 The following, and a few other .roots in -Co, may at pleasure form the infi- nitive either in "& or *>, and may take either -Co or $) before the terminations of the affirmative imperative. >...fo draw, to drag, to sweep. o strip off" any thing na- turally attached to a substance. suffer. ) churn. 1 cleanse by rubbing, to [efface. >..to perforate, to cleanse a pot or vessel, to carve wood. 3../0 thresh. squeeze, to crush. , to draw up any thing with the breath, as an elephant does water with his trunk. to protect. i to cut, or carve stone; to separate sand from grain . to bear a burden. to grieve. .to love. ob-i&.... to blow as the wind. .to sacrifice. ~~j!> *& to place, or put. , and in the or thus, <&v^ to sweep makes, in the infinitive affirmative imperative &>)\X>x> or &&\. &c. 361 The only deviations from the general rules given in the table, rule 312, of OF VERBS. 11 which the following roots in &> admit, are those mentioned in the two first rules for this conjugation (357 & 358.) ...to reckon, to think. ...to attend. ..to share, to divide. ...to lurk, to lie in wait secretly. . .to surpass, to go beyond. ,..to harass, to torment. ...to scrape, to scratch. > to take, to receive. > .to imagine, to think. > to rob. to perform a ceremony in which a string is consecrated to a particular deity, and then tied round the arm or wrist ; it is generally per- formed by females. . . .to weigh. to rub. ......to owe. to move a piece, as in a game [of chess, 6cc. o love, to desire. to claw. 3\....to string (pearls, fyc.} to dig. ^ to churn' to trust, to confide. to send, to command, to rot* ...to prefer, to approve. ...to break in pieces. -to say> to increase. * All other roots in & have the infinitive optionally either in & or in S3, and, 362 when followed by -t&^So^toform the present verbal participle, by &> to form certain parts of the affirmative aorist, or by the terminations for the affirmative imperative, they may, at pleasure, convert -^ into ^); thus, &>o-i&, to bless, makes in the infinitive SCOTS' or &>o3, in the present verbal participle &>o -SSb-SSb?^ or &>o)-c&&>:^; i n the aorist ^S)c-e5:^?53or &S>o^)2&>o, an d in the imperative )o-is&o or >S)o^)55bo. The verbs of the class last mentioned being more numerous than any others, 363 in &, one of them has been selected as an example of this conjugation. Moot Present verbal participle . common. Past ............ ...do ......... ....... Infinite ...... . ...................... blessing. having blessed. to bless. 118 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. Verbs in this conjugation do not derive any form of the present tense from the participle in iSb^Sb. AFFIRMATIVE VERB., INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I bless. , Thou blessest. (~ c ^ ~ ' & I ^ oSo^TSblNrsCofc a *x *<" (^ A /t -/ * ~s ** /^ S M I &oy)ifo(S\8> She or z7 blesses. OD t. . You bless. -^ ^T/tey bless. common. common. / 6/e*.?. /- - 1' ^JTab ...... Stoi&V.ctfb or Z Y blesses. Cr t* '* S>So-ESjQb'sr D ^,5b ^ :::} PAST. I blessed. Thoublessedst. - f^ S)o^S^o .............. ....$oy*cab..,, ........ He blessed. -e I ^: r S " ^ * \ or i c^ We blessed. . You blessed- btessed. . I r J &S)o.&o or A O R I S T. I shall bless. Thou wilt bless. or . ............ He,she,or it ivill bless. We shall bless. You will bless. blessed, or shall [bless. L blessest, blessedst, or *e, or l blesses, [blessed, or will bless. , blessed, or shall [bless . 5, blessed, or will } bless, blessed, or [ivill bless. IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. \ frl ess thou. .. .. j bless. ,.l common. f'bless ye. common. V 120 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. common. that blesses, that has blessed. INDEFINITE. common. I blessed, or will bless. VERBAL NOUN. common. NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T. ~ *2 , . I "^ *:"** J f^ r ^ ^ (J , did not, or shallnot bless. efostf no, c?zo?5< wof, or iviltnot bless. >....[fe does not. did not. or ivill not bless. rfag, no ^ ^^ wo ^ ? or wi n nof 2 iSDo-^5'S5bo(S)oS3^bo""^ 7(e d not > did not, or shall not bless. -a. &)o#5b""&>o;o5b ..... You do not, did not, or will not bless. f ) l TTtcy fZo wo^ did not, or will not bless IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. common. ............... ..bless not thou. c ....... ~\ V,,., ................... J/^S j A r ERB AL PARTICIPLE. without blessing or without having blessed. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. J. ............... that (Joes not, did not, or will not MPM. OF VI-.RBS. 121 VERBAL NOON. , .the not blessing. In the common dialect, the syllables &> or -S), in this conjugation, when 364 followed by the consonant t t5 , may at option be changed into the letter 8 &, which coalesces with the t &, in its double form _ o. In this case, if o precede **& or & it is dropped ; thus aS)o-Ji5beSb<&^ > _ becomes & *^^ <^L an( ^ ^oJ "^ ^ ; the two last forms of the present tense are accordingly converted into 3 { "a " ........Z bless. ........ Thou blessest. He blesses. a aOIooJS^ She, or it We bless, . . You bless. They bless. /- ........ J and the first and second persons in the first form of the past tense become ^>> , ....... , ............. [blessed. * '" ^>g) ......................................... Thou blessedst. o3S3o .......................... . ........ ..... We blessed. ?o6 ., ............................. You blessed. The follwoing, with many other verbs in *&, are conjugated under the 365 foregoing rules. Root. Present verbal participle. Past verbal Infinitive. participle. ea^, applied only to persons of dis- tinction. fo yawn, to ffape. 16 122 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. Boot. Present verbal participle. Past verbal Infinitive. participle. or V to grin. I . eo <* eo eo or > to double. eo "S ..p-c ) or > SSoR^jDSS ) -v '" I r > to o. i ' to forgive- calculate, to & c . n>e-.tfg- & c . ...... tojom, to sew. &c. &r*&~.&r--&, c . ...... to change. &c. 8-Os-. . ..&^5"s~ &c. ...... to se/e, to decree. &c. "^8^ ..... "^5^ &c. ...... to join, to unite. &c. ef^c-O,...C'oCTS' &c. ...... #o think. . ...... to roast. EXCEPTIONS- 366 The following roots in &> are irregular in the infinitive, and in the second person of the affirmative imperative. Root. Infinitive. Imperative. 2d person singular. 2d person plural. SW .....'. common. common ' OF VERBS. Root. Imperative. 2d person singular. common. 2d person plural. common. Infinitive. to come. . common. common. 3\ fn Jirinn ?3 lo$M. pa CsOu&2. . ?O<*9 x/J "*y ' 1 -r-&\. . C -uT e -v& > \Sbo) common. { -iS 1 " "*&\C ^6 ") common. to enter... . or r "^"^i^ \ f "^ rc ^^ c common. common. /" 13uq5v 5bo. *^5-I$b\ ^055v5c2& 1 common, common. common. common. Or t*>". "^ '^)^. ,." : xT ^) T vT T> ^Sc^b "TM^ZSOGv common. common. These verbs are of course also irregular in all the tenses formed from the 367 infinitive ; thus, the negative aorist of ^"^5 is "^f^> &c. &c. OF IRREGULAR "^-zfCSSbo VERBS. The following verbs are so irregular that they do not admit of being classed 368 under any particular conjugation : on this account, and because most of them are in frequent use as auxiliaries, it has been thought proper to give them at full length. Root dec-JSo Present verbal participle.. .65 > '*d'& > ~\' 6so&-v&>. .....So-iSbf^ 1 ^. . ,cio-2& common. common. [6s o &*> cfo^ . . so kx> . .being. Past do dsocis having been. csoS!* , to be* AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I am. Thou art. s ^i _ S I H? GSOQO-jfo 13' T \ C 3^0 ftp }9 Lr\ . i CV CS- * * !*** J t3 J ^ v_ . _ Sfie or it is. 124 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. . . ....... (:35O-t&sr^j$bo ........ We are. b. . . / ..... You are. [ *\ > ) ^ 2 Is common. common. common. . . .J am. C w <^o-=u5^^) ......... ^o^xi-sr^^). . . . &o&r^$?). . . .Thou art. JS ^o-^r-c^b. . . ^o^7r=s C2gb. . . . . I . ' -^ ^ 6o-c&>?5^a. } .... ^oioo^a. "\ .. .o&oo?5^a.^ ' > Ifci ^ox5bo,- J ..... &o6ooo& .. J . . .too^oa ..... J . . .We are. . . . You are. CTOT^S ........ O&X>73-N5b ...... O&3~Sb... "^ 1 S . V They are ^ feo-^?^) ....... So^oo^S .......... ^0600?^ S) J P A S T . . . . ./ r I OfO.. O'SP > Cc*C.or..73~ c N Ci.... f " or ..... } V J ...... You were. FUTURE. , I shall be. wilt be. r . fo " or > ....... Hf she or it will be. ) > J *^ OF VERBS. v^rP ^c You will be. s r ^j T3 J S3 3 * ' } They will be. ...J A O R I S T. common. (zs o2&i&r& cs O(&>r5i / am, was or shall be. art, wast, or wilt be. * ^ ocSb^> ........ S o^Cr^> .......... He, she, or it is, was, or will be. We are, were, or GO O6SOO3QO 6s o2&>c5b You are, were, or will be. ere, ^ere, or iw# 6(?. IMPERATIVE. common. ^ o^b ......... bethou. ..... letusbe. ...... lie' ye. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES, PRESENT. common. (55 o-JfcS^. ........... 6 o^??^ ...... that is. PAST. ^ .. . .................................. that was- INDEFINITE. common. common. i or VERBAL JJOUN. common. thebeing. 126 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A OKI ST. I am not, was not, or shall not be. Thou art not, wast not, or wilt not be. a oSuG&b fie is not, was not, or will not be. ^ & o&> She or it is not, ioas not, or will not be. We are not, were not, or shallnotbe. YOM are not, were not, or will not be. \ * are not, were not, or will not be> ^ j IMPERATIVE. common. & oSS&SSbo . . .& o^os^j-o. . ____ & o^S' ..... 5 e not thou. 05 '^ .^ o5*^>c GI. . . .^oSS^OfS....^ not ye VERBAL PARTICIPLE. ^ o2?f ........................... without being, or without haviny been- RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. ? o^?D ........................... #Aa^ z*5 not, was not, or will not be. VERBAL NOUN. 3 oSiSto ........................ the not being. the fourth form of the past tense of this verb, ^ ^ r < ^ ) &c is constantly used as the present tense, in the common dialect. Eoot ........... . common. common. common* Present verbal participle ---- <. ... ...... do .......... >cx .......................... .having Infinitive .................. "S" ............................ to beco e OF VERBS. 127 r ' i ^* J AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Ibecome. Thou becomest. ............ He becomes. -) < J or ^ > J You become. They become. / become. , Thou becomest. e^-^CSb He becomes. > She, or it becomes. . We become. , You become. "j > ) They become. PAST; I became. Thou becamest* .... ^ ' t , r ,He became. > She, or it became' 128 TELOOGOO CRAM MAR, ^ ' . a88 c >> f^ We became. You became. FUTURE. common. I shall become. Thou wilt become. c ) \He,sJie, j or it ivill become. We shall become. You will become. ^ \Theywillbecome. | J A O R I S T. , __^ 1 become, became, or shall become. *2 ^ t5>a)&>q) Thou becomest, becamest, or wilt become. *^ 13 < e9q5S<\x>.. He, she, or it becomes, became, or will become. n t ^ * <^<-^--<~ jy e become, became, or shall become. You become, became, or will become* r * ^ r^ ef>^)!$D5o ~) s ^ < ^ V TAey become, became, or will become* m Cfe; C5c^)r5o. J IMPERATIVE. common. .1* ^ S's&o ' e/tos&> "5^ become thou. common. "e ^ 5q)2$o5oo ,..^5^)"^ t> ^ > ' ....det us become. _ jfOiJ^o.,, , ,^0^,,,, ,,i iMiMitc. i ,.,become,yet ^ ei " OF VERBS. 129 RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. that becomes. PAST. that became. INDEFINITE. common. common. e ^oC ____ ef>^oC3 . . that becomes, became, [or will become. VERBAL NOUN. common. common. "tf2s$a> ............ 9^oca ........ the becoming. NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T. ~5~?& ....... I do not, did not, or shall not become. Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not become. 5 . 1 ^ "S^cSiO He does not, did not, or will not become. 'O < >> ry. &* I "*+ tsf "^f*^? She, or it, does not, did not, or will not become. We do not, did not, or shall not become. You do not, did not, or will not becon > They do not, did not, or wll not become* IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. become not thoit. -3""s"o& . . . .become not ue. VERBAL PARTICIPLE. . without becoming or without having become. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. . that does not, did, not, or will not become. VERBAL NOUN- ... the not becoming. Root. ,,,,.' ......... .. 17 130 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. Present verbal participle . . . *>-& &>^ . . . *<)& . . . S^-cfctfo^ . . . common. common. going. Past do ...... .SuPOM having gone- Infinitive . . ST 6 . . . . S^SS" to go. AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. rj& I go. Thou goest. He goes. She, or ... You go. 3~S<5b ofr*i&73~'S 5o... <^J^ * o common. common. common. 3 ofr*T3rf\X} sfr "d I shall go. ) Thou wilt go. >oC ^ ~i > He, she, or it will go. KTOQSO j 5o ..., ! G\ C*J ... J A O R I S TT I go, went, or shall go. Thou goest, tventest, or wilt go. He, she, or it goes, went, or will go. We go, went, or shall go. , went, or will go. ^70, zcenf, or will go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. P U E S E N T. thai goes. 132 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. PAST. that went. INDEFINITE. common. common. ..S^^g ...... &0&Z&., .that goes, went, or ivill go. VERBAL NOUN. common. ., ................ the going. NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T. g &"(&> 23^f&.../ do not, did not, or shall not go. ....Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not go- s j J ^ SLT*c 3fc S3^C&b...H does not, did net, or will not go. le or it does wo/, did not, or will not go. S3o5"s$ We do not, did not, or shall not go. ....You do not, did not, or will not go. They do not, did not, or will not go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. qonotthou. y S.. wo/ ve -y VERBAL PARTICIPLE. without going, or without having gone. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. that does not, didnot, or will not go. VERBAL NOUN. So^ X>. the not going. OF et};5bsoex> OR VERBS OF SANSCRIT DERIVATION. 369 All Sanscrit verbs cannot, at pleasure, be adopted into Teloogoo; those only the use of which has already been sanctioned by custom being considered as properly belonging to the language, When admitted into Teloogoo, such verbs OF VERBS. 133 assume either the termination 9 o-&> or ex> ; in the former case, they are conjugated like &S)o-t& and other regular 1#S$ verbs in "^ of the 3d conjugation ; in the latter case, like &~^?, or any other verb of the 1st con- jugation. With this general rule, it will be sufficient to shew how the Teloo- goo reot is formed from the Sanscrit root. * Sanscrit roots are adopted into Teloogoo in five different ways. 370 1st, by changing the final syllable of the Sanscrit verbal noun into ? Q-C& ; for instance, the Sanscrit root ^)<^ to protect, makes it's verbal noun in Sans- crit 23* &, thj s by changing the final syllable into 9 o-J& makes the Teloogoo root Sy^axo-^ which is conjugated precisely in the same manner as &S)o-i&. A few other examples are subjoined. 371 Sanscrit Root. Sanscrit verbal noun. Teloogoo Root. to praise. to contemplate, to meditate. Job ............. (QQ .............. ,. cv>o9o-t& ..... ............ to praise. -tobe anqry. .XSo-c& to pass, to go. .^o^oOTSb to tremble, to shake, Sfc. $4? J^ o2 f JwO$)ow to stand without motion. 2dly, by changing final 9 or ^ of Sanscrit roots into ^o^o-cfo, final o or , into ^SDo^ and final ^ or ^~ into "'So-vfc. 2 &OX3O-J& to conquer. A ^xox>o-c$3 to fie exhausted. to damp. to bear. ..to take.. to think, to rejlect, , to bear. .55"9ov&>.,,,,,, to select. 134 TELOOaOO GRAMMAR. 3dly, by affixing s G-T& to the Sanscrit root ; thus, Sanscrit Root. Teloogoo Root. "C.2o-2> ........................... to renounce, to quit iS'so-Eo .............................. to be destroyed. if IT ................... ^sbo-zfo ............................. to curse. to perform penance. to sound. "tWWte ......................... to be confused. . - to praise ,or meditate on God. to compose. .330-t> ............................. to write. . ........... to ddUCB. to calculate. 4thly, by changing the final syllable of crude Sanscrit substantives or adjec- tives into S OT&> ; thus, Sanscrit nouns. Teloogoo root. .... ..obstinate ........... S$xr9 o-^> ............ to insist obstinately. oD . ...independent. ....... ^C?^o' 9 .o-^>.... ^ wa^e one's self independent. vicinity ............. < f3Xr D obo-5>:).. ..... ...to approach. o-E> ............ to become lean. ....to be proud. ... ornament... ......... ^0-7^80-^.. ..... to arfom. 5thly, a few neuter verbs are formed by atlding to certain Sanscrit words the affix e>J, sometimes also converted into 9 o-c6b. Sanscrit Root. Teloogoo Root. to be afflicted. ........... .......... to shine. -8oeor -SoOo-SSb ..... ,,to refect, to study. OF VERBS. 135 PASSIVE VERBS. Neuter verbs, from Ihcir nature, do not admit of a passive signification ; but 372 all active verbs in Teloogoo, of whatever description, may become passive, by adding to the infinitive the different tenses of the verb Soo t f a li^ meaning in composition, to suffer. The verb which is made passive continues invariably in the infinitive, the 373 auxiliary So&o only being conjugated through all its persons, numbers, and tenses. The infinitive being a \&,*$& }^%fe^> tne ^ f ^^ is generally changed, in composition, into w ; and in the superior dialect C is placed before that letter. The following is an example of a passive verb. 374 Root... eo Present verbal participle common. [^1^ <><>& being beaten. Past do ""|3CW<& having been beaten. Infinitive ^^CwSS to be beSten. AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. common. I am beaten. ) Thou art beaten. He is beaten. , arc beaten. 136 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. common. eo r I " J { ( 4 S 1*3 - GO 60 ^eoCa) g^j eo ec *_^- 60 eo eo 60 60 *feoca)~S>- 60 feO( 60 60 60 60 eo o 60 PAST. eo eo 60 60 FUTURE. common. W beaten. . Thou art beaten. .He is beaten. > She, or it is beaten. . .We are. beaten. j T/tew are beaten. beaten, icast beaten. He was beaten. She, or it ivas beaten. .. We were beaten, were beaten. were beaten. be beaten. He, she, or it will be beaten. exwISc^SSw..^^^"^ 5 ^ We shall be beaten. beaten. 60 eo g^ iocs) 2^0 s&o. .. eo eo ^ eo eo eo OF VERBS. A O R I S T. 1am, was, or shall be beaten. Thou art, wast, or wilt be beaten. ) sne ^ or ft j St waS) or W HI b e beaten. We are, were, or shall be beaten. Ifou are, were, or will be beaten. . ' They are, were, or will be beaten. IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. eo .let us be beaten. be ye beaten. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. common. PAST. thftt was beaten. eo to INDEFINITE. f s eocs) use! \ common. . , . .""^oC2J 5lc3i ^. eo | common. f . that in, was, or will be beaten. eo eo VERBAL NOUN. 0.., common. the being beaten. eo NEGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. AORIST. lam not, was not, or shall not be beaten. Thou art not, loast not, or wilt not be beaten. jje is not. was not, or will not be beaten. O, zf?a5 wo^, o/' wn'W not be beaten. . 18 138 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. )., ....... We are not, were not, or will not be beaten, .......... You are not, were not, or will not be beaten. -n f ~^ C ^& ...... ) SJ w < ^' > (fc; r*kCK>5) ..... ) Tftey are not, were not, or will not be beaten. K>5) ..... ) eo IMPERATIVE MOOD. common. k>C>&Scr ..... r'tocw^g' ..... benotthou beaten, eo eo ....4oCtt8&c& ..... S^toca^cxS ...... be not ye beaten. eo eo eo *? VERBAL PARTICIPLE. ^6oc a) 3 " ..... ............. without being, or without having been, beaten. CO RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. g^docsiSS^ .................. thatis not, was not, or will not be beaten. VERBAL NOUN. the not being beaten. OF CAUSAL VERBS. 375 All verbs in Teloogoo admit of being converted into causals. It is however to be observed that neuter verbs, in this language, when they assume the causal form, become in fact active verbs : the Teloogoo root v-&> to rise is a neuter verb, ~u^) to cause to rise is it's causal, which corresponds precisely with the English active verb to raise. 376 Except verbs in &> of the 3d conjugation, and a few others hereafter noticed, all roots, by changing the final *O into S OT&, convert active verbs into causals, and neuter verbs into actives ; thus, to salute makes ^^a^lp^Sb to cause to salute. to vomit do ?fi^_p'& to cause to vomit. to bubble do SJ^oAo-Zfc to cause to bubble. .... to swallow do JWoAo^Sb to cause to swallow. > to be raised^ do staS^oofc to heighten. tojlameup do 7r8go-ifc to enflame. to touch do WofeSo-efc tocauseto touch- to sting do "^wgo-ifc to cause to sting. OF VERBS. .lo ripen makes &o&o-\&> to cause to ripen. to burn v. n. do 3&OGso%& to burn v- a. pJ _<5o to raise up.. ..do co^So-il) to cause to raise* & to sow ..do...., )^8o-i&> to cazise to sow. > to &0im do -&>cacK& to cause to stcz'm. to plough v. n. a8 applied 2&^o-!& to plouyk v. a. as [to oxen tyc. [applied to men. *$ to cover do ?f>^oafc to cause to cover. to swell do &f)^o-*fc to cause to sioell. to sell. do tS&^cxfc to cause to sell. to make do "^cooo-sS> to cause to make. to shut do 5&crax>o-ifc to cause to shut. sdffio to cut. ..do ox>o -& to cause to cut. (^rJ <3&>....to write do .(^J ox> ^ to cause to write. .fo throw, or put.. do scxoo-^) to cause to throw, or put* to weave do c$ox>oi&> to cause to weave* > to pour do eJ^cxoo-cfc fo cause to pour, > to fly do ^8o-v& to cause to fly. to plait do wgo-sfc to cause to plait. to return do SfcOo-i& to causeto return. todi 9 do ..^S)o-^ to cause to dig. EXCEPTIONS- to burst v. n. applied to soft...2&^r>&S$bo..fo OMr ^ v> a . [substances such as fruit &c. to ftoi/ v. n "S^C^o to boil v. a. to conceal one's self, to '55'C-i&> to hide v. a. [abscond v. n. ... .to ie weighed. . . do &r>c-> ^ im^A. to /a//, to ffi'nA; to 6e humbled. &o& to catnip to /a//, a?- sink, [to humble. to 6erf v. n do oi&> to bend v. a. > to fo rocAerf (as a child in &C-Jfc to rock. a cradle.) TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. >to be folded. makes-^b^C^...^^'-"^ to fold. to be broken do...5b-v to break. . ... to be fryed do...~3C-c$b or "5 owo-KSo to fry. . ... to sound v. n do..."srCT3bor'53~ D oooo-i&to sound v. a. or i S&oeaoC/fo I ...to be drowned, to sink...x>o-&> to drown, to sink v. a. 1 to ^rrot6- ........ makes to be stretched ..... do < to pass, to go ; added 1 to the infinitive of\ J another verb, it signi- vfies to continue. ..do. . . . .to Ze beaten in a mortar do. crushed to /6e tonz bebroken. ....... ..... to &? broken or cut ..... -\ V ...... to descend. ... ....... do... f to ^e beaten in a mor- 1 ..... < . r . j i }- \tar, to be inured ...do y . . .to be extinguished ....... do.. . . . .to be habituated ..... do.... ____ to drink . . .to cease ........... do. , . , to creep, to slide, topass } -\ > j to cause to grow, to nourish. to stretch. to eawse to pass Sfc- or 25 o^). . . .to 5ea in a mortar. or ^6X)^)..,to or -S)0o^). ... to or or or ..to break. , to .. to put or pull down. to . , to z to extinguish. to habituate. cause to drink. cause to cease. cause to creep, slide, [or pass. OF VI5KBS. 141 to wander ............ makes ^ ?$J?*?^? ......... to turn. ...... to be buried ........... do....^J T) 2&-&> ...... , ......... to bury. ...... to fade ................ xlo...."*^ ^-^ ................ to cause to fade. ...... to be roasted .......... do...^*^ 3 " 1 ^.... ............ to roast. .......... to fall. .............. do....o5ef)T& ............. .to spread. to become bad ......... do..."^^^...^^^) ...... to corrupt. to be disunited ...... do...>&b-&>- &^Q- >&$.. to leave. to be filled ............ do. . ,&o&-$o$)-$Qo-&~to Jill. to be healed, to ceasedo...&r r> &>'& ) or &r&'&..to heal, c. tobe soaked ........... do...^.^-^ or "J3"r&^) ..... tosoak,to steep. to eat ................. do...^ "^ ............. to cause to eat. to say ................. do..9$>o-!& ................... to cause to say. to hear ............... do... &?&> or )obo-i ..... f caus e to hear. tosee, to produce, to \ ?f>oOO-v& .......... .....to shew, or to deliver [bring forth ...... do. J [in child birth. .. to awake v t n ........ do..."^ 3 ^^^^) ............ to awake v. a. ...... to graze ........... ....do...- ( ') ...................... to feed cattle. > ..... to be tarnished ........ do... S&r^) ................... to tarnish. ...... to be afraid ......... do...^ < ^S)O-^ > ..... . ............ to frighten. ..... to rain ............... do^.^Q^o-SSbor^Q * 50 -^ to cause to rain. fo shine .............. do...^^^ ^ ............... to cause to shine. -g->(5b ....... to leak ................ do..." 5 " ^-^ 3 .................. to cause to leak. to arrive ............. do. . "^ftb^c ....... . ............ to cause to arrive. .to be extinguished..^. . .e3fcfx>-i&or3&*>^) ......... j extinguish. to change v. n ........ do...o^rfcWa&or^ T) fcW^)....#oc7jawYjre v. a. ...... to burn v. n .......... do...~3"e*>- z & ................ to burnv. a. 5cn>ex> ....... tofalldown ........ do...^^-^ .................. to cause to fall down. to drop down- ....... do... "S^ew-ifc or IT'exD^) .. .to cause to drop doivn. to float .............. do..."^^"^ 3 or ~3So-i^>.....fo cause to float. tomove, toshakev.n. do.^^ex>-^or S'^ -^.... to move, Sec. v. a. f X)0s>) ^50^) "J -J ( ^0*)9b,>0)0-5& ) .to go do < ? to send. 142 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR 377 tt\55bS5ix> neuter verbs in B ^> become active by changing ^3 into s o-vfc; thus tfosSew to be pleased makes SosSo-sSb to please ; ^Stg to be afflicted makes "^ao-jfc fo a^c<. 378 Roots in & of the third conjugation by changing & into ooo-cfc, and *&^ into oO^O-5>b, convert actives into causals, and neuter into active verbs, thus, to call ................ makes HoOsbo-Sfo .......... to send for. to open ............... do...fc9*>T ........ to cause to open. to bless ............... do...aSo5bo-2o ......... f cause to bless. ,..to give do...^*^O"*S 3 to cause to give. I to bring do... w$) to raise. ..to stand do....>yo<) to stop. > to bear a burden do...^n><) to load. \. . ..; to come do....& < ^o-u$bor~5" D -l& to cause to come. ...to increase* do .cj^o-i& to cause to increase. I to die do..,...T^O<) to kill. 379 The following is an example of a causal verb. Root S^&S o-c& Present verbal participle common. rS^^So-v^be^r^N . . , ro 3o-I&$$b..ctf wszVig Past .do.... i^^So^) having caused to beat. Infinitive ~*|3o-iS' or S^ ^ to cause to beat, Causal verbs do not derive any form of the present tense from the participle in 63 common. common. 3 eo OF VERBS. 143 M *Sj ^ ^" | ; jB-| V CL" r^ I ^6" \i common. AFFIRMATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. . . / cause to beat. . . . Thou earnest to beat. . .He causes to beat. . . . . Sh6) or it causes tobeat. beat. 60 common. T%ey ....... rt> 4So-5&lT ) &. . . cause to beat. I cause to beat. 7%ow catM0/ to . .. He causes to beat. She, or it causes to beat. . . . We cause to beat. cawse Thou causedst to beat. Be caused to beat. We caused to beat. You caused to beat. They caused to beat. 144 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. eo S > O' ^ . ) ?6o ....... r3o-c$b &....#JT ...... r'^o-^ ........... r^o^) ..... j eo eo ^ eo .. eo eo eo 1 common. common. common. v /e< us cause to beat' , r J \ V .... . eo eo eo J . \- common. common. \-cause ye to oeat OF VERBS. 145 . common. ^ eo eo eo RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. common. causes to beat. that caused to beat. INDEFINITE. common. common. eo VERBAL NOUN'. common. 00*104 [?r?7Z or beat. eo . ...die cauftna to beat. ' NAGATIVE VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T. o, ck'rf not, or shall not cause to beat. cfos^ wo/, A'rfsi not, or wilt not cause to eo eo eo no^, didnot,or will not, cause to beat. She. or it does not, did not, or will not cause [to beat. Jfe c?o not, did not. or shall not cause to beat. S irt> e3o-5'5b...'~ e3o5)&> You do not, did not, or ivill not cause to beat. do not, did not, or will not cause to beat. IMPERATIVE MOOD. , i y eo eo common. eo. e eo k cauge not thou to J common. , > . (cause not ye to beat. j 19 146 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. VERBAL PARTICIPLE. 3^% Q Z>$,.*... without causing to beat. RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. ."|~oSo<0 that does not, did not, or will not came to beat, VERBAL NOUN. the not causing to beat. CHAPTER SIXTH. SYNTAX. An extensive command of words, a knowledge of their various inflexions, and the choice of such as are most fit to convey our ideas, are necessary to the correct use of every language. But these alone are not sufficient: the force, the" elegance, and even the meaning of our expressions, must still depend, in a great degree, on an idiomatical arrangement of the terms which we employ. To illustrate the particular disposition of words which is most consonant to the genius of the Teloogoo language, is the object of the present chapter, and as immediately con- nected with this subject, I shall here take occasion to treat of the adverbs, con junctions, interjections, and other indeclinable words, unnoticed in the preceding part of this work. A strict adherence to the rules which have been laid down regarding the permutation and elision of letters, might possibly distract the reader's attention from the main subject of the present chapter- I shall therefore purposely neglect them, in the examples adduced in support of the following remarks, except where the observance of them may be necessary for the elucidation of any particular part of the syntax ; and in order to render the study of the Teloogoo more easy to those who have acquired a knowledge of the Tamil tongue, and to shew in what respects the two sister languages coincide, I shall endeavour as much as possible, in this part of my work, to follow the Jesuit Beschi, an author of established authority in' the Tamil language. 148 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. OF THE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES, AND THE USE OF THE POSTPOSITIONS. 380 The reader has been already informed, that in nouns denoting inanimate things, the nominative is constantly used for the accusative. This will be % explained more fully when we treat of the government of nouns by verbs. 381 The genitive, possessive, or inflected case, seldom affixes the postposition ^oos" . We constantly find TT5$bo$ oxxix^ used for Tr>s5bo^oo?f coo ew Rama's home; S?o v &> / $' for f <9^&/ &c3oq?fj53f, the court of Indra; Sfttf^ JO^PrssSw f or Sv^c-kS^D?^ sycssSoo, the arrow of Cupid; and So^&fD^tfsSw f or ol35b'c^x>:lf_?5s&D, the wealth of Koobera (the God of riches) c. Deprived of this affix, the genitive in Teloogoo has fre- quently, as in English, the power of an adjective, &&>5$QX& means a beast of the forest that is, a wild beast, <53oo~5~ D oSSbiD the season of sun shine., or the sultry season; wo&Scooi&Jf the sand of the river, or river sand ; ^5bq5)feC\J the water of the lake, or lake water. 382 Two or more substantives relating to the same object agree in case ; but if they refer to different objects, the one governs the other in the genitive ; thus, or ~)^oo|_ c3o the favour of the deity, 5o&S3p o or 35b5apC the ims of men fyc. 383 The inflected or genitive cases of substantive nouns or pronouns, with the terminations of the neuter demonstrative pronouns affixed to them, viz. & in the singular, and S) in the plural number, are constantly used, without any verb, to denote the affirmation of possession ; as 3(3~3$x^ -r that property is mine, o>j-7 l 6e>3$fcewsp>9S) these horses are theirs, &S>~&*>X)$8> that is 6<9 Rama's, ax>3\ v ^/^ra>a this belongs to the Bramin, o>n>&*&-&>v?& this garden is the Kings, 53^)_^^"^x)S6cn>^o^ia that book belongs to my father, oxn>awew;5^^o&3 ^JOft this house belongs to a Bramin. 384 The dative case has.generally the same force as the prepositions to, for iu English : thus, i f ^^^ra^^S&o-fta modesty is essential to women, "SooA' -^rooj&l? (5Co5bXCCS&o cmraye is requisite for men- It sometimes repre- sents the English genitive ; as, 3^&oo\^!ny raxx)N>?C *xx> (/& soul of a promise OF SYNTAX. 149 is truth, aS^&Si^r^ reS>ao^T?5s5oo ff ie sou i O f a woma n is her honor. Soomutee Shutukum, literally, truth is life to a promise, honor is life to a woman- The dative is also often used, without a verb, to denote actual possession, 385 as expressed by our verb to have; 39fK>8Po"EPj& n> 'eX> he has much money ; literally, to him, much money; TTW&tf A&oaiT^SxyvSO the King has ten sons, literally, to the King, ten sons- This coincides with the latin rule " Est pro habeo regit dativum," only that in Teloogoo the est is not expressed but understood. The dative case, used with the positive degree of an adjective, gives the 386 adjective the force of the comparative degree ; and the sign of the dative case serves to represent the English than; thus, ~5T>>2Sb!33&c*i)e--,& f/^ s man i s more clever than that person, literally to that person, this man is clever. In stating the distance of two places from each other, either one or both of 387 the names of these places may be in the dative case; thus, ^^Ir^Jfo-gjiSV^s&o ^r\TT > 55b^^cr^5's3bo or "^^^i^o^^?5crB < ^'Tr D S5b^^j-D^s5bo Benares and Conjeveram are 300 amadas distant ; or Conjeveram is 300 amadas from Benares. * es^o beyond, oooS'&o on this side, ~^$ above, o below, S&oo&5' 388 before, ~3>3& behind, and other words denoting relation of place, govern the preceding noun in the dative case; as &>3"15?5 above this, o^iOssoS bebio that, &&ls5boo2Stf before this, zy&l'Stfg' beyond that &c. When we speak of motion towards any place, the name of the place must 389 be in the dative ; as, <"ko S^c^oi^) he, she, or it went to the garden, \^J &** S>55"-3\r& he, she, or it went to the village- It is to be observed however, that if the object towards which motion is directed be of such a nature as not to admit of entrance, the postposition *>& or 3$MJ (near) must be inserted between the noun and the sign of the dative;, as, 13|^>^SJ c3c>i& he, she, or it went to the tfee, 13 T> 2^^A8^' r S^^) he, sfie, or it came to the. King. Nouns of time are generally placed in the dative; thus, 65>& o5o3 cxwj^TT^ 399 150 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. &> / will give it to-morrow, ^oejoo^l^^ ^ / shall come the day after to-morrow- 391 When any end, purpose, or intention is to be expressed, we may either place the noun denoting it in the dative case, or use the postposition "^&o or ^_, corresponding with the English phrases in order to, with a view that, for the purpose of, &c. &c. thus, #Xe-3$3fro &>&>&:> or ^$$0 or ^oxr#>5b cOooci) 2 ?^_ D i^)o^^"S^> in order to obtain bliss, we must put our trust in God. 392 Words expressing the different degrees of consanguinity or affinity, or denoting any connection or dependence, govern the noun, to which they refer jn the dative case. Thus, if we ask S^So'Sr >x>~5~*!3&>, Jn what relation does that man stand to you ? the answer will be & Q 3Sb- l^&3fctf ^2fc-TP'&^&g2&-i3^&&>yCfc^& he is my brother in law, father- in law, grand son, servant, or friend; literally, he is to me a brother in law, &c. &c. In Teloogoo, we may ask, as in English 2^" cO oo, w ] ia t is your name? r**><3& cO&> ivhat is your age? or we may use the dative, and say To you, what name? what age? 393 The postpositions s ^tfs&D-s^tfSo O r 2. (composed of the noun a side, 2o5So the dative case of &#, from &>$ a side, and 9ooo the past verbal participle of the affirmative mood of ^^) to become, all added to the sign of the dative case) are used nearly in the same sense as the dative itself; thus, 'ee-'5$oo'" (33's$ao O r "~6'o O r 2.^'ex>3o&o&-sr c &b he sent money for merchandize, or on account of trade. 394 Of the use of the accusative, we shall tf eat under the head " General Rules."' 395 The vocative is used precisely as in English ; but, in prefixing to nouns the vocative participles to 8-? < and cocxw } particular attention should be paid to the rank and sex of the person addressed, as explained in rule 157 ; thus, fco82S**o*r O Palanqucen bearer! k^^^e^TT'o-* Wicked woman! h>?x>-c^ O Bramin ! OF SYNTAX. 151 The local ablative, formed by the postposition W*, corresponds with our 390 prepositions in, on, upon, among &c. It points out the place where any thing is ; for example, ~^#ex>#C Xe-ofcaej^-^^fc The Gods reside in Paradise, tf^^^8^^&c&^^^l^:^b the Supreme Being in every heart; W* likewise expresses descent on any object ; thus, 3& r >toer'" 6 Sol!l5'&~s5bo the rain that falls on the earth. When it affixes the, particle f&oS), derived from G5O-&, the past verbal participle of Gso-Kk, to place, it expresses motion out of a place; as Tl8er'' 6 ?&o-i5 j^^x>'&5 < ^$> the flood comes flowing out of the Canary, ^&^tfoX'Sk^s5boer r5 ;&o-atffr& / came out of Seringapatam. W* is also used in comparison, and makes the comparative or superlative 397 degree, according as the objects spoken of are two, or more ; thus, "S^S&e)^ faDoeJ^T^SxwS^SodSb Rama is superior to Lutchmana ; literally among Rama and Lutchmana ; Rama is superior ; Sfc&sSjDgoerSTT^ewwo^oefcex) among men, kings are the most powerful; literally, the powerful The particle , or the drootuprucrootica afnxes&>&c may somtimes be added to fiT*, which, in this state, is often attached to nouns, in comparison ; and the same noun twice repeated, either with, or without this addition, has the force of a superla- tive ; thus, "io&oer 6 ^ or er r ~i)2$ the poorest of the poor, s&j-o^xis-oer 6 ;^ or er r6 3&cre3Ve-l 3$;xDCxo^-sr>2& he has given medicine internally. In the ablative, it has the same meaning as the English prepositions within, inside, &c. as o^o^er^Soe; within the house, ~"^f|beJ y4 > 5oe> inside the box. is an adverb of the same meaning as er^sSo, formed by adding T, 399 152 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. the infinitive of the root, && to become, to the postposition er^ ; as ^-gyvicr ^ h e came inside. 400 W* is often prefixed to the verbs &&> to fall, or 9q) to become, which then signify to submit, to yield &c. corresponding to the English phrase to yivk in. eT^So &~3~(& he has submitted- 40 L The postposition "-S^, or it's contraction , the sign of the ablative term- ed instrumental, is itself the inflected ablative case of the irregular l r /vx> noun "-S o*^ the hand. It represents the cause or agency by which any effect is produced, and may generally be translated by the English preposition by ; thus, CT*|'^axro^jfc& i :#^o;5s>ga the world was created by God, $&-^^&3^Sto-MtoS&)t58> the earth is cooled by rain. To the postpo- sition "-wS", as well as to SS^rS" or %>, which are synonymous with it, the drootuprucrootica affixes ?& c, are often added ; as, rSr^Soc^ifejJ&ir ^ heat is produced by the sun, cS^r^Xs&^o^ or "-p^?^"S^>$xS5oD/Cy2&> ifcw is attainable by sacrifice : literally by the sun, heat-by sacrifice, bliss. 402 &* the sign of what we have named the social ablative, is equivalent to the English preposition with\ o\, ^?5^ S&n'ftb S)^ 5 ^"^^^) // ie father came ivith his son, TT^^^^^oay^i5^^i7'^b^'oax)^_^e5 rt 'o'B^) viewing Rama with my eyes, my mind ivas satiated ; 3^^, the infinitive of the verb Scr ^ to join, generally written by the vulgar &~o~t&, is often added to &* to strengthen the connection; thus, ^S^^^TST'tfs&^'Sj^p tell him to come along with me- *9& and t^^io^ are not so much in use as <^- 403 The postposition $, affixed only to nouns denoting inanimate objects end- ing in ^>, has occasionally the power of each of the three ablatives above mentioned; thus, l? ( ^>?5'S3o2&K)O~5l?& the fruit ripened on the tree, th e hing sat upon the throne, ^5o^5 he staid at home from joy, a)e)^bo?5'^^s5X"sr o he vanquished his enemies by his prowess. 404 The inflected ablative, peculiar to the irregular "BSTcsfo) nouns, has the OF SYJSTAX. 153 same power with respect to these nouns, as the postposition 3 has with regard to nouns in v> denoting inanimate objects ; thus, S&v>oA~^rT>fc>s$)tf^a # ^ / /^ OTOM ^ f Ss5bto & f/ ie WM f f ft^k> i the nail, Zote$Q&~*r&> he bit with kis teeth, (literally, with the tooth) i saw w i t j L my eyes ^ (literal^ w i tn tne eye ^ -^#;&ov he held the bow lolth his hand, S>o&c*5oxx> arc nominatives of two e^^MSfcS&o nouns, fre- 405 quently used as postpositions; >&>jo&> denotes some cause, reason, corresponds precisely with our word respecting, or respect in such phrases as "in this respect," "in one respect-" The use of these words as postpositions will be best understood by the following examples. I purchased this house for you, or on your account, he spoke respecting the marriage, "T5" i3"3~ o;? he wrote respecting affairs of state: s JoS&o O r s <^ mentioned in rule 393, has often the same meaning as ^*^_2^ ; thus, we say StoSxM oiro" : S^oocb r ^c^5s5bo or ^"cC^xT^^^ o^S), / came on purpose to ^Bj see you- , t9o^ i s nearly synonymous with the postposition ^ r6 . The difference 406 between them will be best defined by examples; thus, S5^S$ooeT'" and zS$x> r5oC&> both mean in the garden or forest, but the former refers more strongly than the latter to the inside ; "O^^JOeT^j a nd "S^3oocSbG&>$'_j both mean faith in Rama, but the former expression denotes the faith that exists within Rama, the faith that he possesses in others ; the latter phrase denotes the faith which others have in him. SS"*3 is derived from the root S^ex) which signifies to resemble ; it denotes 407 similitude, likeness &c. thus, ^ooS"s$bo^"S> like Vycoontha, (the residence of Vishtnoo) "ST^"3 like me: the word ^"^ whence ^^ is immediately derived, is used, in books, instead of ^"3; but being part of an active verb, it always governs the accusative, instead of the inflexion, and the So of sJr*^3 is, in this case, changed into >, the accusative preceding it being included in the 20 154 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. class of drootuprukrootooloo ; thus ?fo^"3 like me, IS like Vycoontha. 408 ;&o-;&o> are used to denote motion from a place ; as ?f"es$Dd;5o c3oo<5'&ro3'sS;x> how far is it t y/'om Madras to Masulipatam ? 409 The following are a few examples shewing the mode in which most of the other common postpositions are used, cxwocj* O r cooo^S6.pSo^?5 or between the houses, ~5J~) or 'ar x >)13oK>Go or ~3?5's5'-uJ^'r3~ 2& f ie came or after him, ^oSsoA'clcSo GISTS' a>3f&-T B < ^r& / ,#/ ^ ye z7 in (or after) two hours; in this last example, 13oa)& cannot be used, because it refers ex- clusively to situation, Dot to time. Q*>o&3 or ocoo&Sc^o&jw opposite the house, < 5b~7V opposite the garden- 410 Soro-fts- governs the accusative, thus ; q)> ?<&*-- or ?^> ^e performed penance to (or on account of) Shiva, -Oe-^r cxx)73^(*^b /jg i^g/j^ towards the city* 411 The very useful and common postposition S^n=JS OH, wpow, has been omitted, by mistake, from the list of the postpositions given in rule 130 ; it denotes rest on a place, and governs the noun preceding it in the oblique case ; as 3fc~*Sx> SXr* on the earth &c. 412 The postpositions of which the following are examples are found only in books :TrS*>y&tffcf& o r &w~& ) $x>c!z<:~7\&>jRamaiventivith Viswamitra, ^oc^?& Parvatee departed with Shiva, ^^s5ao^T"5b or TSpC/sy 'y^s-o-a^ / prayed ivith faith, 2^e3|j3C(Sl9e- through learning, fame accrues, fc ^(O^r^ex) (60^*^x0^)8 the people are pleased by your coming, cS5oS5cx3 victory is attainable by prowess. 413 With the exception of c&^Jl, all cases of substantive nouns or pronouns formed by postpositions ending in *", such as ^^ % <"*& w^A, "S~^> outside, OF SYNTAX. \~)~) ~^> above, upon, l> doivn, below, S>*$ near &c. &c. when immediatly follow- ed by other substantives with which they agree, change the final ^ of these postpositions into 9 ; thus, S^w G^DSto the friends hip with you, X~ 133 iS"" k><^> the gardens icithout the gate, o~BS>coo)ax>o&:> the houses above the terrace. rT> oSSofi)"^eJex) the lands below the mountain, So^caS^D^a^^sSwex) SO CO the gardens near the city, O2o5b>o5"|oS5j3o the wealth of the god of riches, literally the wealth near the god of riches. In such constructions, the o of the postposition ^>Ou; is changed into ^& ; thus, "ST'cX&o&Qg'oors the regard towards me. OF THE FORMATION OF VARIOUS CLASSES OF NOUNS. Nouns denoting the agent are often formed by adding to the inflexion of a 414 noun substantive the pronoun sr^c^b for the masculine, and && for the femi- nine; thus, from ^o&3 ? the inflexion of ^x> a house, is formed cxwo&S >-*> C5& a house owner, from ^^ 5 the inflexion of Soo& fruits, 5~5r- > c5Sc a shopkeeper c. Sec- Nouns in &>, however, in this con- struction, are not placed in the inflexion, but change the final S5 into^), thus; 76&9^x) ahorse, makes Aoes^^fC^b a horsekeeper. &) - Gc) When the agent to be denoted is familiar, or contemptible, ~3^C<*&> j s some- 415 times used instead of 3PC2&, and 8T'J3 instead of ^S* 5 thus, from friendship, comes "-SOsyD^T^ a female friend ; thus, also, we say ra&e, tv r 'Xc ; ^)~5^ > C^b a coxcomb, a good looking fellow, $~ D /"Ccoo?f Jjl ow affected female, a fine girl. Nouns denoting the agent are also formed from e^S&3&o nouns in Sfio, 416 by changing that termination into ; thus, from S5s^ anger, comes ^ *> w angry person, from sb" T> Soxx> ^zw, -^p } S) a sinner, from a)obo strength, wO a strong person, from e/^^^) covetousness, d^^) ^ miser. Besides the verbal noun denoting the action itself which the verb signifies, 417 there are many abstract nouns derived from verbs : some of these abstract nouns are the same as the roots themselves ; thus, from 156 TELOOGOO C4RAMMAK. the root l~3co; &_ ...to salute comes... ~2o3i o ...salutation. ^ .x "u \__^/ o do X5ex>so to S p ea k do SoewSo a word. do o3ooo to fcop do EbsScoSo a leap. do &rc;6 to sleep do e&rG>io sleep. do .."Sex)C/^o ; s/ tz - w, it is changed into *o to fear ^2^^) .fear. to qlarc "Sofeso^)... lightning. .....to stab ZF&Q) a stab. to cry.... . ., oOc^c^) weeping. ....to forget 3&ef>^>) .forgetfulness. to learn ~c35b < $) skill. to vanquish ~^ew^) victory, success. to suffer patiently V^Sb^) patience. ...to think tfwc^j) thought. / bear a burden ~3xro<$) a loador burden. to ee -c^r<^). sz^/. to cpprove ,"^>S^> approbation.' 419 Some are formed from roots in cSfco by changing that syllable into ^), and if 9 precede cS&> it is changed in ^>. to tighten )76>?) tightness. OF SYNTAX. 157 Others are formed from roots in c*&> or -&> by changing the final ctfco O r 420 to t$ or *$. to weave ~^>C texture. to sound, to roar IpJ'.C.jS' a roaring. \ co :<3&o to write (^*J<$ writing. to draw a line "& a line. to shut... ...&xr a lid. -to deliver -< V deliverance. ....* .....dreaming- Some are formed by changing the final O of the root into &. 421 to trust.., 6 ex> to float $)" lightness. ...to be fatigued 55icD?f tiresomeness. to govern &&& a governor. ...to hope o 8s hope. Some abstract nouns are formed from roots in <2& and <&> by changing &o 422 to *, and &> to o&o. ....to burn... 56boeo a flame,. ,...to cook ^k> cooking. & to sing -rb>. ....... a song. ....to say ^>ok> a saying. i to buy jT'oib purchase. The following abstract nouns are irregularly formed from their respective 423 roots. >...tobe tired... . ...?f)e)Cif-Gf > o'4)-^5ocxxj'.?f)O(5^... tiresomeness. .to graze ~&)-~3oC.. .grazing. 5. ..tomake a noise 3er D C&'-:r o c5' a noise, a cry. to shoot, or sprout. . , tt ~^x>^.~S>x>ji,-'^r ^ a sprout. 158 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR- ^oc-i^b...to disturb ...'e>Ce'-'e)CS' a disturbance. fold ?Sb2fc3)-5$b# a fold. & to sell OSfc^afc-WSv^ofc) a sale. remain SSo/fcexJ-S^XCf remainder. > to fo or mz'rfe dsotoJ^Sl residence. ..to eat 8ok-8o eating. ...to hear oj&s-oj&s&.... hearsay, informa- \tion. ...to resemble ^jpJf.S&^O^ ...resemblance. . ..to sow S) &>-) e^rSoSw , seed. ,...to miss....* So39-(""e>o a place. ..to pain ~^* ) < ^ / pain. > to have *fDv> ..riches. ....to plough ^s ex}^; service. 1 serve makes... j Iwhen it means to) prc^.^ / >s Oe> a measure. {measure makes j r^?era makes Soofc) a product of the earth and SSoSSb fruit. 424 A great number of abstract nouns are formed by adding the termination 5c5;5x> f. o "^^ QsSoo adjectives, and sometimes to osf CS&D nouns, or even occa- sionally to the relative participles of w^CS^x) verbs; thus, from the adjective & o-S good comes. .....S^o^^^s^xi goodness. do ^ great do A ) 5^r5 >x>.... greatness. do ^J? ^ M ^ ^ 5fcc|{r5 s^o dullness. do $"* ....... beautifull. ...do ^S"^ ^(^o5w beauty. dp "$^t swzaZ/ do -SJr^J^S'S^x) smallness. thus, also, from the substantive >> child, ,,.,,,do, a)ej^^^o childhood. OF SYNTAX. 159 and from the relative f that is, was, or ^ participle ~3)cSo!0 ......... J .* l&cX$otf tf sSbo ignorance. (_ will not be known) i s never added to any except pure ""&> words. tives or substantives of any termination become abstract nouns 425 by affixing $$\x> or $'; as, .great., heavy makes. ../^oSoe^S&o... O r.. .&>&>& ...greatness, weight. siatf, %fa ..... do ....... otf3$a>. M or.. . . ^^....smallness, lightnees. ..... hard ......... do ....... $&^~.or. .a master ....... do ...... ii$6t$\3&or iS3 $&&.. mastership. a Aero ........... do ....... )>fo>...or. ...>& ....... heroism. valiant. ......... do ...... OF ADJECTIVES. In the fourth chapter of this work, we have so fully explained the mode in 426 which adjectives agree with substantives, that little remains to be added res- pecting that part of syntax. The adjective is generally placed before the substantive noun or pronoun with 427 which it agrees; as ofoo> ,25* /S^E-asc^o a good bramin, ^" S) (^ ) ia good woman, "-3^/1oe3^>3 a bad horse, ~Z>& <035:)(>x a beautiful person. In English, when the verb to be, in any of it's variations, comes between a 428 * substantive and an adjective, the sense may be well expressed in Teloogoo by placing the adjective after the substantive ; but, in this case, the verb to be is not expressed, but only understood in Teloogoo. A "S^CsSoo adjective has no gender or number, except what it receives from the word to which it is prefix- ed ; it is therefore necessary, when it thus follows it's substantive, to add to it the pronouns "S^Ci&b or ef>a, or ~5J*5b or 9), according to the gender and number of the substantive with which it agrees, thus, in the phrases that bra-* min is good ^(^y^Sr^e^c 3b;5b 0-^-53-00^0, those bramins are good * 5 \^J*&^ > ?&>zx)SSoo&~sr*8o t that woman is good &\ ^)55bofi>, these women are aood "^, ff?/ ^S&0-O-P&> ? that horse is #oe?rf ^fe^SSbo-oa, tfa se horses are 1GO TELOOdOO GRAMMAR. yood -^^OgoSppyoS^O^ no verb is used, the adjective merely follows it's substantive, the pronouns in question being at the same time affixed to the adjective, because it belongs to the l^QS&o c l a ss. But && \35b3oo adjectives do not admit of the addition of these pronouns, because they possess within them- selves the distinction of gender and number: thus, using a eC^5oibo adjective, instead of a lsfC5$x> one, we should say thatbramin is good *3\?5* j Scr raa c<%b r$ . S$jDc Sib, that ivoman is yood & fo^ A^, sSjpTT'ew, that horse is yood ^^> &> ^\"^f ^ see rule 289 > &c - 429 Many substantives are converted into adjectives, by affixing the word Xo possessing, from the root sTex>^ ; thus, >e)xx>A''o possessing strength, strong, ax)&Xo wise, that is possessing tvisdom, cOO^o^Xa> happy, possessing happi- ness, <^c5,xbo/'Co wealthy, possessing wealth, &c. &c. 430 In Teloogoo, the degrees of comparison are formed, not by any change in the adjective itself, but by the use of certain particles. In treating of the post- positions, the manner t in which 1-^"^ - er^s and &*^&> arc employed in com parison, has been fully explained ; and it only remains here to observe that the words " ?^)ind ^o~eo are often affixed, in a similar manner, to the inflexions of substantive nouns or pronouns, to express the comparative degree- It is generally thought that ^<^.is the past relative participle of the root s"?& to see, signifying that has seen, and that ^o eo is the subjunctive of the same verb signifying if anyone see', thus, w>?ffv^x>O)&~S2SD there is nothing better than this signifies, literally, to those that regard this, there is nothing better ; and &^o~eos5co>S~e3*> there is nothing better than this, literally translated, means, if you look at this, there is nothing better. But it seems more probable that these particles are derived from the corresponding parts of the root ?>& to say, added to the dative case, and that ^<^ is formed of 5 or and ^f^, and ?f o~eb of ^ or and 55o~eo . y f or if these particles were derived from the active verb s'cfo to see they would govern the accusative, instead of the inflexion ; but we say "^r'o"ec never r^a^ST'o b than me; in this sensc ; the abovemenlioned OF SYNTAX. 161 expressions, literally translated, would mean to those that speak of this, nothing is better ; and if you speak of this, nothing is better. The superlative degree is generally formed by prefixing to the adjective the 431 words >S3-w very, Po'CF 9 much, &c. thus, >55ncozx>a;JoQe&&> a very wise man, SoT^K^SS^oooex) a very large house. To express the wisest, the greatest, &c. the phrase 9o>Q'o"'to than all is used for the masculine and feminine, and S3^3?fo So than all things for the neuter. If we would express the wisest man we must say in Teloogoo ^oQ^o""&;ax>aooe$bb that is, the man wiser than all* If we would express the largest tree we must say S g'o "to FT* s5^ ^& $x>, or the tree larger than all, ^>o d $ o "to TT* 35^ the greatest of men, ^otfSS'o &~*r*&* are the only forms to be employed in the colloquial use of the language; that in -i&^r^J& is seldom found except in books, and to distinguish the other three from it, the word common has been always prefixed to them, in the conjugation of the verbs. These rules cannot be too strongly impressed on the memory of the student. The two forms of the present tense, derived from the verbal participles 434 ending inf&^,, spring originally, like those participles themselves,from theauxi- 21 162 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. liary verb &o<5fc to be. They consist in fact of the participles in &> or & with that tense of &O3& which commences with & "i 7 *^^ affixed to them, thus, &,3oT&-ifc or &S)o-z&&>, w j t h ^isr^jfr affixed, by the rules for sund.hi given in the second chapter, become respectively S)Oa&-i&'sr c < ^&> O r a>0TSbC&>*r^?&. The verb cso&b, therefore, cannot, in any of it's forms, be affixed to the verbal participles in f&^, because it has already been added to them : but, in the common dialect, when we wish to mark more strongly the present time, we lengthen the final *o of the verbal participles in *& or *&, and, without sund,hi, add to them the abovementioned tense of &o&* 3 which is commonly written &~fFj&>', thus, &*&&*$)'&*(& or ^ > ^ 3 ^ r '$)^ r> < ^^ denotes that I am now beating, V^^^TO^TT^^J that I am now writ- ing, &c. &c. 435 The perfect tense is used to denote past time, precisely in the same manner as the corresponding tense in English. It does not therefore here require any elucidation. 436 The first form of the future tense scarcely ever occurs, except in studied, compositions ; and the use of the second form is not common. In lieu of this tense, the present is constantly used; thus, ~3w&r5o"-S?^e3|or8S^S)^->o5' ^"^o otf iJaer^^fttfoXSkwsfco'^&ir'ffc having left Madras to-day, I shall arrive at Seringapatam within the 15th of next month, literally / arrive; o^&y^cx>oo<^;5jvn>r& I shall come to your house to-morrow, literally I come, c^ewo&2rzjo(^"^ j^rfo IsJiall write the letter the day after to-morrow, literally I write : a thousand other examples might be added. The use of the aorist for the future is explained in the following rule. 437 The affirmative and negative aorists express, according to the context, the present, the past, or the future ; but I beg the reader will bear in mind that, in the common dialect, they are most generally used in a future sense. The following examples will best shew the nature of this tense (Past) S' )&?&<) 8f5oex>8"7Y;$b- So2&>, &), c&o&53b. Before the commencement of the Caleyoogum men lived exactly a hundred years, (Present) cwosS^&cxOTrvQ at present thty live on an average OP SYNTAX. 163 55 years, (Future) ow^&77 c T^TF*7^^;5'o^cifo^l\raSx>q)& and by degrees the length of human life will be greatly shortened, (Past) l^>Qo P frl^&^&of&^fto-GJp c0^jS-*2$w'Q There existed formerly a very intimate friendship between Davadatta and me, (Past) oSr*oofe3S^ ,a?5o;5'x5b^;& ^i&^^^&c^o&SiSj" 6 ^:^ he came to my house frequently, and I ivent to his, (Present) ^^^-5Te^iT'^^^^X^O^b-5r^oooo4SsJr^o ) -^fcb S$T*cxo3~cr<&b a present, as enmity exists between us, 1 never go to his house, and he never comes to mine* In the common dialecj, we constantly say ^^"^(gb^ I shall do so, &n>5b#e&75^ w itt you comet "&&7F<& / shall V> O not come &c. In fact, the student can seldom err in translating the English future by the Teloogoo aorist. In explaining the Teloogoo aorist in English, he must be guided chiefly by the context. OF THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND TENSES OF VERBS. The present, the past, the future, and the aorist, are the only tenses men- 438 tioned in the conjugation of the verb- The compound tenses, formed by auxiliary verbs, were reserved for consideration in this place. Tenses corresponding with the imperfect and pluperfect in English are 439 formed by prefixing the present and past verbal participles of any verb to the perfect tense of ^so&b to be ; thus, IMPERFECT. I was singing. Thou wast singing. He, she, or it was singing, ....... ...We were singing- 5b"<3&c&" qt$)o&38 ........................ . You were singing. 1 - They were singing. 164 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. PLUPERFECT. 7 had sung. Thou hadst sung. He, she, or it had sung. We had sung. ..... ......... had sung. 440 For example, if we say to/ten Bharata came to Oude, his eldest brother Rama was going to the forest. As far as regards the present time, Bharata's arrival is past, as well as Rama's departure, but the two actions were simul- taneous, and this is represented by adding the past tense of &ob to be to the present verbal participle of ^^) to go ; but if the actions denoted by both verbs are not only past as regards the present time, but the action denoted by one verb is antecedent to the action denoted by the other, then the past verbal participle is prefixed to the past tense of &o<5&, to form, the pluperfect; thus, before the King returned to the city, from the field of battle, a son had been born to him. The return of the King and the birth of his son are both past, but the birth was antecedent to the King's return. 441 Certain other tenses are formed by affixing to the infinitive of any verb particular tenses of the verbs &*$) to go, S'ew/fo to possess, to be able, ^^ to learn, t crex> to suffice, and &>^) to be able, used as auxiliaries. The original verb remains in the infinitive, -whilst these auxiliaries are conjugated through all the persons of the tenses thus used. S^ 6 ^ to go. The present, perfect and aorists of this verb may be affixed, as in English, to the infinitive of any verb, to denote a future signification ; but the infinitive AX. M. M. fr F. or with being a \&>j &\*jQ&&, the 55 of *T$b is, in the superior dialect, changed into 3, according to rule .115; thus, I am going to sing. Thou art going to do. F. $ N. or c>...He, she, or it is going to see. We are going to write. You are going to send. N. > .............. They are going to say fyc. 'ex>fto to be able. the affirmative, and ^5f& the negative aorist, together the perfect tense of this verb, added to the infinitive of any other verb, imply the possession, or want, of power or ability : the of ^ew^o, however, is changed into K when preceded by an infinitive, or any other word of the class named ^j^^J^^^' I can sing. Thou canst do. M.F.QN. M. F.SfN. He, she, or it can see- We can write* you can send. M.%F. M.SfF. N. 7%^ can tell. '...../ cannot sing. Thou canst not do. M. F.SfN. He, she, or it cannot see. We cannot write. You cannot send. M. %p. N. .i .............................. -..They cannot tell. I could sing. Thou couldst do. -T i TELOOttOO GRAMMAR. . ......... .. ................ He, she, or it could see- c*5ocXC)A9o .............................. We could write. , .......... .......You could send. N. They could tell. &c- is a contraction of fflbtf&&c$& See. ; the former sometimes imply- ing futurity, but the latter ability only ; IScS&cXorfo ma y mean either I will or I can do, but "-^ci5oCXex>?$o&>f& means only lean do: the relative parti- ciple ^ is often used, after an infinitive, in a future sense ; the phrase l5cCoC XejcDf^^jSo^ex) the requests which I am about to make, occurs at the com- mencement of almost every Teloogoo letter addressed by an inferior to a person in a superior station. TS-wJifr- to learn. The affirmative and negative aorists, and the perfect tense of this root^added to the infinitive of any verb, have the same power as the corresponding tenses of rex>/6- . ....... I can sing. Thou canst do. He, she, or it can see. rsr* ; cJ> ee-5xx> ............................... We can write. ~i?&bE-5b ................................. You can send. M.fyF. N. $^ 9&r-$b -l-ifcs-?& ................... They can tell. I cannot sing. Thou canst not do. M. F. % N. .... .................... Jff t she, or it cannot see, We cannot write. -t5'~r3>'&> ........................... ' .......... You cannot send. M. F. IV. ~ . ..... They cannot tell. OF SYNTAX. 167 1 could sing. Thou couldst do- ............. He, she, or it could see. ,cSb~<3)e-x> ............................... We could write- -88 ................................ You could send- M. ^ F. N. They could tell. to suffice, co^) to be able. The affirmative and negative aorists of these verbs are used, after infinitives, in the same manner as the corresponding tenses of s ex>/fo and ~J$-&~ but the infinitive being included in the \&y & A^)"^ 6 ^ tne "^ of "^ew is changed into ar* and the $u O f **>'& into ~^ r in conformity to rules 115 and 92. sb-'>Sc~ t 'ex>&>?& ............... ... ............. / can sing. . . . Thou canst do. He, she, or it can see. .......... . ................ We can write. You can send. N. They can tell 1 cannot sing. Thou canst not do. M. F.frN. . ........... He, she, or it cannot see. We cannot write. 23^050 .................... , .............. You cannot send. M. # F. N. They cannot tell. 2 can sing. Thou canst do. He, she, or it can see. We can write. , ..... (.,... .Few can send. TELOOGOO GBAMMAR. M. $ F. N. They cm tell I cannot sing- Thou canst not do. M. F. & N. f[ ) s / l&) or n cannot see. \"3ff* j&&~f$r*iS35& .................... ............. We cannot write* You cannot send. M. # F. N. ) ............................ They cannot tell. The affirmative and negative aorists of 3crcSo to join are sometimes placed after an infinitive, and conjugated through all the persons, in the same manner as the corresponding tenses of ^ex> : they denote expediency rather than ability ; but the use of the third person neuter only of these tenses is more correct, as explained hereafter. 442 Some other tenses are formed by affixing to infinitives the third person neuter only of certain tenses of a few verbs, used as auxiliaries. In this case the nomi- native only undergoes a change; the original verb remains in the infinitive, and the auxiliary in the 3d person neuter of the singular number. 2f~3;5> or JJSJcOjS'a the third person of the past tense, and SS"oc8c?& the third person of the affirmative aorist of the root ^Octfoo, when affixed to the infinitive of a verb, imply obligation or neecssify without reference to any particular time. They may be translated by the English auxiliary must) and are governed by any of the three persons in the nominative case ; thus, 13 .^"ScSbC ")&> } must do, &q)>^r8oT5''~3,3> you must enquire, "Srcbl5~ 55"e3&> he must come. The third person neuter of the negative aorist of this verb is irregular, namely SS"e>J52&> or S5"o&>, more commonly contracted into *>&> It is used negatively, in the same manner as the affirmative tenses above mentioned ; but, when affixed to infinitives, it has rather an imperative than an indicative meaning, and is therefore applied more frequently to the second and third persons than to the first; as, $$)~&*& dont come, "5T'5b S^tf&J let them not go- Interrogatively, however, it is sometimes used with the first person, &'&~7y o )7& must I not come ? OF SYNTAX. 169 These tenses of the verb e;cC6o are also occasionally added, in the same indeclinable state, to nouns in the nominative case, to denote want or desire. In this construction, the affirmatives 5~e3r&-<3' does not require it; thus, fcw$x>-zr*-^$~&> I want a horse, /e3S&>-^r o o;5'2> //<, not want a e9 es co horse. The noun denoting that which is wanted is placed in the nominative case, btit the noun or pronoun denoting the person who desires or wants is placed in the dative. t^3& or t^& the third person neuter of the past tense, and tfX&> the third person neuter of the negative aorist of the root &fc to be becoming, decent, Jit, proper, &c. are respectively used, after infinitives, to express propriety or impropriety, without reference to any particular time, and may be considered to represent the English auxiliary ought : the * may be changed into after an infinitive, see rule 115. / ought to do. sro;cSocKa .............................. Thou ouqhtest to write. ^^ o 9 or ^^TxT^^CSSXa ......... . ............. He, she, or it ought to read. ~5os5bo'i9' 8*^)o3cS;Ca ............ . ......... We ought to be there. . X'a ................................ You ought to stand. They ought to send. I ought not to do, fyc. fyc> and ~S T3 &>, the third persons neuter of the affirmative and negative aorists of the root ^-&>^ to come, are respectively added to infinitives to denote liberty or want of liberty ; thus, l^ "^05055" -v&\f3o .................................. I may do. , ..... Thou mayst urite- or &&-->& &>\&> ................... He, she, or it may read. ...We may be there. You may stand. ............. They may send, 22 170 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. ~^;& : Cc*)o~<5" ?& .................... ............ I may not do. ), sriCi3oT3" > 2fc ......... . v ................... Thou mayst not write. He, she, or it may not read. We may not be there. . . .You may not stand. They may not send. and tf"5*&>, the third persons neuter of the affirmative and nega- tive aorists of the root 3cr2& to join are added to infinitives to denote, possi- bility or impossibility, the % being changed to X according to rule 115, thus, . ........... I can do. Thou canst write. or 9&T^>S5'c *2&&3 ........ ......... He, she, or it can read. We can be there. You can stand. They can send. I cannot do. Thou canst notwrite. or ^5a^255^C7SJ5D .................. He, she, or it cannot read. We 'cannot be there. You cannot stand- They cannot send. 443 Various negative compound tenses may be formed by affixing the several tenses of the verb &*& to go, to the negative verbal participle of any verb : the original verb remains in the negative verbal participle, whilst the auxiliary tsnses of sfr*^>) are conjugated through all the persons; thus, ..... ........... I didnot write. .. .............. Thou wilt not read. Twill not fail to send. e have already explained, under rule 441, that O& - 13^) - ~ - $), the negative aorist of the root Ifex)^, when added to infinitives as an auxiliary, denotes want of ability, as I cannot &c. Put it is often used alone as an original defective verb, representing the negative of the perfect tense of & o to be ; thus, there... ......... &_&~3&>. .1 was not there. ....Thou wast there, . , ..W2T_1^). . TViow was/ wo/ was there ......... ...W r e were not there. ...... liou were there ......... ^^_^"^5o...Fott were not there. M. Sf F. M . Sf F. ..... They were there ........ W J_^lj5b... r^y were wo< ^ere. N. N, were *fo?re ...... ^^^"^^...r/j^ were wo/ there. In these two senses &&> agrees with it's nominative in gender and number. l5&>, the neuter of the third person singular, is used indeclinably, in two other senses, as explained under the head " Particles." Condition or contingency, is expressed, in the superior dialect of the Teloo- 445 goo, by changing the final vowel of each of the different persons in the first forms of the several affirmative tenses into ~= s > ; and in the common dialect, by merely changing the termination 8$ of the first person in the first form of the past tense into ~w ; thus, in the superior dialect, from ^koxSrsr ^) ...... I beat ............ comes. &* *&> &73*2j& ..... if I beat- / have beaten ............ r*gS"^!D ............ if 1 beat. I shall beat ................. ~~?o&!$!0 .......... if I beat. I 1 beat, did beat, ' ' eo t, f ' > ...... \ , , , (r\ ' j, , ' > ...... S &X5&o <3^ if I heat or shall beat \ eo vv J if ld0t I shall do ................ "3^>&~l3s ......... 7///o. TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. .I bless ..... . I blessed. .......... ......... >o-a'&ls ........... if I bless. Ishallbless ............. &SjG^>$lo .Iblessed &S>03~3 f 'f 2 bles s,&. do. 364 t A & 0\ -"* to ujoJ (O 446 The word ending in "^ $ vaiies with the numbers and persons, thus ; ri ...... . ........... ^ifo ................ if I do. Sing ......... <.2... ............... fb8~a$ ................. ifthoudo. f.3 J/. F. $ N....^~^^ .................. if he, she, or it do. ifwedo- I 2 ..... .... ......... "^^fgO^ ............... if you do. -S ~ but the word terminating in -|f is used for every person and number, ~-8>j means if I, tJiou, he, she, it, we, you, or they do. 447 Although the above examples are translated in English by the present tense of the subjunctive mood, it is to be observed that, in the superior dialect, tho e g . present tense with & is seldom used, the past tense with $ often occurs in a past, or future, as well as in a present conditional meaning; the future tense with , > is used in a future conditional sense only, and the aorist with ^ in a conditional sense, indefinite as to time ; thus, f TT'C & qo) -SSoTJ^'C 1B ) -J V (c?;&5b>&W& ......... J Present. . . . - V If he goes, he icill meet him. F SYNTAX^ r 3 Past.. // the king governs the kingdom veil, his j ^>7V^oXb5b ............ j subjects icill be happy. \\f\ a present sense ......... j J sJlould come to-morrow, I will speak Future n a past sense O ^) 55 "S J5 "S S)" { \ ...!/ you come to-morrow, I will give. - ' come to-morrow, I will give. In the common dialect, this form of the verb is not restricted to any time ; but, according to the context, represents a present, past, or future conditional meaning. ............. If I give, he will come. ...... If I give to-morrow, he icill come. ....... If I had given yesterday, he would have [come' By using the conditional form of the verb Gs ocSb to be, commonly written 448 ^)o co } with the present or past verbal participle of any other verb, we give that verb a present or past conditional meaning; thus, "S^^^^o 000 ^^ S&oUC o^dT'S355oo?5So^ ^cn'^)o"t3 ^^5bo'o"to sfcooJ&TT* "-vfc^;& if Devaduttu, be now going to the pearl fishery, he will arrive before all the rest, /]f Europe ships had arrived before this period, these articles would not have become so dear. by rule 364, 0-5K jnay be contracted into 174 TBLOOGOO GRAMMAR. 449 In the superior dialect, each of these conditional forms of the verb, by affixino- c*&>, represents the English subjunctive with the words although, notwithstanding prefixed to it; thus, #!$$<*&> although I come, came, or should come. The same meaning is expressed by the past relative participle of the verb, with the addition of the indeclinable particle f& in the superior dia- lect, and So^^^or "7^^ in the common dialect; thus "^cb, ^-S^tf^. or o^^"^" 7 ^ ^ 1 ^ although he come, came, or should come, ?^ although he give, gave, or should give; ~Z5~c &>(^rJ he write, wrote, or should write ; when "TVS 1 $^ is added, the final *" of the past relative participle is lengthened; thus, SS-3^ *>- A "<^, never ^^N^" 7 ^ ^^^; and the past relative participle itself, with the final * thus lengthened, is often used in this sense; as, TJ^C^b^^'Sr although he come, came, or should come. 450 The conditional form of any verb may also be expressed in the common dialect by adding to it's past relative participle the particles ^>ox> ~Q an( j _ ^ CO as - -- or they do. ^c\x> o i s composed of the particle ^^ meaning so as, as if, and fc9ooo w the conditional form of the root 9$) to become ; &rc3o^r is com- posed of the same particle ^^, and 3<5?oivx> the third person singular in the first form of the past tense of &&, with it's final o changed into ~~. 451 When the condition or contingency is of a negative nature, it is expressed in the superior dialect by adding -= 5 to the respective persons of the negative aorist, and in the common dialect by affixing to the negative verbal participle the common conditional form of ^) to go or ra oc to oe; thus, in the supe- rior dialect we say if I do not beat, have not beaten, or shallnot beat. dfthou dostnot do, hastnot done, or wilt not do. ifJi e d oes n0 f bless, has not blessed, or will not bless. and in the inferior dialect. or GO or &3o-tfoo"t3 If I } thou, he, she, it, we, you, or they beat, do, or bless-havs beaten, done, or blessed - oi\shall beat, do, or bless. OF SYNTAX. 175 CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES. VERBAL PARTICIPLES. There- is no part of the verb of more frequent occurrence in Teloogoo than the verbal participles, with the proper use of which, therefore, it is of great importance that the student should be well acquainted : they can never, like the English participles, be used as adjectives, but must invariably be governed by some tense of a verb. The verbal participles are used in Teloogoo when we wish to express any 452 minor actions of the person who performs the chief action mentioned in the sentence. The verbal participles, denoting the minor actions performed, or placed first in the sentence, and are governed by the verb denoting the main action, with which the sentence elegantly terminates. The peculiarity in these participles, therefore, is that they always refer to 453 some subordinate action, performed by that particular agent only which is the nominative to the final governing verb, and never can express actions performed by others. If the minor action be simultaneous with the main action in the sentence, the 454 present verbal participle is used ; if antecedent in point of time to it, we use the past verbal participle ; and if it be of a negative nature, the negative verbal participle is used. The following examples are subjoined in illustration of these rules. P U E 8 E N T. sTie& ii>r > r3o)r$boJr' > & co c j^^^^iy ) raoax)ex)^e^] ^ol^^oawo'oT 455 Reducing to dust the arrows of his foes, piercing the bodies of his enemies with his oicn arrows, exciting a panic in the minds of the opponent's forces, and animating the spirits of his own soldiers, Arjoona ruled the battle-. Fostering his subjects, protecting the poor, and honoring the great, Dhurmarajah conducted the government. 176 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. efk>o2*>,55 ,l$cl3;& Playing, singing, and laughing with those ivho attended kine, Krishna arrived on the banks of the river Jumna. PAST- 456 2) $ 'j^&r&i&to&^$&v&^ti$$&&o&$$&l$S& & $&$~^ ^^p;^^Gr9cocDi^c3of ; & Vikramarka, having resolved to proceed to the chase, having sent for his charioteer, and having ordered his car, accom- panied by his friends, proceeded to the forest. T5"&o:5be;o'er r * So . '' - ^fS). Rama, having entered Ceylon, having killed the giants, having installed Vib t hishana, and having mounted the divine car, named Pooshpuku, returned to Oude. NEGATIVE- 457 So8a?&e>&> stops' #jfc eys-wsSboorfc 8otf Ytf tfsfca ri&/'K> rB ctf3' ^o^7^^e^^o^e>$d&cs&3g3$"i &>. Without calling his retinue, without taking his bow and arrows, and without putting on his armour* he singly fought with his enemies. 458 It will-be observed that, in each of these examples, the verbal participles are placed first in the sentence, and invariably denote actions subordinate to that expressed by the verb at the conclusion of the period,by which they are govern- ed; thus, in the three examples given of the present verbal participle, ruled, conducted and arrived, are the main actions expressed ; and the participles reducing, piercing fyc. fostering, protecting T. playing, singing tyc. are all minor actions subordinate thereto. It will further be perceived that the minor actions in question were all performed by that agent only which is the nomina- tive to the governing- verb. Arjoona ruled, and it was he also that reduced and pierced; Dhurmarajah conducted, and it was he also that fostered and protected; Krishna arrived, and it was he also that played and sung. Had any one else performed these minor actions, the verbal participles could not have been used- As the minor actions of reducing and piercing were simultaneous with the main action of ruling, the fostering and protecting with that of conducting ' y and the playing and singivg with that of arriving, the present verbal parti- OF SYNTAX. 177 ciples are used, in these cases : but, in the examples given of the past verbal participle, it will be perceived that the resolution of Vikramarka to proceed to the chase, his sending for his charioteer, and his ordering his car, were all, in point of time, antecedent to the main action of his proceeding to the forest ; so also Rama's entering Ceylon, killing the giants, &c were actions performed by him previously to his return to Oude ; hence, in these instances, the past verbal participle is used ; and in the last example, because the minor actions are of a negative nature, we use the negative verbal participle. As an exception to the foregoing rules, it is to be observed that when we 459 speak of the time that has elapsed since any particular event occurred, the past verbal participle may be used absolutely, and then has a nominative of it's own, independent of that of the final governing verb ; thus, it is ten days since I came, literally, 1 having come, ten days have passed; here S'ST'ex) days is the nominative to the final governing verb 53ab<~& passed -, but ~$(fo /is the nominative to the verbal participle *^^ having come, which is used absolutely. The verbal participles always govern the same case as the verb to which they 460 belong; thus, "a 3 " ^^^^"^ ~sr2b having beaten him he camt\ "sr ^) being governed by the active verbal participle ""3 in the accusative case. The foregoing remarks will give the student some idea of the importance of the verbal participles iu the construction of the Teloogoo ; they are peculiarly well adapted to a language that abounds in descriptive passages, and the Student will occasionally find them carrying on and connecting the sense for pages together, but suspending the full meaning until the conclusion of the period. Hence, in some degree, the rare occurrence of conjunctions in Teloogoo ; for the connexion between the subordinate and chief action in a sentence, which is implied by the verbal participles, often supersedes the use of them. RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. Separate relative pronouns are rendered unnecessary in Teloogoo, by certain 461 participles of the verb which have the power of the relative inherent in them, 23 178 TELOOGOO GBAMMAE. and which, like the o#S&o adjectives, must always be followed by some noun or pronoun. 462 The relative participles also denote the action of the verb to which they belong ; and the present, the past, the indefinite, or negative participle is used, according to the sense intended to be expressed- 463 The peculiarity of these participles consists in the relative inherent in them invariably referring to the noun or pronoun which immediately follows them, and which is also the agent to the action denoted by them, unless the relative participle stands between two nouns or pronouns; thus, SS ex> the persons that are coming, "S'C fo -ifcr^jo^ex) the milk that boils, the person that beat, -o*>$$)& the tiger that killed, the parrot that talks, talked, or will talk, (^J ^-syocSb the man that writes, wrote, or will write, -i&r3>l53 sSbo the county that is, was, or will not be to be seen, ~&*&*~3$roSx> the country in which there is not, was not, or will not be a king. 464 If the relative participle of an active verb stands between two nouns or pronouns, arid the first be in the nominative case, it is the agent to the action denoted by the participle, and the noun following, in whatever case it may be, is the object affected by that action ; thus, ~53~5bT;3"Oob?5^)> the tiger that they Killed, SXr&>-r o >$-5yC&stheman that you saw, "S^a&lbD-otfsSbftlx the person that he called; but if the first noun or pronoun be in the accusative, it is the object affected by the action which the active participle denotes, and the following noun, in whatever case it may be, is the agent thereto; "^S^oab^^D the tiger that killed him, 2toxx> ?5-c$cn>-u)r5'5r o CcSb the man that saw you, "S^o^O-atfS&^oX the person that called him. If, independently of the agent and object, the relative inherent in an active participle, refers to the instrument, place, or other subordinate correlative to the action which it de- notes, the agent is placed.first in the nominative case, then the object in the accu- sative, next the relative participle,and finally the instrument, place, or other cor- relative to which it refers j thus 1ti>$)>$-o*)$3' _Q or -8*bx> the-sword with OF SYNTAX. 179 which, or the place in which, I killed the tiger; e^C'^b the bramin to whom the king gave the cow. In these examples / and the king are the agents, and therefore in the nominative case, the tiger and the cow are the objects, and therefore in the accusative, and the sword, the place, and the bramin are the subordinate correlatives referred to, and therefore placed immediately after tfie participle. If the relative participle of a neuter verb stands between two nouns or 465 pronouns, the fust must always be in the nominative case, because neuter verbs cannot govern the accusative; and it is also always the agent to the action deno- ted by the participle, the noun following being merely the subordinate correla- tive thereto; thus, I?&^)o3 the house in which I was, SXn'Sbc^^gb the place on which he sat, SDa^SoSoSfc^f^cooeX) the house in which you slept. The foregoing and following examples will best explain the manner in which 466 these participles supply, in construction, the cases of the relative pronouns, and the mode in which they must be translated in English by corresponding pre- positions. N. -sroeShSo&tf^)^ ............ Thetiger which killed them. The man who saw you. The person who called him. G. >o-)>A?5;&).x .............. The man whose clothes are torn. The tree of which theflowers are faded. The house of which the wall is inclined. The field of which the produce is ripe. D. ISifctf-O^SSfD ............... The b us i ness f or w hich I came. T^C&sto^ oe ......... The house to which he came. Ac. sr&tfoS>tf;g)l) ............. The tiger which they killed. The man whom you saw. The person whom he called. Ab. jJ^B^ftR^g ........... The tree from which flowers were yalhtral 180 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. The house in which 1 slept. The knife with which the fruit was cut. The house on which it rained. <> 467 It is not easy, by any general rule, to define on what the case of the relative depends ; in rule 464 the mere substitution of the word -^600 a place, for ?f_ a sword, changed the relative with which, into for ichich ; and in rule 466 the substitution of ox> ^ ) a house, for 3& business, changed the relative for which into to which. In the examples given in 466 the relative participle con- stantly stands between two nouns in the nominative case, yet the relative itself, which in Teloogoo is inherent in the participle, is in the genitive, dative, or ablative ; and it is curious that in Teloogoo when an active participle is placed between two nominatives, the relative in English must be in the objective case (see examples of the accusative) ; while if the objective case inTeloogoo precede an active participle, the relative in English must be in the nominative case (see examples of the nominative). In rule 464, the correlative \^ {&? eaoc^b a bramin is in the nominative, yet from the nature of the verb to give, the relative to whom, which is inherent in the Teloogoo participle, is in the dative case thus, therefore, the case of the relative would seem to depend in some instances on the nature, rather than the case of the following word ; in others, on the case of the preceding word ; and in some, on the nature of the verb itself. 468 The common indefinite relative participle, by affixing 9&, has often the same signification as an abstract noun ; thus, using the abstract noun, we may say s ex)q)35DO-)S service is excellent, or we may use the common relative participle with ^5S>, and say g^OlSasfep-aa ; but, while the abstract nouns are declined and construed as substantives, the relative participles as well as the verbal nouns (such as S^ew-C&xb an d ^o^$^X)) being integral parts of the , verb, although declined like nouns, are invariably construed like verbs, and govern the same case as the verb from which they are derived ; thus, using the abstract noun ^ex>q5) 5 we say &cr'~ ex>q$)35boS>a your service is excellent, SXn> being placed in the possessive case ; but when we use ^OlSS - *~?ex>-t&k> O r OF SYNTAX. 181 s^> SSSXXD, we must place the pronoun in the accusative case and say StoS&y o 1 iS " '^$ you, or the serving you is excellent. Nouns denoting the agent may be formed from every verb, by adding to the 469 relative participles, either affirmative or negative, the pronoun "sn>C3Sc for the masculine, and ^& for the feminine and neuter, in the singular number ; and for the masculine and feminine, and ^9'5r t> C(&b the man who beats, the heater, ^f^& the woman or the CO SO thing that beats, - o0^r5b the men or women that kill, the killers, -^ the woman or the thing that kills, s fcp "src2w the man who does not beat, has not beaten, or will not beat, i^J-^a the woman or the thing that does not beat, has not beaten, or will not beat. &D " ^ ^ ^ cc ' nave ' by some, been called infinitives ; but they are 470 no more infinitives than rc "so"srC(3Sb or T^O oO-rC<&>. They are merely, as above stated, relative participles, with the pronouns "^r^C^o and 9& added to _ _ . __S them; thus, wO eo~5FCuso is composed of we oo the common indefinite relative participle of the root tf'o^S) to kill, with the pronoun ~53" GJ& added to _C f . it; and^o ooS is composed of the same word ^o > with the pronoun ^5" added to it ; such compound words may be declined through all the cases of the pronoun ~&~C3&) and && in the following manner. SINGULAR. M. N.ftF.- G. -es'a"^-'5T o S)_-s3-^^ool D. Ace. Ab. P L U E A L. M. 8fF. N. N. G. 182 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. I). Ace. Ab. So, also may we decline t5'o^)T3bo^"sr D C2Sb and 2& and fiS'oS}c5a.-tfo55-sr>c2$b an( i -tfoS5fi>. GENERAL RULES. 471 In Teloogoo, the word agreeing with the verb is always in the nominative case, and has generally the first place in the sentence, then follows the word denoting the object governed by the verb, next any intermediate explanatory clause, and the verb itself closes the period. 472 A verb agrees with it's nominative in gender, number, and person ; but when two or more nominatives agree with the same verb, it is placed in the plural number, and agrees in gender with the masculine or feminine nominative, in preference to the neuter ; thus, IT'S&tfc^'^ocX&jC^ ^ D ^o-8 the moon and the lotus shone, 7Toex>SS < 80q)ex>o5'-^8 the cowherds and cows came : but such forms of expression are very uncommon, it would be more elegant to say ^^ zX)ZSm>$)Z)< r ?)->\Qthe cowherds came loiththe cows ; and to express in Teloo- goo that the king, the minister, their horses, and elephants, all entered into the city, we never should say -5)8 but "^toXKlfctf otfoKOW^ySy^o-aQ they arrivea > and horses. 473 If two or more nouns and pronouns, of different persons, connected by a copulative conjunction are nominatives to the same verb, the verb is placed in the plural number, but agrees with the second person in preference to the third, and with the first in preference to both; as ~$(&&r t >&~B~ Sfc!jbZx> I } you, and he came* 474 Neuter verbs, from their nature,.never can govern a noun or pronoun jjwhen made causal they are construed in the same manner as active verbs. Active verbs govern substantives in the accusative case; thus, we say OP SYNTAX. 183 Rama killed Ravana ; but all nouns denoting inanimate objects, when governed by active verbs, may be placed in the nominative, instead of the accusative case ; and, unless the use of the nominative would render the meaning obscure, this is the more correct and elegant construction ; thus, or &C}> lSyi> ?&> he mounted the car, T3">#o/<5&D?& or played at chess, ~3&>o&> or S^o&efcn^S, / saw the m mountain) &*&~zr8&' : \;l>&(63 or "S^ ) "Sr ) ^37T*(J^b the gardener has planted trees. The verbs 5b<&>o to milk, &&>&to ask, o&X&cS&> to amerce, ^^ to 475 win, *& to rob, with a few others, may govern two accusatives ; but if one of these accusatives denote an inanimate object, it may be placed in the nomi- native instead of the accusative case, ^ rt> O3P~CF q^)^>^r o e;^j or the cowherd milked the cow, tff&;3cn>6b;S15" D o?& O r he asked his master for one hundred pagodas, ~ SSl^offo or S5"O~ew2io2X'~ : ^>r& tf/jg magistrate amerced the guilty one hundred pagodas, ~^o^^r l) v ^?5r 5b^Tr s Of^) or 5S'T5' t> ex>~^?^"53" l> c& Iwonfrom him one hundred pagodas, 5 ro oXew^ T> 6o"^r o e)e-?^^ T) s5M s o^) or ^s&^exxS) 8 #Ae thieves robbed the travellers of their jewels. Active verbs, when converted into causals, govern the noun which would 476 have been the agent in their active form in the instrumental ablative ; the noun which would have been the object in their active form continues in the accusa- tive, or, if it denote something inanimate, in the nominative case ; thus, sr^ cxex>'4Sixr D ^b/jg built a house, ~^f^>-5cn>^" : ^^cooew'43 ^>"^>&> my son wrote the book, ~<3&> .'jSg'sSwy^*; ow^R) J caused my son to write the book, the tiger killed the goat, "^^^D^^^o^^b-^o^S I caused the tiger to kill the goat, o^&axro^^e-SSb^^"^^ &8 you mentioned this news, SXro^^cxxr^^Cfg-^r*?^^)"^^^^ 7 caused you to mention this news. But verbs denoting to read, to sing, or to eat, with perhaps a few others, 477 when converted into causals, govern the noun which would have been the agent 184 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. in their simple form either in the ablative or accusative case; ej?& or $5SC^l3^)j3s'&x>ex>-e$' or ~7Vo3oSool$&oSo Af sSbo-ro-S)9 ^ ey caused the songsters to sing, 05*o&> or )3 ^IS^ 9 ?5^o5bo 8iOlbol3^& they are cutting off the tails of horses. The principal noun may also stand in the dative; thus &> e35&ooi&e^'ex>"1&r ~r5b, or the &9 principal noun may stand in the accusative ; thus, fo ^e^eT^wlfo-o^Sb and this, in Teloogoo, is considered the most elegant mode of expression. 479 The verb to be, which so often occurs in the English language, is generally omitted in Teloogoo : it may occasionally be used, but it is thought more elegant to dispense with the use of it- The mode in which it is omitted in Teloogoo when it is placed between an adjective and a substantive noun or pronoun, has been already explained (see rule 428), where it would intervene in English between a substantive pronoun and a substantive noun, it is also omitted in Teloogoo. Indeed, as the personal terminations of the verb are derived from the substantive pronouns, it does not seem strange that these pronouns themselves should partake in some degree of the essence of the verb. In Teloogoo, when a substantive pronoun immediately precedes a substan- tive noun, the latter has the force of the present tense of the verb to be inherent in it; and if the pronoun be of the 1st or 2d person, the noun assumes certain affixes. If the pronoun be of the 1st person, the affix to the noun is in the singular, & for nouns in 9 ^ or ~^_,^(fo for nouns in N3, and f^> for nouns of any other termination ; and in the plural, ^&x> for all nouns. If the pronoun be of the 2d person, the affix to the noun is in .the singular, S) for nouns in s> or 2L ^^ for nouns in ^ and 3b for nouns in any other termination ; and in the plural ""& for all nouns. OF SYNTAX. I.S.") If the pronoun be of the third person, the noun takes no affix. The following examples will more fully explain this construction. (0<\x>?f) y / am a poet. )q)S )& .Thou art a poet. , He is a poet. , / am a bramin. Thou art a bramin. '....He is a bramin. .... This is a horse. This is a cow. cv>f&)b&> ..... , ..... ............................ . ............ I am a child. ... Thouarta child. Go He is a child. s> or o5cr5s$bo?fq5)e;35bo ........................................ We are poets. Ye are poets. They are poets. "^03600 or ofc><5x>(jX*J scr^eaoosSix) ............................... W&are bramins. Te are bramins. They are bramins. are X) ............................................................ These are coivs. or S&cfcfioOflSoSfcOu, ......... ?Fe are children. (AS . ....... ...... Ye are children. ew ................................................... . ..... TAey are children- It will be observed that ^ a poet, with the singular pronouns of the 1st and 2d persons prefixed to it, in the one case affixes >, and in the other >, because it terminates in 3 ; but ^^/^s^Ci^b a bramin ends in o } and there- fore affixes' *"&> and ^, or rather changes the final o into these terminati- ons ; and O^S a child endiug neither in $s or ^ ? nor in ^, takes simply ^ and 24 186 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. Each of these nouns, viz. sf> -(^3^3;r^?aDC<&> and d^, with the pronouns of the 1st and 2d persons plural prefixed to it, takes ^Zxx> and ^80 ; and none of them, when preceded by the pronouns of the third person, take any affix whatever. 480 One verb governs another that refers to it, or depends on it, in the infinitive; but the infinitive invariably precedes the governing verb, instead of following it as in English; thus, / wish to conquer my foes S^c^ 5 , 1 hoped to adore Shiva 481 When the speaker states what another has said, he does not, as in English, use the infinitive mood ; he repeats the words of the original speaker, adding the particle ^^ having said ; thus, he told me to write, would in the Teloogoo idiom be rendered \3F^ctf:>3&<0 T3"l,j^?& namely (^^yc*5K>S&> write thou, having said, Tfc" 1 *^^ he told; thus also, the sentence ~zr&>~~>X)'&>-tio _ fe or d ere d hi m f km the snake, consists of the words sr D C5& h e -jr35c&> the snake, -tfo'Q)^ kill thou, 9 having said, ~5^ to him, q)_j5bq) order. o13^f& gave-, "^ctfoSSw and preceding &> are changed, by the rules for Sund,hi, to lictfbo> respectively, for in the common dialect the ^o before the sSw of the imperative is generally dropped in this construction, for the sake of alliteration ; thus, also, we say / heard that Devadutta went ~S^a$e&oS^^o;3S)o&3!0 Sec. In this sense, the relative participles, with ^>& either in the nominative or accusative case, are sometimes elegantly used in Teloogoo ; as, "B^& efoi^SjScxo^a or S^cxotfTT'SO^po^^ or the particle T, hereafter mentioned, may.be added to the participles joined with && in the nominative case ; thus, ~% / teard that Devadutta went-, thus also, we say t or e)^^8c-es'^r 6 c^oca^S^-^-sr^5b or hey affirm that an incarnation of the God Vishnoo is about to take place> 482 ^^ is used, in the same manner, when we address to a second person orders to be delivered to a third, tell him to send oSoobotfi&S3j, literally OF SYNTAX. 187 send thou, &$ having said, ~^^ tell; \[*^c*5b35b" : 3So^> tall him to write, tf^3SbiO3 JS)O^ direct him to read, c. When we wish to represent various minor actions performed by others as 483 contemporaneous with the chief action performed by a particular person menti- oned in the sentence,, a number of infinitives, denoting these minor actions, are placed together in the sentence, which terminates, in an elegant manner, with the verb denoting the main action placed in it's appropriate tense ; thus, While the rulers of fifty-six countries, having arrived at the city of Mid,hila, were in attendance, while fair damsels sported in the dance, while choristers chaunted songs, while they sounded the great drum and other musical instruments, while the gods shoicered flowers, while the bards and genealogists proclaimed panegyrics, while the people of the city were fitted with joy, the king Dasarad\ha celebrated the nuptials of his son Rama- Even in familiar conversation this mode of expression is sometimes usod. If the infinitive of a verb with the particle ~5~ added to it, be twice repeated, 484 it denotes progression; thus, ^vIx^Tew^^ci^"7V ^^do^T^So^So^) writing improves gradually as we write, ^^^ A v T5")jf A U wex)r&r& it will be understood gradually by reading, ($3*~7?3&'7?'>tttf:)fojS3 as we walk the road gradually shortens, 55"5xs~^x>o8cS5o'7 i r D o8cOo'7T D ' : 3?$)^)ex3 >oc&?& as it rains the lakes will be gradually filled. The root $~&> to buy, conjugated through all its moods, tenses, and persons, is frequently added to the past verbal participle of another verb, when it is intended to restrict the action denoted by that verb exclusively to the benefit of the agent ; and often in the superior, but always in the inferior dialect, final 9 of the past verbal participle is changed to ^ when ^^0 j s thus added ; as 188 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. ~&> or ~3&>^& to do for one's own benefit, (^2J^?&> or to write for one's own benefit ; thus we say \^y ^"^r^ I wrote, or v" 53 ""/' &^T'~zr D f &> I wrote for my own benefit ; "I3"r^x> / doyj^fe &sT'o&y-t.^) I do for my own benefit ; "%&&& he told, or "^So^^^T^cSb he told for his own benefit. Sometimes, however ^&> is added merely for the sake of elegance ; thus we may say either 2Tsoo-cn=_o3> or K~*ax>--l&^o3 1 saw the letter; at other times, it alters the signification of the verb to which it is added in a manner scarcely to be defined -^&-X$__ ^b;r>b he walks well, -^>-$_-K*$&>& he behaves well; it occasionally makes a neuter verb active 73"so 3 it was understood to me, ~>r&~I3ex>s>D3'^o3 / understood, <^cS&> to draw, to pull, fe^<& to bring, !^J^- to prostrate, rScoyS^JT 3 ^ to invoke &c. 485 The present verbal participle of a verb prefixed to any tense of the verb j5"-&r^ to come denotes that the action expressed by the participle is habitual or of long continuance ; thus, ^5^^ss5cn>oooo^3l55c^'^" : i^?^> he was in the habit of coming to. my house, ~53-2&Tu$T -/v^^b^s^oecvro^"^^) he continued to behave himself icell, o^ro^^ef^^^^lp?5g^X)^o2^^n'^^^3 grain formerly used to be produced in this land, TP^^c&OT^-B^ZgSd^-oo^lS the king continued to govern the kingdom in a just manner, yon must continue sending letters. 48G It has already been stated that active verbs become passive by adding to the infinitive the verb 3<&> to fall, to suffer. By affixing this verb to the nomina- tive case of neuter nouns, particularly to such as denote any bodily suffering or mental affection, a compound verb is formed of a neuter signification ; and if the noun end in o^>, this termination may be changed into c, or may be dropped altogether; the latter is the more common form ; thus, from fear is formed ^cOb&joSo<> or $*cSooXS;&> O r ^cfoSo^b to fear ; from a blow comes *3^c5o to be beaten c. But if instead of the neuter form "^^o, the active form S>Q!K& be added to the substantive, it makes an active OF SYNTAX. 189 verb ; thus, from v cCoStoo f ett r comes 2?"(35o5b-i& to frighten, and from r^.oesoXoSx) gladness comes flOOo^&XS&i f ; because the boiled rice is not delivered into the hands of the bramin invited, but only placed on a leaf before him. We must therefore say &5?^oSx)~l>~|o^ ] ie placed rice before him. But if he were to give the food to his palanqueen bearer, who, being of an inferior cast, is not allowed to pollute the house of a bramin by eating in it, he does not place the boiled rice before him, but delivers it into his hands, and in this case therefore we might say ^ "^ j3r^2fc&<5%> ocxref)^^Dol^^> that bramin gave rice to 7tis palanqueen bearer. In the same manner, if you give grass to a horse, you cannot say in Teloogoo ^J|p ) '^^ax)jb> I gave * w ^^ , j* grass to the horse, but ^^3/^0 "^^Sb co?q5) ^>_^^ I threw grass to the horse. OF PARTICLES OR INDECLINABLE WORDS. There arc scarcely any proper adverbs in Teloogoo, cxoSoy^Sb now, ^=^0 488 then, ^S>>j>2& when, v&> to-day, ^^ ^yesterday, "8$) to-morrow, &c. are not adverbs, but substantive nouns which are declined ; adverbs however are easily made, or rather their want is supplied, by adding to any noun substantive or adjective the infinitive ~3~% from the verb && to become, which, following a nominative, is changed into ~^, according to the rules given in Chapter Second ; thus, from roo^>x> happiness... As derived,.. ..^>^>^>~^ > .... happily. >. . ..beauty OcZSv^... .beautifully. .great.... ^^i' 7 ^' greatly. 190 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. from eS^tf ............... quickness... -Is derived...^ $~7\* ...... quickly. Ov ^* ................. cold .......... : .............. ^%~ 7V ........ coldly. ............... soft, slow .................... Offr^Ty ...... softly, slowly. ....... QcSog .............. sweet ............ , .......... fkxfcg-?^ ..... sweetly. ............ bitter ..................... ^^T^ 3 ....... Utterly. fa wind blows coldly, ^.e9^8^^7C*ST&J&?jNa */ie horse goes slowly. 489 It is to be remarked that ~A~ can never be added to the nominative with which the rerb agrees, but only to an adjective or substantive qualifying that nomi- native. If I would express that the water of the sea is salt, to the word denoting salt I may add ~K*, and say #^^^&^&y"7^5(?)?5JD . because salt is not the nominative to the verb, it only qualifies the water of the sea which is the nominative. But if I wish to state that there is salt water in the sea, the sentence refers not to the essence or quality of the water/ but to it's existence ; therefore without adding "A* I should say #^x>^ S*Kf*^g^J&*kP : W esay ^^5x^S^boex)'5r(^f^"7T T! ^)?^ i p those flowers are fragrant, but when we merely assert that there is fragrance in flowers we say 490 Besides converting substantives and adjectives into adverbs, "5^ when added to them may denote resemblance, similitude, &c. &J"&sSa3er^f53o-)-uT- (QS5 ^C^^ex3^^^5Sbo"7^e5^^^e^?5^p if mountains be viewed from a dis- tance, they appear like smoke. 491 The infinitive ~5~% added to the pronoun IT^, also represents the, English expressions spontaneously, of his own accord', for example, supposing a person to die voluntarily by eating poison,if I wish to ascertain whether he died of any disease, or of his own accord,! should say in or U t> f^>"^ D ~^^S'^S\'^ T> , I might also say is liable to equivocation, 'for besides meaning spontaneously in contradistinction to forcibly, it may likewise signify that he himself died in contradistinction to any #thcr person, . 191 Sometimes the past verbal participle or infinitive of a verb is used as an 492 adverb ; thus, from the root &5b^o to turn... -..comes ts5bX O rw8A again. fo return &^ or35b$ again. b to fill )o-c^>....oro& muc h. The following Sanscrit particles cannot properly be termed adverbs,but they 493 enter so frequently into the composition of ^^)55b^words that some notice of them seems to be necessary ; and I know not that I can offer the few observati- ons which I have to make respecting them in a more appropriate place. They are prefixes compounded with substantives, adjectives, or verbs of Sanscrit derivation. denotes excess ; as^r* sis-Joy, \^j r>&~ excess of joy, $$xx> wealth, i oOi c^odS&o great wealth. is a privative implying opposition, reverse ; as Jct5oS&> victory, SJT^rc bsSw defeat. is also a privative ; as s&e~ fame, f>Sos2)e- infamy, ctfbs$ix> victory, >X5JcCo>:xD defeat, ^r^sSixD money, ^>'&?$&>C'&> apoor man. is an incrementive denoting also goodness, or connexion ; as adored, <3s5b--&>cb ivell adored, -sr*&x> declamation, X> argumental dispute. r^> signifies after, near, each, every, as "cS&raS&o going, following, >>>x> a garden, 9f&^f5xx> ^ear a garden, ^5f&)&?0c6oo every day. >' is a privative, meaning also below, as '^S'raS&D going, descending ; ^eS"^ i m ^ t9^?5"ef S5w i e ;j; rtfo?w ; ^cn>?55xo honor, dishonor. are, privatives, meaning also ^om^/ through, the whole ; as, juiceless ; y'TT ;S5bs5:x) a village, ^\ s ^^ / s"S5boc 2^ba man through a village ; >J|S$;x> gn'yen, ^fiff"_^^^uwi altogether. 192 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. >cJ ill } bad, reverse; as, j3^S$x> business, 2&3&k_Sr3Soo bad business ; > passable) &Xe-S&o impassable. signifies excess, variety, badness ; it also denotes opposition : as a victory, S&ctfbsSbo a $rea victory-, S)^^x> manner or method, various methods; S^SoSSco form, )&>^Soix> deformity ; "ST^S&o talking, >-r>&S&D a quarrel; ZbvzSx) fiUh, S)55be)S5oo^ M nVy. signifies as ya?- a;?, from, every where ; as, ^5o^55oo Me ewe?, 3oes5oo as/ar as /fo ewa* ; SCbcn>o^x) ^ roo^, ?35&>croo55;x)y>-<7m sitting, ^"^C^bofo^b silting upon any thing ; ^n>^^ a/oo/, ^9^^^) ybo^ over. in most Sanscrit words adopted into Teloogoo is a mere expletive. means much, beyond moderation ; as, 3SDcj>&s5cxD sweet, very sweet ; so a limit, ^59"Se;^c beyond the limit; &&2^&$Zxx> eating immoderately. > good, well ; as, So^S^o a n>a denotes wp, beyond ; as ^^^> held, &&\$$S)X> held up ; ~ moving, GsTjT'jS'Sxx) r i 5z '/j^r ,- l3e; /z'?z7, ^"S^osSw beyond the limit. before; as S^sp^M a /ace, 3&>^3$M before the face ; SMW, e5f)^r>^g^xD fo/bre ^e sz/w. ^/ again, in return, back, each, opposite, in exchange, toivards / as a garden, x> each garden ; 5S5~3~#<&>o kindness, \&.&> S&tf a return of kindness ; ^R a complainant, $ / 8'5yS a defendant; 5bo toivards the sun ; S)SSpqg) Vishnoo, a second Vishnoo. So8 signifies we//'; as, Ser r -t5'(S' consideration, XffZU^-Xtf considering well, deep reflexion ;$>$> a trial, SoQ'o ^?5 ^g// nW. ^S3 near ; as r?^ ;55bJ5bo a country, l55(~7Vj 55bs5>D environs* 494 Conjunctions are seldom used in Teloogoo ; they are necessary chiefly in works on science, whei;e a chain of reasoning is required for the elucidation of OF SYNTAX, 193 some position ; but in short detached maxims regarding moral conduct, and in poetical compositions, which form the principal part of Teloogoo literature, the frequent use of conjunctions would destroy that simplicity and elegant concise- ness of phrase, which is the great characteristic of the language. In the superior dialect, <3&> is equivalent to the English conjunction and, 495 but it is added only to words ending in " or H This particle being included in the class of words termed drootuprucrootica, is liable to all the changesmentioned in the second chapter of this work as peculiar to wordsof that description. If the word end in any other vowel than those abovementioned, the drootuprucrootica affix <& is added to it, instead of cSSx>, to express the conjunction and; thus, ~^ - ^^^^^S^cJ&o a carriage, a bullock, and a sheep. In the common dialect ^ - ^L or ^^are added to words ending in ' 5 or 496 ~* ; and ?& - fSx^ or f&rfo^ to words in any other terminations, to express our conjunction and; r&^however is seldom affixed to any nouns except to those in O; S^if affixed to a word ending in long 5 requires it to be shortened into 9 ; and >->>^as well as^-^^^always lengthen the final vowel of the word to which they are affixed; thus, i^cfifc-fg&jfc^ $-tF>ti)&> J . " T |^&;&^ a staff, a. whip, and a stick; woccS^-rt^S^ 2T7V C ^)^ the. cart and the. carriage are in good order ; Tro$&ffr^w,& < ew& jfr^c*&a<5 SSw ! 3 8 Rama and Lutchmana fought. A terminational emphasis, or the lengthening of the final vowel, is also equivalent to the conjunction ; as ^cOoC ""#-F 13 "lb a staff, a whip, and a stick ; "^tfer* ok^fo ocr ;6<3Sx>e>J 2oo"eccxr^ Z$x>txr* 55 P^ ^)'^ > elephants, horses, camels, and cars are all in the army, cooo<&r ^*eoexr Sf*&3- "5oex) dr*oo wS^J) houses, gardens, go- downs, and lands, are sold by auction' The abovementioned particles which are equivalent to the conjunction and 497 may be affixed to all, to any, or to none of the objects enumerated ; but in the case last mentioned, the final vowel must be lengthened, or pronounced with emphasis ; thus "^cfo&^TT* ^ tri&iife&>^&$00'69 < Q ^i^OSto or 25 194 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. or o- eo 1 and my friend went to Trevatoor* 498 When we wish particularly to mark the nature, rather than the number of the objects enumerated, not saying, for example, two hills, but these are both hills ; then, some of the participles abovementioned must be added to the word deno- ting the number, or the emphasis must be laid on the last syllable of it ; thus, &&7^&X^&fc&&&$^&&~8o2fcl&~ ^Qr ~32&3" - ro o3e>3 those are both mountains that appear yonder like smoke ; if we said ~3o3o i^oS* e>3 it would mean that there are two mountains, not that both are mountains. 499 When we allude to the whole of any number of objects, some of the participles abovementioned must be added to the word expressing the object, not to the word expressing the number ; thus, if I were to say I am wounded in one of my hands, one is not here a complete number, because I have two hands ; therefore, without adding the particles abovementioned, I must say "ST^EuS"^ Sef^T^cXjoi^X) {S^OrSa but if both my hands were wounded, then I must add some of those particles to the Teloogoo word denoting hands ; thus, lvrHgo^^e&oer^^r$^7rci5o9$boeA>c^S ; for if I did not add ^A, here, it would be understood that I had more than two : thus also, if I say "ST ^ a> e7^er^7^ex>^/&w^ew38~^_^ST*a W j5> j- Qur / lorses ran ont O f m y stable, as *&^ is not added, it is understood that I have yet more horses ; for if these four were all that belonged to me, then I should have added r^ 3 ^, and said 60 600 >Q and its synonymous particles abovementioned often represent the English words also, even &c ; thus, cxw^'sr c a this also is mine. Hence, if ^ be added to the word ~^)'3 one thing, and a negation follow, it expresses the English word nothing ; thus ST^fr^iScSfclfc I will do nothing; in other words I will not do even one thing. These particles followed by a negation, are likewise equivalent to our negatives neither^nor &c. ; thus, 55bo-aa^"T* jftflBCa^rgre^ it is neither good 3 nor bad. If these particks are added to any interrogative pronoun or adverb beginning with the letter A, more OF SYNTAX. 185 commonly written c3o, they denote universality j thus, A-j^J* where f 3a SSrSij&N every where : o^S^So who ? JS &d<&<2ll ; J av>J Aow ? cO&r^cSsJw^ any how, at any rate ; o^^^tvhen ? ^^^^>^always Sec. This is also the case when these particles are added to the past relative participles of verbs, with an interrogative pronoun prefixed; thus, TT e i!&^|^^^o&~sr B <&?&^ where- soever he may be, "53^<&ci^^\i3'y73^^<&^ howsoever he may write, &c. It will ba observed that in this construction the final <$ of the past relative participle is lengthened to "*3". The following is a list of the most common interjections inTeloogoo. 501 express /-as 53c&J-o\ &c ; ... | pain, grief, or compas- < $&~Jb 73-0^5 a i as / his tj?? or ^ m,^.. ....... ...> ah I how j {fortunate have I been to meet you* /-as V or Vv^o^wOo-' pshaw f go \. cSo pshaw ! the fellow is a rascal. ^"^y coo oooe^ 5cb c?v' 2boCX&3 o3~2S6 br clever and expert he is> ** , ( ^J&SocCo^OiS hush / do not make hush ! silence ! < such a noise* .praise, excellence j Sb^otfXg 5^2fc bravo ! how v clever and expert he is- admiration (as ^^^oo^ ~i$ how de- *)lightful ! how charming / In Teloogoo there are three final significant letters, which may be added to 502 all words ; namely *~ to denote interrogation, to express doubt or ignorance, and "* to mark emphasis. """* is purely interrogative, and should always bs affixed to the word 503 denoting the object respecting which the question is aaked, For example, 196 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. In crossquestioning a witness, a person may wish to ascertain whether he did, or did not go to the house of the complainant on a certain day : in this case he would ask, &^)ooo;5 53&-^- S^^^^aowoeSis^cxx)-^-^ did you go last Sunday to the house of the complainant ? but if he knew that he went to some place, and wished to ascertain particularly whether it was to the complainant' s house or not, in this case he would ask &^yZF*aNt$fe$& ^r^Sxx) *r* ( J&^a<^o<^^S^cco'sr o 3) Was it to the house of the complainant that you went last Sunday'? Supposing he is aware that the witness went to the house of the complainant, but wishes to ascertain the precise day, he would in that case ask, ^^oootfa"^tf ^7^T^^aooooe3S^<>T3^eg) Was it on Sunday last, that you went to the comqlainanf s house ? Again he might have learned that some one went to the house in question, but might be desirous to ascertain whether it was the witness or not, he should then ask & ST D ^ooo^e3a"53^5'sSoo7c^3&5r^&cxx)0^^pooTT ^) was it you that went to the complainant' s house last Sunday ? It is however to be observed that to .words which are already of an interrogative nature, such as the pronouns beginning with the letter <^, more commonly written o3o^ the significant lelter " D is never added. 504 denotes ignorance or doubt, and must be added to the particular word expressing that of which we are ignorant, or of which doubt is entertained : for instance, supposing I am in doubt whether you have, or have not given me money ; to the affirmation you have given I add the particle and say ^q^lT : but if I am certain of having received some money from you, and am in doubt respecting the quantity, not recollecting whether it was Fanams, or Pagodas that you gave me, then the c must not be added to the verb, because I have no doubt but you gave something ; it must be added both to the word expressing Fanams and to that denoting Pagodas, because I stand in doubt respecting both, fe^TT"&^^er*tf T^er^opo^T^qg) jagain, if I am aware both of the payment, and of the amount, and only doubt whether you gave it to me, or to some one else, then I add the to the word denoting to me fc^T^S^^S'wax^-sr^: lastly, if I am certain that I myself received OF SYNTAX. 197 the money, but am in doubt whether I received it from you, or from another, then the ^ is added to the word thou & ^J'l^^e^^ex) ow-O^^r ^). In this manner, the peculiar object of doubt or interrogation is at once clearly defined in Teloogoo. The particle added to the common conditional form of the verb ending 505 in 5, with the drootuprucrootica affix ^ becomes S" J and represents our phrases but if, .on the contrary, should it &c. &e. thus, SS&e-S&o&QcSoS's^li 23&>ex>s3o5b - &-^&d^~&^K&>vol&spx)& sfco&C&Sb If it does not rain the people will suffer severely ; but if it rains they will be happy. In Teloogoo there are many interrogatives, especially among the pronouns, 506 which commence with the letter , or as it is commonly written c^o; thus, <^oS So who? J&r* how? >&j-% where? &c. if ^ be added to these words the interrogation is converted into an affirmation of ignorance or doubt. A person asks another 9^ r _2c^oJ55b who is there ? the answer may be ^S^S f ^ Ida not know, or am in doubt icho lie is. In the same manner, we say "sr2$bc&3?f 3* *^~ I do not know, or am in doubt where he is, ^^^^^5^, r *; thus, l^^^tf^^T^^^So^^iJ'^^^^^ call the eery man who came with us that day to the garden; ~srCjSb3&'<>3~ G c&ro/fov C 3s 3)8 he is indeed a worthy man, wherefore did you strike him? ^^) S) thou in particular art a patient man, why didst thou quart-el with him? Zfc co?&^V^cO at the very time you went to the fort 1 came here. This particle is also used when we wish to select one out of many objects; for instance, sup- posing that theye are many ripe mdngoes upon a tree from which the gardener is plucking them, and that I ask for one, but that he throws down another which I did not want, I reject it, and pointing with my finger to the particular mangoe 198 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. which 1 wanted, say alS^jj 3 ~3 x> C ut and throw me this very one. \ could not say this if there were only one mangoe on the tree. 508 The final significant affix "* in the latter part of a sentence, preceded by the final significant letter in the former part of it, have the correspondence of the English as and so;, thus, as you directed, so have I done ; cO !0 as you said, so have I written. o 509 v& the negative verbal participle derived from ~&&> the negative aorist of the root ^ew/fo signifies without ; and "S" ^ the negative verbal participle derived from "S" 3 ^ the negative aorist of the root &$) signifies besides ; thus, Wci^^MOJlj^,j^^o;&ox>o#A<^^;Sb without arms it is impossible to conquer enemies-, ^og>e5 >0 i3ex>~r D '5 vr) '^_s5K)^ooe^q^)?^a besides houses and gardens how much is there in ready cash? Both ^" and by the addition of GSOP the infinitive of the root oso^So to be frequently become "32oo3 or 1T D 3oo3 without any alteration in their meaning. -, 510 ^oo means why ? It may be placed either before or after a verb : if placed first the verb' agrees in person, number, and gender with it's nominative ; thus, ><0 w hy did I look? o3^x&n> 2)73^0^0 why did he look? o&O why did they look? But if this particle follows the verb it 13 placed in the infinitive, which, being a drootuprucrootica, takes < n before the &of<&^, and it is thus used promiscuously for every person, number, or gender; thus, coi&'SP'CJgb or 5y5b-ur T >^o why did I, he, or they look? "^^>fcq^-SP>5ba &c. -CPlSoS^o & c . w ] iy did I, thou, they, she, or it $c. come, go, fyc. ? S0?5?5> or S3 ^^^^ t , the forms of the root &$) denoting although I t thou, he, fyc. become, if placed at the commencement of a sentence, represent the English word nevertheless; SDr^S5 < ^^3i^^"53^ > 2^b^^b^)H~2Sb nevertheless he is a clever man. But if either of these phrases is placed after two or more words in the same sentence, it will have the effect of the disjunctive conjunctions OF SYNTAX. 199 either, or ; thus, we say # tfloJ ^0o<& or 7-a3 in what manner ? ^S)cft'13or555^ $3!$^ in what manner soever; ^j^ hoto ? c^&jtfSr^eSilO^ h ow soever-, eJS5^<5& when? ^^ *&&) when soever : the power of these phrases differs essentially from the power of <&^ &c. added to similar words ; both imply universality, but these phrases restrict the meaning to one of all, ^^ &c. in- clude all collectively ; thus, *f^3k*& always, at every time ; ^^J^f^^^i K^ at what time soever ; * & &&>(&>^every where, ^ ^ ^~p^S5\&3^;^ where soever ; ^^^^^ every one, ^^"^.^^S^^A. whosoever. Besides the two senses in which "w^- t)^). oc^b . ej^b .. l^ . "^Sb, 512 the aorist of the root ^ew^o is used, as explained in rules 441 and 444, the neuter of the third person singular is used in two other senses. 1st, placed after a nominative of any of the three persons and the infinative of a verb, it is a simple negative participle denying the action of the verb, with reference to the past time only; thus, ~$<& &c. "^ScCo o&> I ^c. did not do : this use of the third person neuter must be distinguished from that of the whola tense before mentioned ; thus, ....I cannot do ............... *'(&~ : 3>3&~>....I did not do. ) ...... Thou canst not do ....... .b&~ : <3&~>....Thou didst not do. cannot do ............... < src^b"ScOb He didnot do. cannot do ............... "stoOol:&>..JFe didnotdo. cannot do ............... S^5o' : cBol5&>l r 0M did not do. cannot do ...... . ..... "5T* &l$c&~e&> They did not do. 200 TELOOGOO GMAMMAB, in the one case the auxiliary ejr& &c. agrees with it's nominative in gender, number, and person ; in the other v&> is indeclinable. 2ndly. &> is used independently by itself as a simple negative particle denying existence, applicable to all persons, without reference to any time, and opposed to "5^2^D which denies essence, quality &c : the contrary of the first is the irregular third person singular of the affirmative aorist of the root ; the contrary of the second is the word S'q)&>, the third person singular of the affirmative aorist of &$) to become. If I ask is there a house here ? I enquire respecting existence, and the answer, if there is one, is && ; if not O-!&. But if I see something at a distance, and, doubtful not of its existence but of its essence or quality, ask, is that a house, the answer, if it is not, is ~~ &> ; if it is, >&. 513 &$)c$j indeed may be considered to represent the English word yes, being constantly used as an affirmative reply to questions of all kinds, and not re- stricted like its negative ~5~*> to a denial of essence or quality ; for example, y es may be used in reply to any ofthe following interrogations. has he returned from the country? would rain be seasonable at this time? r is this King virtuous ? S^so^g-tf &>,^ "Scte^'oO&^fS^-zy do you desire to learn science? S^J^"^^55bo^^5'5\e-s5w^5^g-7V D o8 < S ) S"2r have you had abundance of rain in your country ? c^^rslsS 55boJ&>"^"S5^ ; "sr o s5~s$boS5'^?575~ have the freshes ofthe Cauvery reached the southern districts ? ^^C^&S^S^oScroSbCT^z's he your son ? 514 Notwithstanding CS^jfo may thus be used as a general affirmative, its use is properly confined to affirmations respecting quality or essence only ; thus, if I ask, is there rice in the house ? I enquire about the existence of something, not respecting its" quality ; therefore, if there is, although we may say 9q)?& ' yes, it will be more correct to answer ^&>, or ^)f^ a , there is : but if, seeing a basket with something'in it, I ask, is (hat rice in the basket ? 1 enquire res- pecting the essence or quality of something, not regarding its existence,and if it is rice, fc9q)c& y es \ s ^\ le on ]y p ro 'per answer ; if it is not, OF SYNTAX. 201 Such is the use of these words when used independently by themselves, but 515 when 5q)f& follows a noun in the common dialect, it does not signify yes or it is, but it will or may be : and if used in speaking of the present time, it also implies doubt; thus if to my question, what is there ? they answer)cCx)?35:>^5);& it may be rice ; this is the same as saying, I cannot speak with certainty, but I think, or have understood, that it is rice. The particle ^>& it {$ said or they say, is often used in this sense ; thus, if I ask, is Gooroomoorty here ? and the answer is oooo&3isfrcxx>*r>5i6o this means, 1 do not know, but they say that he is gone home. When used in speaking of any future event, the word may imply either doubt or certainty ; for example, should I ask "5T<&> -iS'^^)r D o"to~Sex)?6er ^^b^e-^^-sr' if he take pains and read, will he become well versed in Teloogoo, and am answered S5b$OE~*q5)rvX> it means either that he will certainly become well versed in Teloogoo, or that he may perhaps become well versed in Teloogoo : a prevaricating witness may often attempt to shelter himself under the equivocal meaning of this word. This phrase represents the English word otherwise', S^5b7^$^axTl^o9 516 if you give it, 'tis well, v&8^&&vc&^-r^&M^o^7^\&> otherwise, I will take it forcibly. It consists of the negative verbal participle u* y derived from e><& the negative aorist of t*)fc } prefixed to the conditi- onal form of the verb &*$) to go, used here merely as an expletive. eo or These words imply a term, or limit, they are generally used in the dative 517 case, and often with the conjunction ^^ ; thus, 55<5o or Sfrtf0&^ and or Sfc^&tf)^ signify until; as -&>X&c&8$;> or tf tf&jfc^ - sfoko SfetoJ&tf^ until this hour, hitherto ; $$ may also be used in the local abla- tive; thus, ^tftfer*-sr^^-&fc 7 never saw him m this f - me . wo say also ^o^^>^)o this muck> thus far ; Woff sfo4a3& that mltch) Qs faj . M that ; ^o^^D^wSo / tow muc f t p how far ; $c> . ,. This word Applies to all computation, whether by number, weight, oj 26 202 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. measure ; thus, o>r*s*o^er3o^tfg^o&3$w what quantity of grain is produced in this field! o^wo-A^Sb^oo&Sfc-'^S&D what is the iveightof this gold! oaj^&c^^^otfS&ra tfjS&o how much is this rice? o how long? ~3S*ex>^c^ooe$'5&n>i f,s5bo how broad? x> how high ? er' 6 <>&>c3oo&';&r9 ^.^oo how deep ? The word c^ootf alone is also used in the same sense ; thus, cxxro)o'A T >5b63oO(5' . cocr^tfe;$wc^oo&->b'4)ako&' & c . but so far as regards number, the collective pronouns often represent c&>o &c. ; thus, many persons ? tf^'S'eWcSoS^ fow; many fanams ? years ? 519 The participle "S" ? from the root &$) to become, according to circum- stances represents the English words either, or, unless, only, except, although ; as lJ' follows words belonging to the class drootuprucrootica it is changed into "7^$ ; and when it means either^ or, or although, the final 9 is lengthened into 5 . P P E N D IX. OF NUMBERS. 1st. CARDINAL NUMBERS. The cardinal numbers in Teloogoo, may, like adjectives, be prefixed to substantives, or like nouns, be used independently by themselves : in either state, each of them, except the first, has two forms; of which one is applicable 'to masculine or feminine, the other to neuter objects. 1 shall give the neuter cardinals first, as the others are derived from them. English Figure. Teloogoo Figure. Neuter Name. 1 .................................... o 2 .................................... -5> 3 >t ................................. 3 4 .................................... b" 5 .................................... & 6 .................................... - 7 .................................... ^ 8 .................................... o~ 9 .................................... F~ 10 ................................... oo 11 ................................... oo 12 ......... , ....... , ................. o_s 13 .................................... 03 14 ...... <. ............................. otf 15.. ^ . APPENDIX. English Fiyure. Ttlooyoo Fiyure. Neuter Name. 16 .................................... o_ .................................. __ o 17 ..................................... o .................................... Soft 18 .................... 19... ........ . ........................ or ........................... * 20 .................................... _so ...................... ; 30 .................................... 3o 40 .................................... tfo 50 .................................... tfo 60 .................................... -0 70 .................................... ^o ...................... 80 ..................................... 0~o..... 90 ............... . .................... F"o ...... . ........... '. 100 ........................ <~>oo ................ 200. ............... > .................. _9oo 300 ............. ..................... 3oo 400 500 600 ........................ -00 700 .............. , .......... 00 800 ................................... $ one, when used as an adjective, is the same for all genders : wlieu used as a substantive, it has a separate form for each gender ; viz, TELOOGOO till AM MAR. O for the neuter, 2o5fcb for the masculine, and 2o'13 fur the feminine. Tin- neuter oO<5&> two, whether used as an adjective, or as a substantive, becomes i n the masculine and feminine ; the neuter 3&orob three becomes S&og>5b, f our becomes tfexj^Sb, and all the other neuters, whether used substantively or adjectively, become masculine or feminine by affixing the particle Sfcoa . tnuSj ef> ooo>55boa Ji ve , Seso55boa six, <5&S5boa 8even &c. &c. Sec- la addition to these forms, the neuter numbers noted below admit, in the masculine and feminine gender, of some irregular forms six may in the masculine" ' and feminine' form become. . t5ftX3^)2x) or seven ......................... . .......................... oi&q5)?o or eight .............................. . a .......... nine .................................... ten ........ twelve .fourteen ................................................ The neuter cardinals ~3o2sb ^ 0} S&cro&o Mree, and ?5crefX3 a hundred, when used as substantives, make in the singular inflexion ~3o&3 . 3&xr$3 _ respectively, and are declined in the same manner as the irregular noun : the masculine 2o?fk_C?fk_~l and the neuter 2o^_63 one y with all other cardinal numbers, when used as substantives are declined according to the rules for the third declension ; except masculines and feminines ending in /^o5b, which in the singular inflexion change that termination into ^9 ; thus, nomi native rSex^Sb four, inflexion ?^ex)^o8, dative r^ex)^b8 to four &c- &c. 2d. ORDINAL NUMBERS. The ordinals are formed by changing the final vowel of the neuter cardinal numbers inio ^^ in the superior dialect, and into ^ iu the common^ dialect, 4 APPENDIX. the first cardinal number excepted, which in the cardinal form, becomes in both dialects, as shewn below. Neuter cardinal Ordinal number. number. superior dialect. common dialect. first. ........ second- ' . ---- third. sr o ex>X';5' .............. ^ex> K* ......... fourth. e>ooo> ............. coo&;5 .............. 9000.5^ ........ .fifth. ............... & ............. seventh. a. 6 (or |) ; and *-' fV 5 an ^ i n tne further subdivision of unity, the number of fractional parts (which in English vulgar fractions we term the numerator) is denoted, in the same manner, by a corresponding number of lines, alternately perpendicular and horizontal. The particular kind of parts into which the integer itself is divided, which in our vulgar fractions is called the denominator, is marked in Teloogoo, much in the same way as in our decimal fractions; namely, by the distance of the % perpendicular and horizontal lines from the integer number; thus, ou^_ | i-L{ 1 I T 2 _ T ' T ^ -5-^3- and Tsh-' ^ w ^' nere ^ e observed that the lines next the integer are fourths, those a degree- further to the right, sixteenths, then follow sixty fourths, next, two hundred and fifty sixths, and so on. But when fractions are written separately from the integer number, the denominator is marked by prefixing to all the lines, except those of the first subdivision, a contraction of the Teloogoo word which expresses the particular subdivision to which the fraction belongs ; 6 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR- as S> for >($3Sbo before the second subdivision, T for "T& before those of the third subdivision, as specified in the foregoing table. In accounts, if the whoje of one subdivision be wanting, the deficiency is marked by substituting for the perpendicular lines the mark 9 called ^v, and for the horizontal lines , or a cypher ; Thus, <~> 2^- MI T V T -STT tne first 9 shews that fourths are wanting, the second 9 denotes that sixty fourths are wanting, and the o shews the deficiency of two hundred and fifty sixths. Accounts of money are kept in Pagodas or Rupees, and Fanams : the fractions of these are represented in the same manner as the fractions of, any other unit, but those of a Pagoda as far as sixty fourths, those of a Rupee as far as a sixteenth, and those of a Fanam as far as quarters, have names different from the general fractions of an unit before specified. The fractions of a Pagoda as far as sixty fourths are respectively named. 9 \fhs of a Pagoda ........... I or i ........ do .............. i .......... do. ; . .......... TT ......... do ............. GJ T \...or i.....do ............ *9^ ..... t tV .......... do .............. *2 *l ............ do ................ A or 3V- ---do ............... TV ............ do ............... those of a Rupee as far as a sixteenth are called, ?ths of a Rupee ............ T or 2- ..... do .......... rV ...... do .......... tfn>2__ and tho?e of a Fanam a. far as quarters arc termed, APPENDIX. |Ms of a fanam . ^ u\ f or do 5" L| * do 5~ | In English accounts, Pounds, Shillings and Pence are marked by the letters S 1) ; in Teloogoo, Pagodas are distinguished by the letter ^; Rupees by the syllables &> or ^ n> , and Fanams by 5" prefixed to the integer number. OF MEASURES. Measures, in Teloogoo called S&^oSSbD, are divided into three sorts ; viz. SS8s5cn>r935oo - &"S3^ 3"3*> and \XjZxr* EO&XD. The first is that by which the quantity of grain and the like articles is ascertained, and may be termed the measure of capacity ; the second, that which relates to iveight ; and the third refers to the measurement of extent, or to the length, breadth, or width of any thing. 1st. OF S56^cn>ras5bo OR THE MEASURES OF CAPACITY. The chief measure of this kind is that by which grain is usually measured, the largest of which is called ^)^3, and is marked thus 4\ If there be one, two, CO three, or more such measures, the numeral figures, - -S) - 3 Sec- are affixed to the 4>, and written thus, o . sp ._s . *P 3 c. The $)& is divided into GO twenty smaller measures, called ^J^^Swcw, which are named and marked as follows : o sp ) o | o o I o. ip 01 _o o sp o 27 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. The 3xr>bo again is divided into four ^OiSfcfrwo which are named and marked in the following manner. The o-tfs&o i s divided into four Snoo ; thus, is subdivided into four $*e;oo , thus, ........... . o The $*v is divided into four ^CX3 ; thus, ' A 2- 2rf. O.F "SJ? ^^600 OR WEIGHT. 1> The greatest Teloogoo weight is a ^3^50^ or a Candy which is equivalent to twenty Sfca>?6ex3 or maunds. . Every SftraD/fo contains eight Every ) ^ five ^oo^- or Each ^^> seer is divided into quarters, which are marked thus, "5 o J 69'2S.vdb "I o n Every ^T ^)"^ contains two tf^&r'soe O r ^osSwex), and each is equivalent to three c&er'ew. 3(7. OF ,.:&* ra&o OR EXTENT. The greatest measurement of extent is a c&crczs^Sxx), more commonly termed 355b3, which consists of four So&^CX> or ^crfwo3, termed by us cosses. Each ; c&> or S53b/to is equivalent to 1,000 ?So$5;5wex>. do. ,ov3 ......... is equivalent. ..to ...... 2...3$xn>Sex> ............... or culits. .............. .do ......... to ....... U...^^b?6 .................. or ftet. . .......... do ......... to ........ 2.. c .................... or spans. do... .&S&fo ............. .do ......... to ...... 12... zsofc ^sSboex> ........... or do.... ?S ................... do ......... to ....... 9....^oftosfs5boejo ........... or inches. do....*9o/6$fs$ ............ do ......... to ........................................ one inch. One ^^ has eight ^"^ew each of which consists of fifty Sootbexx OF THE DIVISION OF TIME. The people of Telingana, following the astronomical system of the Bramins, divide what they term the infinity of time into four great ages, which they suppose to be in constant revolution ; these they denominate cfccoXs&Dew, or conjunctions ; periods, which seem to have been calculated, by the Bramins, as the probable dates of some remote conjunctions of the heavenly bodies, which they assumed merely to assist astronomical computations, but which have been implicitly adopted by the vulgar as real eras. The first of these four ages is named ^5c*&>X'3&o referring, apparently, to some conjunction which is supposed to have taken place at the && creation ; for, according to the Hindoos, the Supreme Being created the world in the first age of this name. It consists of 1,728,000 years. The second is denominated "ef.l^dCooXS&o, the conjunction of the \j~&* or three sacrificial fires, so .called, because the great sacrifice in which these * fires are used is supposed to have been introduced during this period, which contains 1,296,000 years. The third is named TS^C^^cCwX^ a compound of & two and fc35tf the next, * These three fires are severally named ~A" T 'S^~SoeCSxo - <"$O5boSbo The first is lighted, with particular ceremonies, in the west. The person who celebrates the sacrifice is considered particularly to preside over this fire, which being kept alive during his life, serves to light his funeral pile. From this fire, also, the other two are lighted; one of them is placed in the south, and offerings are mnde in it to the deity of Fire, to the manes of the Pitris, or certain progenitors of mankind, and to a few other deities ; the other is placed in the east, and offerings are made in it to the principal deities presiding over the sacrifice, and to all the other gods. 10 TELOOOOO GRAMMAR. that which followed the two first, viz. the third ; this comprises 8,04,000 years. The fourth or present age is known by the name of S^cJ&oXs&o, properl y signifying vicious or sinful', to this age they assign a period of 4,32,000 years, of which 4,91 6 are already elapsed. If the years in the fourth age be doubled, the number of those in the third is given ; if multiplied by three, the length of the second is found ; and if multiplied by four, the product is the length of the first age. Besides this grand division of time, common to all Hindoos, the people of the Peninsula have another epoch which takes it's name from an ancient prince named ''3 ro e)"sr o ^ T> f^C^b Shalivahana, and commences about the year of Christ 78; the present year 1816 is therefore the 1737-8 of this epoch. It is said that Shalivahana subdued Vikramarka (Bikramajeet) whose era is still used in the north of Hindoostan, and substituted his own era for that of his conquered enemy. The vulgar derive the name of Shalivahana from ^ u ) a heap of strarv or "J^o a certain kind of free, and "5T B ^-o?5 a car ; viz. he whose car was a heap^of straw or the ^o tree. In some encounter with Vikramarka, say they, Shalivahana was obliged to mount this tree, or heap of straw ; but all traditions respecting this prince, are obscured in the most extravagant fables. The people of Telingana class the years of the two epochs above mentioned in cycles of sixty, giving to each of the sixty an appropriate name, as shewn below. .....is the ...... 1st year of each cycle V W ......... is the- . -loth year of each cycle. .................. do ......... 2d do ......... ^$tf ......... do ...... llth do. ..................... do... ...... 3d do ......... M3n-$~*r5 C....do ...... 12th do. XJ ......... do ......... 4th do ......... i&&r*& ......... do ...... 13th do. , . ......... do ......... 5th do ......... \3& ......... do ...... 14th do. .. .............. do ......... 6th do ......... S)s5p ............. do ...... I5th do. ..'. ............ do ......... 7th do.. ....... ># ^>ti> ..... do ...... 16th do. ..................... do ......... 8th do ........ .X>\^&> ......... do ...... 17th do. ..: ................. do ......... 9th do ......... l^^rs.., ...... do ..... 18th do- APPENDIX. 11 is the.t.lDHi yearofeach cycle J^TT^^^f is the 4ot!i year of i-aeh cyi-1.-. do l2oth do oSsS'oX' do 41st do. do, 21st do IwS" do 42d do. do 22d do.......^5&>g do 43d do. do 23d do ^TFtfra do 44th do. 3 ^8 do 24th do 3S^$?r;y>> do 45th do. 3>c5 do 25th do. S3 6^8 do 46th do. tf do 26th do ,ZjSSr&& do...... 47th do. do 27th do <& do 49th do. , do 29th do #o do 50th do. do 30th do sboX$" do 51st do. > do 31st do -S^dCooJ do 52d do. do 32d do P>TS$e- do 53d do. V do 33d do ^\^J d' -.54th do. ~& tfe 8 do 34th do &$^& do ; . . .55th do- SSsS'. . . .do 35th do &>o&>lp do. . . .56th do. CO do 36ih do 5b^5^-^6 do 57th do. do 37th do X^?^ do ... .58th do. do 38th do j[3 ^^ do ... .59th do. > do 39th do ^cC5 do ... 60th do. In Teloogoo, the whole of these years, whether of the cycle of sixty, of Shalivahana, or of the Caleeyoogum, are calculated according to the lunar system, which appears to have been the most ancient method of computing time in India ; and each year consists of twelve lunar months, reckoned from new moon to new moon, not from full moon to full moon, as is the practice at Benares. The ecliptic is divided into twenty seven Nutchatras or constellations, each 12 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. containing 13' 20", and every lunar month takes it's name from the particular Nutchatra near which the moon is observed to be generally at the full. The following are the names of the lunar months, and their corresponding Nutchatras. Mouths, Nutchatras. .-O #,-"fr"C cO - . ^csSbo p55(ob - The moon is not always full in the particular Nutchatra from which the month derives it's name ; but either in that Nutchatra, or in the one which follows or precedes it. This is the utmost extent of the variation; nevertheless, in whichever of the three the moon is full, the name of the month reman.: unaltered. The moon of the month ^_\&J may be full in the Nutchatra named SS" J?$ , or in &>&)> or in "^ r ^ , but the name of the month is always ^ \t$j&ti. Each lunar month is divided into two portions termed 5 or the APPENDIX. 13 full moon t the dark fortnight then begins, in the same manner, with a $ or lunar day named -p>S*CV3 O r the 1st, and ends with &&r=-zrX>? O r the change, \J YJ when the moon, by it's conjunction with the sun, concludes the lunar month; thus, The bright half or increase The dark half or decrease of the moon, named SD^&S&D of the moon, termed ^\^S or> ./ a>F3 new moon. -oS^^g^ fi rs t \ unar aay O f the dark [fortnight, second lunar day. )&05o second. third. e^SoOo third. .fourth. TS'^)9 .fourth. ....... .jljlh. o^o-CS&d,,,., .......,,,,.,. fifth. sixth. 5xx sixth. seventh. <6 SSSo seventh. e-j eighth. e>XxSX> eighth. ninth. tf^Sfc ninth. tenth. 25?f Sto tenth. eleventh. <~~&&'V eleventh. 1 twelfth. T5^# twelfth. % thirteenth. y^^r3$ thirteenth. .fourteenth. ->ti*r$ .fourteenth. .fullmoon. e>;Scr>-5r#g ...lunar day of the [moon's change. A 9^ or lunar day by no means corresponds with the solar day ; according to the Hindoos it is that period during which the moon travels through twelve degrees of her path, it may commence in the morning, at noon, in the evening, or at midnight, and contains a number of XGocSfcex), or Teloogoo hours of 24 English minutes each, varying from 54 to 66 according to the length of the &$. Although the lunar day is of variable length, it's subdivision, the Teloogoo hour, docs not vary, but consists precisely of 24 English minutes. The people '' 14 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. measure this space of time by an empty vessel of a certain size placed in water ; there is a small hole at the bottom of the vessel, through which the water is allowed to enter; and the size both of the hole and of the vessel is so proportioned, that, if care be taken, the vessel sinks at the termination of every 24 English minutes. The orb of the moon is divided into sixteen phases, named Jf^ex) ; but as one of these is considered constant, and the other fifteen are supposed to revolve round it, like a garland of flowers on a string, each revolving % corresponds to a >^ or lunar day. Twelve lunations form a lunar year, but it requires only about 354 solar days to complete this period ; so that the lunar falls behind the solar year (of 365 solar days) more than 1 1 solar days every lunar year. To adjust the lunar time to the solar computation intercalary months are inserted, and this is regulated by assigning to each of the lunar months a particular corresponding sign of the zodiac as explained below. months. Corresponding sign of the zodiac. ,.SSbo. . ...... ...... sk&S&o ............ , .Aries. Taurus. ..Gemini. . . . G t ;5bo .............................. g'^e-kg'sSbo .................. Cancer. Leo. Virgo. Libra. Scorpio. Sagittarius. Capricornus. Aquarius. . .Pisces. So often as the sun remains in the same sign of the zodiac during (wo or days of the moon's change, the month to which the last APPENDIX. 15 belongs is named twice over ; it is first considered $3' or intercalary, and after being completed is reckoned over again, under it's proper name; for example, supposing t^ c sun to have entered the sign Aries on ^>S6cn''SP>K5(? the last lunar day of the lunar month ^ \&j&x>, and to continue in the same sign during 5f>^r T >^n > ^C the last lunar day of the next lunar month ^_ "^^sSbo, the lunar month intervening between the first and the last fcPb F *'Sf p *<$g would be termed $"13_ tf^s&o or intercalated ~j&_ ~^ n ^o^x) } and so soon as it expired, 13_ "'JT'^S&o proper would commece anew. In the course of a certain number of years, two intercalary months occur within the space of one year ; in other words, two months are reckoned over twice. In this case, the proper month intervening between the two is called &cSoS>b-Sw ff ie was t ea month, and is entirely omitted from account. In every intercalary lunar month the sun does not enter into a new sign of the zodiac ; in the course of the wasted month, he enters into two signs. The new moon or ^~3QSto j n the bright fortnight of the lunar month 13 i ? ,o&o is the first ^^ or commencement of the lunar year. Besides the lunar years, months, and days, the people of Telingana use that subdivision of solar time which we term the week, the days of which they reckon from sun rise to sun rise, and name after the Sun, f Moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus and Sajurn, in the following manner. t I subjoin for the information of the reader a list of the Planets, as enumerated in Teloogoo Books. the Sun- tfo , 2&> , C#b the Moon- Mars, the son of the earth. Mercury, the son of the moon by the Hyades- Jupiter, son of Anger asa one of the seven great sages, and the \preceptor of the gods. Venus, the son of Bhrigu, and the preceptor of the giants- Saturn, the offspring of the sun by Ctfhayu shade. Son of Sinhikttjtke moon's ascending node,reckoned the 8th planet. ,....v. The moons descending node, reckoned the 9th planet. 28 * t TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. tf^tfw .............. Sunday. -tS"o \&,-zrtfx> ......... Monday. ...... Tuesday. Wednesday. Thursday. Friday. . ........ Saturday. In a few of the most southern districts, the people of Telingaha, from their intercourse with the inhabitants of the Tamil Country, have adopted their solar computation of the year, of which, therefore, some, brief notice seems to be necessary. Every Tamil solar year has twelve ~3oex> or months, which are named as follows : April. \ ^3 ............ ......... October. May. ^Qsr .................... November. .June. .July. .August. ..September. December. coo ....... . ............. January.] February. March. The Tamil calendar is not adjusted by intercalary da*js according to the European method ; these months, therefore, do, not correspond entirely with the English months by which they are represented. The Tamil year commences on* the sun's entrance into Aries, and each month properly contains as many days, * and fractional parts of a day, as the sun remains in each sign. The civil solar month, however, always commences at sun rise, and continues until the first sun rise in the following month ; and to dispose of the fractional parts of a day, the A star is termed ............. . ....... . ...... .'. ............... or solar day of 24 English hours is divided into sixty X&cSbex) each of whidh is equivalent to twenty four minutes : seven X<&cOoex> and a half, or three English hours, make one ^~^x> the corruption of the Sanscrit word The solar year is also divided into two 9cOorS^xiex>, each of which consists of six solar months; it has also six *2^X) e>q)eA3 or seasons, each of which consists of two months ; viz. >3>o?$ ( bdX)$)$) the spring comprehending ^i^ j and SS"cX$cne^, \\ & J 'toCX3Sb3>) the hot season comprizing W$ and W&, S'&e-'WM &b^) the rainy season including &>?% and "eotf&r*?! 1 , $f#2^q) the winter season containing S&~X&-0 and ~^_ cxx> , and %$&'&&&) the cold season compre- hending 55ir$ and SSo/^o^. When day is used in contradistinction to night it is expressed in Teloogoo by SoTSqeX) ; thus T5^i^^w-'aS>"?3~ <5& he read day and nighf. A day of four and twenty hours is expressed by the words &$x> or "Sj^tfs&D, but these terms are not synonymous ; a?5s^ implies simply a day, without reference either to the date or the day of the week; thus, &&t5s$;o~^' 55^73-^ ?fo 1 will come after ten days; so^S'^bo is applicable to the day of the week only; for instance, were I to ask, on what day of the week you intend to set out for > .Combaconum, I should say in Teloogoo and if instead of i^SsSbo, I were to use as&>, m this instance, the person addressed would not understand that the day of the week was meant to be expressed. de&S-g^osSbo or ~S"5^8 means the dawn, the morning, midday, noo?i> -^cSoo^OSfco the evening, ~& \j the night, and midnight, , lg TELOOGOO GRAMMAR. I sliall conclude the appendix with a list of the principal points of the Compass, over each of which a particular genius is understood to preside. POINTS OP THE COMPASS. GUARDIANS. North. ,.&Cfi&...... The god of riches. >l\F3S5bo ............... ,$b w /^....c853&3C&b ...... Regent of death, andjudye of depart- [ed souls- ................ East ...... ^o ,0, &>.... Regent of the sly. West ...... # 5be*>C&b ...... Regent of water. ...iV; West ...... 'S^'cOaD^) ..... The ruler of the wind. >...2V'. East ...... -&>~TPf&0&>... The destroyer and reproducer. "13 g^S^yrpo ...... S. West.... . .~^_^ ..... Prince of demons. . . , S. East ...... ^^ ......... The genius of fire. FINIS, 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. DEC 2 8 1964 l|yv uw^4iy STACK DEAD R^im nnT25 1967 59 IN STACKS rihftl OCT 111967 ^i * ^ffO^ \JU W %"**^ RECEIVE ;D nro <67 -* -,n Utb u . oA^M ^ e PT. rrp 1 7 1QB o ft fit*? J- 1 IOUO J t> REC'D LH FFR ?'Rfi-7PM LD 21A-60m-4,'64 (E4555slO)476B General Library University of California Berkeley '. - '' rV, "*